Іноземна мова 11.10.2016 07:53

 

VOCABULARY

 

full a 1. повний (заповнений повністю) The bus is full. 2. пов­ний (наповнений кимось/чимось) Phr be full of people (books, buses, ideas, light, etc) 3. повний (не скорочений) a full name (answer, text, etc)

population n населення.

across prep через; по іншу сторону (чого-небудь) There is a bridge across the river. The post office is across the street.

different а 1. інший, не такий. The street has a different name now. Phr be different from sb/sth відрізнятись від кого-небудь/чого-небудь 2. різ­ний, різноманітний different people (things, goods, places, questions, problems, etc); differ v відрізнятись, урізноманітнювати. The new Mos­cow greatly differs from the old Moscow, difference n різниця, відмінність. There is no (little, some, a wide, etc) difference between them; a differ­ence in living conditions (colour, temperature, meaning, etc)

traffic n вуличний рух. There is much (little, no, etc) traffic in the street. The traffic is heavy (light) here. Phr traffic lights світлофор; traffic rules правила дорожнього руху.

quiet а тихий, спокійний a quiet place (street, sea, day, night; child, person; voice, etc)

empty a 1. порожній, незайнятий an empty bag (room, bus, seat, etc) 2. пустий, беззмістовний an empty promise (talk, etc)

famous а славетний, відомий a famous writer (name, picture,  monument, etc) Phr be famous for sb/sth бути відомим кимось/чимось.

government n 1. уряд Moscow is the seat of the Soviet Government. 2. правління, форма правління.

modern а сучасний a modern author (museum, style, dress, in­dustry, model, etc); modern history (literature, art, architecture, etc)

 

WORD COMBINATIONS

 

be situated бути розташованим, знаходитись

in fact фактично, насправді

financial and business centre фінансовий і діловий центр

picture gallery картинна галерея

the working class робочий клас, трудящі

housing conditions житлові умови

modern conveniences сучасні зручності (газ, водопровід, телефон, центральне опалення и т. п.)

 

EXERCISES

 

 

COMPREHENSION

 

Ex 1.  Answer the following questions:                       

 

1. Where is Great Britain situated? What is the country's full name? 2. What is the capital of Great Britain? How big is London? What is its population? Where is London situated? How many bridges are there across the Thames? 3. What is the oldest part of London? How important is the City in the life of the country? What is it like during the day? Why is it quiet and empty at night? 4. What other parts of London are there? 5. What is the West End famous for? 6. Where are the Government offices situated? What is in Downing Street? 7. Why is the City the "money" of London and the West End the "goods" of London? 8. What district is the East End? Why is it the "hands" of London? What are the housing conditions in that part of London? What are the houses of the working people like? 9. Why is London the city of con­trasts?

 

Ex 2.   Look through the text and notes once again, and explain:

 

1. the difference between:

(a) the British Isles, Great Britain, Britain, the United Kingdom, and England.

(b) London and Greater London.

2. what each of the following stands for:

(a) the Old Lady of Threadneedle Street, London's square mile of money.

(b) the "money", the "goods", the "hands", the "lungs" of London.

3. the literal and figurative meanings of:

the City, Westminster, Whitehall, Downing Street.

 

Ex 3. Find in the text the English for:

 

повна назва; адміністративні будівлі; фінансовий і діловий центр; урядові установи; робочий Лондон; район доків і фабрик; повний контрастів

 

KEY STRUCTURES AND WORD STUDY

 

Ex 4.   Make up five groups of three words associated in meaning or area of usage:

 

river     district     home     house     metropolis  country  lake   capital    state      residence    city      county     sea       part      nation

 

Ex 5.  In (a) find words in the text opposite in meaning to the following. In (b) replace the words in bold type by their opposites. Make all necessary changes. Translate the sentences.

 

(a) small, modern, many, noisy, full, short, ugly, rich, big, wide, good, dry, clean, light.                  

 

(b) 1. The bottle is less than half fulll 2. Turn down the radio, please. It's too loud. 3. The area is rich in minerals. 4. The weather was damp and cold. 5. The sun was up. It was light. 6. The bag was full and very heavy. 7. Every time he tells the same story. 8. The girl wants a shorter dress. 9. Old cities usually have narrow streets. 10. The film is too long. 11. That's a bad joke! 12. The country has a dry climate. 13. She likes this sort of heavy humour. 14. My friend lives in a noisy street. 15. The traffic is not so heavy in the morning as in the afternoon.

 

Ex 6.  Compare the meanings of the words in bold type.

 

1. (I) This is a new building, (II) This is a modern building. 2. (I) The painter was a big man. (II) The painter was a great man. 3. (I) He is a new writer, (II) He is a modern writer. 4. (I) It was a damp day. (II) It was a wet day. 5. (I) This is fine silk. (II) This is beautiful silk. 6. (I) The girl was quiet, (II) The girl was silent.

 

Ex 7.  In the following pairs of sentences, bring out the difference in meaning* between the words in bold type.

 

1. (I) There's heavy traffic in the dock area. (II) He speaks with a heavy accent. 2. (I) These are all empty boxes, (II) These are all empty words. 3. (I) It was a dark morning, (II) It was a dark secret. 4. (I) There is a wide avenue across the city. (II) There is a wide difference between these two ideas. 5. (I) It was a quiet colour, (II) He was a quiet child. 6. (I) Long hair is no longer fashionable, (II) Her sister was ill for a long time. 7. (I) This is a big place you have here. (II) "Love" is a big word. 8. (I) The bag is light, (II) The colour is light. 9. (I) This is dry wood. (II) This is a dry subject. 10. (I) The tree is still green, (II) The boy is still green. 11. (I) The house is damp. (II) The climate is damp. 12. (I) It is a fine morning, (II) This is a fine museum.

 

Ex 8.   The words below are names of parts of the body. Complete the sentences, by one of the words (used as a noun) and translate them into Russian.

 

ear (2), heart (2), hand, face, eye, head, foot, mouth, body

 

1. Moscow is the — of the Soviet Union. The — of Moscow is the Kremlin. 2. This year the camp is situated at the — of a hill. 3. The child has a good — for music. 4. The painter is very famous. He has a wonderful — for colour. 5. The boy has a very good — for foreign languages. 6. They have some very nice watches in that shop, quite mod­ern, too, with square — and three —, one for the hours, another for the minutes, and still another for the seconds. 7. Father's seat was at the — of the table. 8. A legislative — is a group of persons who make laws. 9. London lies in the — of the Thames.

 

Ex 9.   Compare the meaning of the following words with the words of the same root in Russian.

 

office, financial, business, hotel, museum, gallery, class, modern, contrast, official, mile, figurative, professional, broker, commercial, firm, company, residence

 

Ex 10.    Translate the following sentences. Note the pattern.

 

 

1. Населення України складає 47 млн. 2. Кожного року сотні киян отримують квартири. 3. У Великому Лондоні більше семи мільйонів жителів. 4. У суботу і неділю Лондон порожніє. Сотні лондонців виїжджають за місто. 5. Вдень вулиці кожної столиці світу заповнені тисячами машин. 6. В Угорщині є одно велике озеро. Це - Балатон. А у Фінляндії десятки великих і сотні малих озер.

 

Ех 11.    Answer the following questions, using 'both' and 'all' according to the model.

 

Model: 1. Which of these two exercises is difficult?

(a) They are both difficult.

(b) Both of them are difficult.

 

2. Where are the government offices in London?

(a) They are all in Whitehall.

(b) All of them are in Whitehall.

 

(A) 1. Which of his brothers is a worker? 2. Are the students in your group Russian? 3. Where are your English books? 4. Are these two stamps English? 5. What are your parents? 6. Where are the children? 7. Are Rooms 30 and 32 on the left-hand side of the corridor? 8. Are the new hotels in Moscow big?

 

(B) 1. What cities are Gorky and Saratov? Are they on the Volga? 2. Are Sochi and Gagri on the Black Sea? 3. Where are the theatres sit­uated in London? 4. Are the Stock Exchange, the Royal Exchange and the Bank of England in the City? 5. Are Cambridge and Oxford Uni­versity towns?

 

Ex 12.    Fill in the blanks with 'it' or 'there' according to the sense.

 

1. The Lake District in England is called so, because— are really a lot of lakes there. — is a very beautiful part of the country. At the beginning of the 19th century — was a group of poets who lived in this district. They were known as Lake Poets.

 

2. Prince Edward Island is the smallest province in Canada, both in territory and population. In fact, — is like one large, well-kept farm. — is no place more than a few miles from the coast. — is a very quiet island. — is almost like being in another world. — is no heavy industry on the island. Its main industry is agriculture. Yet — is a historical place for — is the birthplace of Canada.

 

Ex 13.    Add the correct form of 'there is', or 'it is' to the following.

 

1. — a beautiful cathedral in this place before the war. 2. — a short way from here to the station? 3. — a shorter way to the station if you are in a hurry. 4. — a pity that you won't be at the party. 5. — a woman standing here a minute ago. 6. — a fact that he is a clever man. 7. — no time for tea if we are in a hurry. 8. — time to go to bed. 9. — no place like home. 10. — a problem to get to Oxford from London? — no problem at all. You can get there either by boat or by bus. 11. — one empty seat in the plane when 1 arrived. 12. — a beautiful park here in a couple of years. 13. Don't you think—time for another cigarette? 14. — a place I know where you can have good coffee. 15. — a crossing here?

 

Ex 14.   Study the following phrases. Recall the sentences in which they are used in the text. Use them in sentences of your own.

 

one of the cities; in the world; on both sides of the river; across the river; in fact; during the day; at night; a street with shops; a district of docks; in the City (this part of the town, the West End, the East End); lots of houses; full of contrasts; a city of contrasts

 

Ex 15.   Fill in the blanks with prepositions or adverbs. Retell the passages.

 

(A) 1. The full name—the Soviet Union is the Union—Soviet Socialist Republics. Moscow, its capital, is one — the largest cities — "the world. It is situated — both sides — the Moskva. There are ten bridges — the Moskva river. — fact, there are twelve, but two — them are for underground-trains. 2. — the heart — England, about 112 miles north west — London, is Birmingham, a city — over a million inhabitants. The district around Birmingham is a district — factories and mines. The nearest port is Liverpool—the mouth—the river Mersey—the Irish Sea. 3. One—the towns, right—the centre—England is Stratford, Shakespeare's birthplace. — the bank — the river Avon there is a mon­ument to Shakespeare. Not far — it is Shakespeare's house; a small house — small rooms, and a small garden. Now Stratford is a busy town — streets full — people and cars. 4. The streets — the West End — London are all famous — some­thing: Piccadilly — its clubs, Harley Street — its doctors, Charing Cross Road — its bookshops. 5. If the City is a busy place — the day and a quiet place — night, Soho (— the heart — the West End) which is famous — its French, Italian and Swedish restaurants, is a busy place — night, but quiet — the day.

(B) Scotland is — the north — the British Isles. It is — the north — England. Scotland is a country — its own traditions, traditions which are alive even now and are rare — the modern world. Scotland is part — Britain, but Scotland is not England. It differs — England — many ways. Scotland has her own administration of government* which is centred—Edinburgh. She has her own national heroes, a national dress, the kilt** (which is, strictly speaking, only — men); her own typical instrument, the pipes*** (or the bagpipes); her own nation­al country dances and songs (some — which are very popular — Eng­land, too); her poetry (some — which is famous — the English-speak­ing world). In short: Scotland is not England.

 

Ex 16.    Fill in the blanks with a suitable word. Use the correct form. Translate the sentences into Russian.

 

several (2), different, difference (4), differ, damp (2), famous (3), full, empty (2), quiet, modern

 

1. Charles Dickens is a — 19th century English writer. He is— for his novels about working-class England. 2. There are—paintings by Rembrandt in the Hermitage, the world — museum in Leningrad. 3. The Rossiya hotel in Moscow is an interesting example of — archi­tecture. 4. In the words of the great American writer Mark Twain the — between the right word and the almost right word is the — between lightning and the lightning bug.**** 5. The family was out of town, and the | house stood —. 6. The play is — of humour. 7. You really mustn't smoke on an — stomach. 8. The woman's clothes were — with the rain. 9. There were — people at the bus-stop. 10. There is a world of — be­tween "few" and "a few", "little" and "a little". 11. October weather is — and foggy. 12. In contrast to his brother who is a noisy sort of man, he is very —. 13. The sisters — from one another in the colour of their eyes. 14. In fact there is no — in meaning between "have something" and "have got something". 15. Three — persons told me the same story.

 

Ex 17.    Replace the Russian words and phrases by suitable English equivalents. Retell the passage.

 

I was born in a small town in the north of England. There is a big castle in the centre of the town and (декілька) fine old churches. Here most of the streets are dark and (вузькі); the houses are on both sides of the streets and they are not much (відрізняються від) each other. In the suburbs the houses are bigger and newer, with (усіма зручностями), and the streets are (ширші).

There are three cinemas in the town. One of them is not far from our house. I usually go there once a week; but when the film is good we all go to the cinema together. Before the war we still had trams, but now we only have buses.

The town itself is а (тихе) place now, with very few people in the streets during the day and very (невеликій вуличний рух). But there was a time (декілька) hundred years ago when the town was quite (відомим). (Дійсно) it has a long and interesting his­tory.

The country around it is very beautiful. There is a river nearby where one can bathe, or fish. There are two bridges (через) the river. On the other side of the river there are some low, green hills.

 

Ex 18.   Test translation.

 

(A) 1. Столиця України - Київ. Він розташований по обох берегах Дніпра. Київ - велике промислове місто з численними фабриками и заводами. Це також річковий порт. Київ - культурний центр країни. Тут багато музеїв, картинних галерей, театрів і кіно. Бібліотека імені Вернадського - одна з самих великих бібліотек світу і найбільша бібліо­тека України. 2. Київ – дуже древнє місто; йому більше 1500 років, але це також і молоде місто з новими проспектами, гарними площами і парками. Нові райони міста відрізняються від старих. вулиці у но­вих районах широкі, с високими будинками по обох сторонах. Тут немає ні фабрик, ні заводів. Тут багато сонця і повітря. Житлові будинки мають всі зручності. В Києві живе біля 3 млн. жителів.

(В) 1. Яка найгарніша вулиця Києва? 2. Скільки мостів через Дніпро? 3. Де найбільший стадіон в Києві? Як він називається? 4. Чим відрізняються нові райони Києва від старих? 5. Де найінтенсивніший вуличний рух у Києві? 6. Чим відомий Хрещатик? 7. Скільки мільйонів жителів складає населення України ?

 

GRAMMAR

 

There is ... There are ... . Be. Have.

 

Ex 19.   Study the following charts.

 

(A) With Countable Nouns

There is ('s)	a (some)	book on the table.
There is	a	pen and some pencils in my
		bag.
2. There are ('re)	some (a few)	chairs in the room.
3. Is there	any (a)	river in''this place?
4. There was	no*	wind yesterday.
5. There were	few	factories in this district.
6. There will be	a lot of	students at the meeting
('11 be)
7. There won't be	many	visitors tomorrow.

 

(B) With Uncountable Nouns

There is

some little a little no a lot of much

bread in the breadbox. sugar in the cup. butter on the plate. money in my bag. oil in our country. work at our office today.

 

Ex 20.    Use the correct form of the verb 'be'.

 

1. The hour was late, there—no taxis. 2. There—a lot of stu­dents at our Institute now, there — more next year. 3. — there no talk about it at supper? 4. — there time to do this work tomorrow? 5. There — a lot of people at the meeting tomorrow. 6. There — little snow in this part of the country last year. 7. There — only a few new houses here some years ago. 8. The street was very noisy when there — a bus line here. 9. There — a lot of coal in the Donbas. 10. There — a lot of fruit in our garden next summer.

 

Ex 21.   Make up sentences of your own according to the patterns in the above charts.

 

1. a beautiful picture; on the wall. 2. a lot of children; in the gar­den. 3. any factories; in this town; before the revolution? 4. a few Eng­lish books; in my library. 5. a rich library; at our institute. 6. one thousand words; in this dictionary. 7. any water; in the glass? 8. time; for this work; tomorrow. 9. how many parts; in this book? 10. a picture of London and two maps; on the wall. 11. a lot of fruit; in Bulgaria. 12. traffic lights; at every corner in this city. 13. any gold; in this part of the country? 14. no guests; in the house; last Sunday. 15. milk; a little; in the bottle. 16. much money; not; in my pocket; when I was a student. 17. how many; films; at the festival; of the Moscow Studio? 18. heavy traffic; in the centre of the city.

 

Ex 22.    Replace the Russian words by suitable English equivalents.

 

1. He takes (мало) sugar in his tea. 2. There is (небагато) sugar in the sugar-bowl. 3. She has (декілька) books on this subject in her li­brary. 4. There are (багато) interesting books in my bookcase. 5. There are (зовсім немає) factories in this town. 6. There is (трошки) bread in the house. 7. There is (небагато) butter in the butter-dish. 8. I had (мало) money on me at the moment. 9. You won't get (багато) advice from him. He is too young. 10. Is there (яка-небудь) river in those parts? 11. Give me (яку-небудь) book on the Economy of this country. 12. There is (великих) traffic in this part of the city. 13. There is (багато) fruit in the Caucasus. 14. Did you get (якусь) information from this book?

 

Ex 23.    Express the opposite idea.

 

1. There are few government offices in this part of the town. 2. There is only one bridge across the river in this place. 3. When I was there last, there were no houses on the left side of the street. 4. There isn't any sugar in my tea. 5. We had a fine spring, there will be a lot of apples this year. 6. There is some writing paper on the desk. 7. There was no time to visit the museum. 8. There are several bookshops in this street.

 

Ex 24.   Complete the following, using “ there is ...”, “ there are ..”'. Use “a lot of”, “much”, “many”, “few”, “a few”, “little”, “any”, “no”  where necessary.

 

1. This is the older part of the city (historical places). 2. Moscow is a very big city (more than 5,000 streets, avenues, and squares). 3. The theatre is not far from here (still a shorter way across the square). 4. This sidestreet is very quiet (traffic). 5. The film was interesting to me (peo­ple who did not like it). 6. It's very late (time to go there on foot). 7. The sky is dark (a heavy rain in a few minutes). 8. The lecturer was a very interesting man (questions when the lecture was over). 9. I am sorry we are late. (another train for at least two hours). 10. Nobody is at home (light in the windows). 11. Don't leave yet (supper soon). 12. We'll have a hard time this spring (examinations). 13. I have an invitation to the party (interesting people).

 

Ex 25.    Change the following sentences, using 'there is ...', 'there are ...'.

 

1. We have about 5,000 male and female names in the list of Russian names, but not all of them are popular today. 2. The Rossiya Hotel is the biggest in the USSR and in Europe. It has 3,071 rooms and may have 5,374 guests. 3. Moscow has 28 markets and soon it will have anoth­er two. 4. "Have you tram-lines in Moscow?" "Yes, we have, but not many." 5. They still had several empty seats in the plane when we ar­rived at the airport. 6. They have a very good dance band in that res­taurant. 7. Hurry up. We have no time for tea. 8. Some five years ago they had no metro in their town. Now they have several lines and no transport problems. 9. We shall have a heavy rain in a moment, I think. 10. They had no railway in that part of Siberia for a long time. 11. They will have a good film on at our local cinema tomorrow. 12. How many students have you got in your class?

 

Ex 26.    Translate the following sentences into English, using 'there is ..., there are ...'.

(A) 1. У Лондоні багато театрів. Всі вони в Уест-Енді. 2. В Сіті немає житлових будинків. 3. вдень на вулицях Сіті дуже багато людей, а вночі вулиці пусті. 4. На Оксфорд Стрій дуже багато магазинів. 5. В Іст-Енді мало парків, там багато фабрик і заводів.

(B) 1. В Україні багато великих річок 2. Скільки озер в Україні? 3. На Дніпрі багато великих промислових міст. 4. Скільки річок у Києві? 5. На Хрещатику багато високих гарних будинків. Багато там і мага­зинів. 6. В Києві декілька залізничних вокзалів.

(C) 1. Скільки слів у цьому словнику? 2. Раніше ця вулиця не була шумною, а тепер на ній великий рух. 3. В цьому році у нашому садку буде дуже багато квітів. 4. У нашій в аудиторії немає годинника. 5. В цій бібліотеці є читальний зал? 6. Скільки буде аудиторій у новій будівлі вашого університету? 7.Чому твій портфель такий важкий? - У ньому словник, підручник і декілька зошитів. 8. В пляшці мало молока. 9 В цій частині країни мало холодних місяців, але у кожному місяці буває декілька холодних днів. 10. Раніше в цьому місті не було кінотеатрів, а тепер тут три кінотеатри і клуб.

 

Ех 27.   Practise the following according to the models.

 

Model 1:         Now Mary is well but a week ago she (very ill).

but a week ago she was very ill.

 

1. I am a teacher now but a year ago I (a student). 2. Now we are students but a few months ago we (school children). 3. It is cold today but yesterday it (still warm). 4. Now she is a long way from here, but yesterday she (at home). 5. He is an engineer now but two years ago he (Д worker). 6. Now the weather is nice but early in the morning it (rainy). 7. Now the hall is empty but it (full of people) just five minutes ago. 8. There are a lot of people in the streets today, but yesterday they (empty).

 

Model 2:         I think (he, be, there, tomorrow)

I think he'll be there tomorrow.

 

I think: 1. he, be a musician. 2. they, be present at the meeting. 3. we, be at home, on Sunday. 4. the weather, be good, tomorrow. 5. there, be a lot of people at the party. 6. she, be a good teacher. 7. the party, be very interesting. 8. the book, be very difficult for her. 9. I, be there, at five o'clock, too.

 

Ex 28.    Translate the following sentences.

 

1. Вона буде гарним спеціалістом. 2. Ми були у Києві під час кінофестивалю. 3. Вона зараз у селі. Вони будуть у місті не раніше понеділка . 4. Я буду вдома у суботу. 5. Він був дуже цікавим доповідачем (лектором). 6. Вони були у Лондоні два роки тому. 7. Скільки студентів у вашій групі? 8. Він має прекрасну бібліотеку. 9. Приходьте до нас у неділю. Всі будуть раді бачити вас. 10. Багато років тому це місто було столицею країни. 11. Завтра я не матиму часу. 12. Вони мали гарну машину, а де вона зараз?

 

Ех 29.    Form disjunctive questions.

 

1. You weren't busy in the morning. 2. Your school was near home. 3. Your parents are not in town in summer. 4. A lot of people will be present at the meeting today. 5. There are a lot of interesting things in this museum. 6. Everybody'll be happy to meet the famous writer. 7. They had quite a problem with the boy. 8. The train was not late today. 9. We'll have a meeting on Friday. 10. Everybody's busy. 11. She has a country house near Moscow. 12. I'm right. 13. There's nobody at home. 14. You'll be in Irkutsk on Saturday. 15. The book won't be interesting for them. 16. Tomorrow's Sunday.

 

Ex 30.    Open the brackets, using the correct form of the verb 'be' and retell the texts.

 

(A)                                 PARKS OF LONDON

 

There — more than eighty parks in London. The best known parks near the centre of London — Hyde Park, Regent's Park and St. James's Park. Hyde Park —- a large park of three hundred and forty acres. At the time of King Henry VIII there — wild animals in ,the park Today people walk-in the park or sit on the grass. The Serpentine — a lake in the middle of Hyde Park. In summer you can swim in the Serpentine or go out in a boat.

Regent's Park — larger than Hyde Park. The London Zoo — in Regent's Park. There—more than six thousand animals and birds in the Zoo. You can visit the Zoo by boat. The boat goes along the Regent's Canal. There — also an open air theatre in Regent's Park. You can see Shakespeare's plays there in summer.

St. James's Park — the oldest and the smallest of these three parks. It — very near Buckingham Palace. The. lake and gardens in St. James's Park—very beautiful.

 

(B) In A.D. 61, in the times of the Romans, London (it — Londi-nium in those days) — a walled city. But there — probably a small settlement even before that time. The first settlements — on two hills on the north bank of the Thames. These places today—Westminster and St. Paul's.* In the city walls there— "gates". Now there—still several: Bishopsgate and Ludgate — two of them.

 

Reported Speech

Imperative (Requests, Warnings, Instructions, Prohibition)

 

Ex 31.   Study the following chart.

Direct Speech	Reported Speech
The old lady says/said to the young man: "Give me a hand with my heavy suitcase." "Never say such things again," Father said to me. Peter said to his wife: "Don't forget to send me a telegram, please."	The old lady asks/asked the young man to give her a hand with her heavy suitcase. Father told/ordered me nev­er to say such things again. Peter asked/begged his wife not to forget to send him a telegram.

 

Ex 32.    Use Reported Speech.**

 

1. "Don't repeat this mistake again!" the instructor warned the sportsman. 2. "Leave your address with the secretary," the assistant said. 3. "Phone to me for an answer tomorrow," the manager said to the client. 4. "Don't be so silly," the father said to the kid. 5. "Give a smile," the photographer said to me. 6. "Please, help me to make a decision," Ann asked her friend. 7. "Don't leave these books on the table, put them back on the shelf," the librarian said to the student. 8. "Be a good girl and sit quietly for five minutes," the nurse said to the child. 9. "Leave your things here," my companion advised me. 10. "Don't discuss this question now," said the chairman.

 

Degrees of Comparison of Adjectives

 

Ex 33.  Study the following chart.

 

Positive	Comparative	Superlative
small hot . easy narrow	smaller hotter easier narrower	smallest hottest easiest narrowest
old	older  elder	oldest   eldest
comfortable	more comfortable	most comfortable
good bad little much many far	better worse less more farther further	best worst least most farthest furthest

 

Ex 34.   Compare the following according to the model.

 

Model:            the Don, the Dnieper, the Volga: long, short

 

1. The Don, the Dnieper and the Volga are long rivers.

2. The Dnieper is longer than the Don but shorter than the Volga.

3. The Volga is the longest of the three, and the Don is the shortest.

 

1. the Urals, the Pennines, the Alps: high, low; old, young. 2. the climate of Karelia, the Central Asia Republics, Siberia: damp, dry; cold, hot. 3. the Azov Sea, the White Sea, the Caspian Sea: deep, shallow; cold, warm. 4. the Behring Strait, the English Channel, the Gibraltar Strait: narrow, wide. 5. the four seasons of the year: spring, summer, autumn, winter; cold, warm; beautiful.

 

Ex 35.   Use the following patterns in sentences of your own.

 

1. The weather today is better (worse) than it was yesterday.

2. This book is as interesting as that one.

3. The Thames is not so (as) long as the Dnieper.

4. He is twice as old as I am.

5. His library is much richer than mine.

6. She is two years younger than I (am).

 

 

 

 

Ex 36.   Translate the following sentences.

 

1. Який з шести континентів найбільший? 2. Який найкоротший місяць року? 3. Вдень на вулицях міста набагато біль­ше транспорту, ніж увечері. 4. Нові будівлі готелів більш сучасні і вони набагато вищі, ніж старі 5. Моя бібліотека не така цікава і багата, як бібліотека мого друга. 6. Миколай наймодніший з моїх друзів. Йому стільки ж років, скільки і моїй молодшій сестрі. 7. Хто в іхній в сім’ї найстарший? 8. Влітку ми маємо більше вільного часу, ніж взимку. 9. В кінці року в їхньому відділі вдвічі більше роботы, ніж зазвичай. 10. Мій брат на три с половиною роки старший за мене.

 

Ех 37.    Fill in the blanks with the correct form of the adjective given in the brackets. Use the article where necessary.

 

1. The Soviet Union is — country in the world (large). Its territory is 22,402.2 thousand square kilometres. 2. There is no country in the world that is as — in minerals as the Soviet Union (rich). The Soviet Union has — reserves in the world of important minerals such as coal, oil, gas, iron, zinc, nickel and others (rich). 3. Moscow, the capital of the Soviet Union, is one of its — towns (old). It is — than Leningrad (old). 4. Red Square is — place in Moscow (beautiful). In old days it was— place in Moscow (busy). 5. The Hermitage in Leningrad is one of—of the world's art museums (fine). There are—than two and a half million works of art of different ages, countries and peoples (many). 6. Leningrad, like Moscow, is one of — industrial centres in our country (important). 7. The British Museum in London is famous for its library, which has one of — collections of books in the world (rich). 8. The Eng­lish Channel, at its — part, the Strait of Dover, is 32 kilometres wide (narrow). 9. Among the world's— countries are the Vatican, in Rome, and Monaco, which is situated in the South of France (small). 10. The Sears Tower in Chicago is the world's — all-electric building (tall). It is — than both the Empire State building and the World Trade Cen­tre in New York (tall).

 

The Article

 

Ex 38.   Study the following chart.

 

Ex 39.   Make up situations, explaining the use of the article in the following pairs of sentences.

 

1. (I) This is a house, (II) This is the house. 2. (I) You can have a new bag. (II) You can have the new bag. 3. (I) May I havean English dictionary? (II) May I have the English dictionary? 4. (I) This is a fa­mous picture, (II) This is the famous picture. 5. (I) You had a copy of my report, (II) You had the copy of my report. 6. (I) She is a doctor, (II) She is the doctor.

 

Ex 40.    Fill in the blanks with articles.

 

1. This is—very difficult sentence for me.—sentence has too many unknown words in it. 2. Ours is — noisy street. — street is in the centre of the city. It is — street with very heavy traffic during the day. 3. "Is there — theatre in your town?" "Yes, we have one. — theatre is in the town's central square." 4. You have — mistake in the second form of the verb. — mistake is bad, it is not — spelling but — gram­mar mistake. 5. He has— interesting collection of butterflies. —col­lection is the second best in our country. 6. He has — elder brother. — brother is away the greater part of the year. He is— sailor.

 

Ex 41.    Fill in the blanks with articles. Retell the passage.

 

I like Elsom. It is — seaside resort in — South of England. — town is not very far from Brighton and it has the charm of — old town. — town was never fashionable. In winter Elsom was usually — quiet place and the Dolphin — very comfortable inn. In — hall of — inn there still is a framed letter from Mr Thackeray, — famous writer. In August and September — town is full of holiday-makers and is for two months — noisy place.

(After "The Round Dozen" by W. S. Maugham)

READING

Ex 42.    Read the text, timing yourself. Make up questions covering the contents. Retell the text.

 

IONA

 

The island of Iona is situated to the West of Scotland. Iona is a very small island. In fact it is one of the smallest islands in the Atlantic.

The population of the island is not large. There are not very many people there. Life on the island is very different from life in town; there are no big shops or blocks of flats* or busy roads. There is only one car on the island, but every family has a boat. There is lots of fish and crabs in the sea.

The houses have no modern conveniences. There is no electricity for electric lights and no running water. So in the summer people are up with the sun and in bed with the sun, too. In the winter they have oil lamps or candles in their cottages.

Iona is a wonderful place for a holiday. It is very quiet there. There are hundreds of holiday-makers there every summer. There are beautiful long beaches where the sand is very, very white, and most of the time the sea is very clear. In fact Iona is famous for its beaches.

The island also has its historical place of interest — the ancient Abbey, which is on a small hill in the middle of the island. In fact there is very little of the old Abbey today, only the walls and the old stone church.

After a holiday on lona life in a big city with its noise, tall houses, big shops and heavy traffic is a great contrast.

 

SPEECH AND COMPOSITION

 

Ex 43.   (A) Ask your friend:

what the capital of the USA is; the name of the official residence of the president of the USA is; New York is famous for; islands it is situated on; the longest river in the USA is; river in Great Britain is the most important; the British Museum is famous for; the names of the two oldest universities in Great Brit­ain are; country has the largest population in the world; countries are situated on islands; the oldest part of Moscow is; the Kremlin is famous for; places of interest there are in Moscow; etc.                                                                                                                 

how big the population of the Soviet Union is; many re­publics there are in the Soviet Union; large the Soviet Union is; old Moscow is; different new Moscow is from old Moscow; many people there are in Moscow; many stations the Moscow metro has; many metro stations there were in 1935; many bridges there are across the Moskva; etc.

if the USA is the full name of the country; New York (whether) is the capital of the USA; the Houses of Parlia­ment is one building; there is much traffic in Oxford Street; the Thames is as long as the Volga;

the Thames is the longest river in England; the Brit­ish Isles were part of the continent at one time; etc. when Leningrad had the name of Petersburg; Moscow had the biggest fire; Moscow was not the capital of the country; Red Square is full of people; etc.

where Great Britain is situated; Hyde Park is; the new build­ing of Moscow University is situated; etc.

why Moscow is called a port of five seas; the seat of'the British Government is called the Houses of Parliament; etc.

 

(B) Tell me:

 

what your name is; place you are from; your home town is like now; it was like ten years ago; places of in­terest there are in your town; your town (street) is

famous for; time you are usually free; your plans for tomorrow (next Sunday) are; lessons you will have tomorrow; etc.

how old you are; big your family is; many brothers and sisters you have; far your home town is from Moscow; far your house is from the Institute; many lessons you have every day; many lessons you had yesterday; etc.

if your home is in a new district; your house has all (whether) modern conveniences; there is much traffic in your street; you have classes every day; you will be free tomorrow; you were busy yesterday; you were a stu­dent two years ago; you have many friends; your friends are also students; etc.

when your classes are over; reading halls are full of stu­dents; the Institute is a quiet place; students have the busiest time of the year; you will have your examina­tions; etc.

where your home town is situated; you are usually on Sun­days; you were last Sunday; etc. who your best friend is; has a rich library of English books in your group; you usually have talks on books with; etc.

 

Ex 44.   Answer the following questions, using the vocabulary of the lesson. Sum up your answers.

 

SOME FACTS ABOUT THE SOVIET UNION

 

1. What is the full official name of the Soviet Union? 2. What is the geographical position of the country? 3. What seas and oceans wash its shores in the North? In the North-East? In the East? 4. What countries border on the Soviet Union in the West? In the South? In the South-East? 5. How large is the country's territory? 6. How big is the popu­lation of the USSR? 7. What are the names of the fifteen Union Repub­lics comprising the USSR? 8. What are the capitals of the Union Re­publics? 9. What are the biggest rivers in the European part of the USSR? In Siberia? In the Far East? In Central Asia? 10. What are the largest lakes on the territory of our country? 11. Is the Caspian Sea a lake or a sea? 12. What is Lake Baikal famous for? 13. What are the biggest mountain chains in our country? 14. What are the highest mountain peaks in the Caucasus? In the Pamir? 15. What are the most .important industrial districts, and where are they situated?

 

A VISIT TO MOSCOW

 

1. How old is Moscow? 2. What is the heart of Moscow? 3. What is Moscow famous for? 4. What places of interest are there in Moscow? 5. Which historical building do you think the most interesting, and why? 6. What are Moscow's shopping centres like? 7. What parks are there in Moscow? 8. How many stadiums are there in Moscow? 9. What is Moscow's biggest stadium? 10. What are the new residential districts like? 11. What conveniences are there in a modern flat? 12. How different is new Moscow from old Moscow? 13. How big is Moscow's population? 14. What will Moscow be like in ten years' time?

 

GOVERNMENT IN BRITAIN

 

1. What is Britain's political system? 2. What is a constitutional monarchy? 3. Why is England a kingdom? 4. What is the role of the mon­arch? 5. Does the country have a written constitution? 6. What is Brit­ain's legislative body? 7. How many chambers are there in the British Parliament? What are their names? 8. What is the country's executive body? 9. Who forms the British Cabinet? 10. What are the main politi­cal parties in Britain? 11. What party is in power? 12. Who is Prime Minister?

 

Ex 45.    Read the following. Answer the questions. Write up the passage in Eng­lish.

 

На Британських островах, відокремлених від Західної Європи протокою Ла-Манш (the English Channel), розташувалась Великобританія, а офіційно –об’єднане Королівство Великобританії та Північної Ірландії. За формою правління ця держава є конститу­ційною монархією. Площа Великобританії 244,1 тис. кв. км, населення складає 56 млн. жителів. Державна мова - англійська.

До складу об’єднаного Королівства входять Англія, Уельс, Шот­ландія, Північна Ірландія (Ольстер Ulster).

Англія - історичне ядро об’єднаного Королівства – розташувалась у південній і середній частинах найбільшого з Британських островів - Великобританії.

Уельс займає південно-західну частину острова Великобританії, Шотландія – його північну частину, а також прилеглі острови: Гебридські (the Hebrides), Оркнейські (the Orkneys) і Шотландські (the Shetland Islands).

Північна Ірландія розташована у західній частині об’єднаного Королівства  на острові Ірландія, другим за величиною острові.

 

Questions:

 

1. What is the full official name of the country often called "Great Britain"? 2. What piece of water separates the British Isles from the Continent? 3. What form of government does the country have? 4. How big is the country's territory? 5. How big is its population? 6. What is the country's state language? 7. What are the names of the parts com­prising Great Britain? 8. What is the country's ancient heartland? 9. Is Wales in the south-eastern or south-western part of the island of Great Britain? 10. Where is Scotland situated? 11. What islands lie off the Scottish coast? 12. Which island is the larger — Great Britain or Ireland?

 

Ex 46.    Act as interpreter. Sum up the dialogue.

 

Question: What is the political system of Ukraine?

Answer: Україна – суверенна, незалежна, демократична, соціальна, правова держава.

 

Q: What is the highest body of state power in Ukraine? Верховна Рада – вищий орган державної влади в Україні.

Q: How many chambers are-there in the Supreme Soviet? А: Верховна Рада – однопалатний орган державної влади в Україні.

Q: What are the legislative and executive bodies of the USSR? А: Головним законодавчим органом є Верховна Рада, а виконавчим органом є Президент і Кабінет Міністрів.

Q: What is the role of Kyiv in the political life of the country? А: Його роль дуже велика. У києві знаходиться Верховна Рада і Кабінет Міністрів країни. Президент також працює у Києві.

 

Ех 47.   Speak on the following topics. Make use of the words and phrases given below.

 

1. In My Part of the Town

 

the finest part of the city; a new district; many new buildings; long streets of tall houses; blocks of flats; be different from; be famous for;

 

clean; quiet; little traffic; little noise; no factories; no factory smoke; a beautiful park with big old trees; trees on both sides of the street; lots of flowers; a post office across the street; a cinema at the corner; many different shops; an excellent bus service; in fact.

 

2. Our New Home

 

a family of four; a two (three, etc)-room flat; a corridor; a kitchen; a bedroom; a living-room; a bathroom; all modern conveniences; pictures on the walls; a carpet on the floor; flowers in a vase; a table in the middle of the room (at the wall); curtains on the windows; an armchair in the corner; quiet; large windows; a TV set; a bookcase with books.

 

3. My Home Town

 

(a) a small town; green; quiet; clean; few big houses; lots of one-family cottages; modern conveniences; narrow streets; a river; be situat­ed on both sides of a river; lots of trees and flowers; much snow in winter; several bridges across the river; a railway station in the heart of the town; be famous for; be different from; full of holiday-makers in summer; at the foot of a big mountain.

(b) a big industrial centre; capital; noisy; heavy traffic; in the heart of ...; several parks; lots of office buildings; full of people; hotels; big shops; tall houses; population; be empty on Sundays; in the country; be famous for.

 

Ex 48.   Discuss the following, giving your arguments for or against.

 

1. You think that it's better to live in a big town. Your friend says that he likes living in a small town much better.

2. You are a student living away from home. Compare the city you are living in now with your home town. Say which is bigger, has more places of interest, etc.                                    .

3. You have been on a holiday to the seaside. Your friends have been in a students' camp on the Volga or some other river, or in the moun­tains. Describe each of these places and compare them.

 

Ex 49.    Tell the story of the picture.

 

 

Excuse me, are you the Old Lady of Threadneedle Street?

 

Ex 50.   Subjects for oral and written composition.

 

1. Moscow—the capital of the USSR.

2. The state and political system of the USSR.

3. The story of the capital of one of the Union Republics.

4. The state and political system of (a) Great Britain; (b) the USA.

5. Places of interest in London (Warsaw, Budapest, Prague, Sofia, Berlin, Paris, Rome, Washington, etc).

6. My home town.

7. Places of interest in your home town.

8. Describe a busy street, a shopping centre, a building of historical importance.

9. Your home town now and what it was like ten years ago.

10. New cities on the map of the USSR.

11. Write a letter to your friend who has left the town and has gone to live in another. Ask him to describe it.

 

LESSON TWO

 

Text:           An Englishman's Diary (after Stephanie Andrews).

Grammar: The Indefinite Tense Forms (Present, Past and Future). Reported Speech. Sequence of Tenses.

 

AN ENGLISHMAN'S DIARY

 

An Englishman's day — and who can describe it better than an Englishman's wife? It begins when he sits down to breakfast with his morn­ing newspaper.   

As he looks through the headlines there is nothing he likes better than his favourite breakfast of cornflakes with milk and sugar (por­ridge if he lives in the North), fried bacon and eggs, marmalade¹ on toast² and tea (with milk, of course) or coffee.

He in fact gets such a meal if there is enough money in the family to buy it.

After breakfast, except on Saturdays and Sundays which are holi­days, he goes to work by train, tube,³ bus, car, motor scooter, motor bike⁴ or walks there. He leaves home at about 7:30.

At offices or factories there is a tea or coffee break at eleven. Then at mid-day everything stops for lunch.⁵ Most offices and shops close for an hour from one to two.

Englishmen are fond of good plain food, and they usually want to know what they eat. They like beefsteaks, chops, roast beef and York­shire pudding,⁶ fried fish and chipped potatoes.                     

There are usually two courses⁷ in the mid-day meal — a meat course with a lot of vegetables, a sweet dish,⁸ perhaps fruit pudding and cus­tard⁹ with tea or coffee to finish.

Then back to work again with another break in the middle of the afternoon, once again for tea or coffee, sometimes with a cake or bis­cuit.¹⁰

The working day finishes at any time between four and six. When an Englishman gets home he likes to inspect his garden before the eve­ning meal: tea, high tea,¹¹ dinner or supper. When his evening meal is over, the Englishman may do a little gardening and then have a walk to the "local"¹² (the nearest beerhouse) for a "quick one" (a drink, al­coholic, of course!). There are a lot of people at the "local" and he can play darts, dominoes, billiards or discuss the weather, the local events or the current situation. But if the Englishman stays at home, he may listen to the radio, watch television, talk or read.

Then at any time between 10 and 12 he has his "nightcap" — a drink with a snack — and then off to bed ready for tomorrow.            

 

NOTES

 

1. marmalade:  a kind of jam made of citrus fruit джем (особ. апельсиновий або лимонний). Note that the English for мармелад is "candied fruit jelly".

2. toast: (a slice/piece of) bread made brown and crisp by heating at a fire скибка хліба, підрум’янена на вогні; грінка. In English this noun is uncountable, always used in the singular.       

3. tube (coll): the London underground railway (from the shape of the tunnels, which look like large tubes into which the trains fit very neatly; similarly a tube train, a tube station).

4. motor bike (coll): motor cycle                         

5. lunch: any light meal, especially the regular mid-day meal between breakfast and dinner. For the working people "lunch" is "dinner" and the evening meal "supper". Dinner, whether eaten at mid-day or in the evening, is a formal meal with several courses.

6. Yorkshire pudding: пиріг із рідкого тіста (приправа до м’яса). The dish comes from Yorkshire, England's largest county. Yorkshiremen eat it separately before a meal.

7. course; a part of a meal. Eg We usually have a three-course dinner.

8. dish: a particular kind of food страва. Eg My favourite dish is spaghetti with cheese.

9. custard: a kind of sauce made of milk, sugar, eggs, etc солодкий крем (з яєць, молока, муки і т.д.)

10. biscuit: сухе печиво, галета. Note that the English for бісквит is "sponge cake".

11. high tea: an evening meal with tea and usually meat, eggs, etc ситна вечеря з чаєм            

12. local (coll): the local public house, or "pub"

 

VOCABULARY

 

describe vt описувати (словами) describe a person (a picture, a place, etc) He described to us the most interesting places of the town; descrip­tion n опис give a description

as cj коли; в той час як; поки; в міру того як As he walked on he got more and more tired.

meal n їжа; вживання їжі Не likes a good meal in the middle of the day. We.have four meals a day. У нас чотирьохразове харчування. (Ми їмо чотири рази на день.)

enough а достатній (за кількістю) There is enough time (mon­ey, food, etc). There are enough books for everybody. He hasn't got enough money to buy a radio-set yet; enough adv достатньо, досить, доволі The book is interesting enough. I don't know him well enough.

except prep крім, за винятком Everybody knew the answer except me; exception n виняток There are several exceptions to this rule. Phr with the exception of (sb/sth) за винятком (когось/ чогось)

leave vtlvi (left) 1. йти, від’їздити; вирушати When did they leave (Moscow) for Kiev? What time does the train leave? It's time to leave. 2. залишати Leave your hat and coat in the cloakroom. Leave the letters with the secretary. He left his watch at home. Він лишив (забув) годинник вдома. Phr leave sb alone дати комусь спокій Phr leave school закінчити школу; 3. leave out пропускати, не включати He told the story leaving out the names.

any indef pron будь-який Any student knows it. Take any book you like.

discuss vt обговорювати discuss a question (a film, a contract, the price, the weather, etc); discussion n обговорення have a discussion (on/about sth)

event n випадок, подія an important (unforgetta­ble, sporting, etc) event The past year was full of events. Phr current events поточні події

stay vi 1. лишатись Не must stay at home for some days as he is ill. Will you stay for dinner? 2. зупинятися, жити, гостювати (десь, у когось); stay at/in a hotel (at one's friend's; with friends, etc); stay n перебування

watch vt спостерігати, стежити (за. кимось/чимось) watch (the) children (stars, etc); Phr 1. watch TV (television) дивитись телевізор Не stayed to watch a football match on TV; 2. Watch your step! (coll) Обережно! Дивись під ноги!   

 

WORD COMBINATIONS

 

sit down to breakfast (work, chess, one's lessons, etc) сідати, братися до сніданку (роботи, за шахи, уроки і т.п.)

look through a newspaper (book, letter, etc) проглядати газету (книгу, листа и т.п.) '

be fond of sb/sth (doing/sth) любити когось/щось (робити щось) once again знову

do the/one's gardening (shopping, cooking, etc) займатися садом (робити покупки, займатися кулінарією и т.п.)

be off (home, to bed, to work, etc) (ви)рушати (додому, спати, на роботу і т.п.)                          

 

EXERCISES

 

COMPREHENSION

 

Ex 1    Answer the following questions.

 

1. How does an Englishman's day begin? 2. What is his favourite breakfast? 3. When does he in fact get such a breakfast? 4. When does he leave home in the morning? 5. How does he get to his place of work? 6. How many breaks does he have during the working day? What are they for? 7. What does an Englishman usually have for his mid-day meal? 8. What food are the English fond of? 9. At what time does an Englishman finish work? 10. What does he like to do when he comes home from work? 11. What sort of meal does he get in the evening? 12. What does an Englishman usually do in the evening?" 13. What is a ''local"? Why do people like going there? 14. How does an Englishman's day end?

 

Ex 2    Look through the text once again, and see if you can: 

 

1. explain the meaning of the word "diary".   

2. give the meaning of the words: the "local", a "quick one", a "night­cap", and explain why they are in inverted commas.

3. find facts to prove that;

(a) The text is about an Englishman (and not, say, a Frenchman).

(b) The story is told by the wife.

(c) The English are fond of gardening.

(d) The English like good plain food.

(e) The English are conservative in their habits.

 

Ex 3     In the following groups of sentences, bring out the difference in meaning between the words in bold type. Say in which meaning they occur in the text.

 

1. (i) She left town. (ii) She left the children with her mother. 2. (i) The girl is about my age. (ii) The book is about the habits and customs of the English. (iii) The man came to see the manager about work. 3. (i) I haven't any book. (ii) Any book is better than no book. 4. (i) The doctor got home late. (ii) He got the magazine at the newspaper kiosk. 5. (i) He said it in plain English. (ii) He drank a glass of plain water. 6. (i) The women watched the children. (ii) The women watched TV. 7. (i) He stayed at the office for some time. (ii) He stayed at a hotel.

 

Ex 4  Pick out words and phrases from the text, and group them under the following headings.

 

1. Meals. 2. Dishes. 3. Games. 4. Pastimes.

 

Ex 5   Find in the text the English for:

 

ранкова газета; проглядати газетні заголовки; крім суботи і неділі; їхати на роботу; йти пішки; у другій половині дня; десь між четвертою і шостою; робочий день; говорити про погоду; обговорювати поточні події. 

 

KEY STRUCTURES AND WORD STUDY

 

Ex 6   Give the four forms of the following verbs.

 

sit, be, get, buy, go, leave, stop, know, eat, come, do, have, play, read, drink, begin.

 

Ex 7   In the following groups of words, pick out the word which, you believe, is the most general in meaning.

 

(a) wife, husband, son, family, daughter, children.

(b) picnic, high tea, breakfast, supper, meal, lunch, snack, dinner, tea, luncheon.  

(с) tea, coffee, drink, lemonade, ale, beer, whiskey, brandy.

(d) tram, motor bike, transport, taxi, motor scooter, car, bus, bicycle, train, tube, trolley car, airplane.

 

Ex 8  Replace the words in bold type by their opposites. Make all necessary changes. Translate the sentences into Ukrainian.

 

1. This is a national newspaper. 2. The mechanic started the motor. 3. I started the book this morning. 4. She opened the windows. 5. He came home later than usual. 6. Heavy food is bad for the stomach. 7. The family got up from a heavy meal. 8. Work at the factory finishes at seven. 9 Classes are over at four. 10. The news is of local importance.

 

Ex 9   Compare the meanings of the words in bold type.

 

1. (i) He usually has a snack at this time of the day. (ii) He usually has a meal at this time of the day. (iii) He usually has lunch at this time of the day. 2. (i) Every morning I look through the paper. (ii) Every morning I read the paper. (iii) Every morning I read through the paper. 3. (i) At six o'clock the family sat down to tea. (ii) At six o'clock the family sat down to high tea. 4. (i) The friends talked about the cur­rent situation. (ii) The friends discussed the current situation. 5. (i) Lem­onade is a soft drink. (ii) Whiskey is an alcoholic drink. 6. (i) My sister likes light music. (ii) My sister is fond of music. 7. (i) Have a cake. (ii) Have a biscuit.

 

Ex 10    Fill in the blanks with 'come' or 'go'. Translate the sentences.

 

1. You may — at any time after 6, we are always at home evenings. 2. Good-bye and — again when you have time. 3. If you want bus 24, — to the corner of the street. 4. "May I — in?" John asked and opened the door. 5. On Saturday evening they sometimes — to the cin­ema or the theatre. 6. — into the corridor, don't smoke in the room. 7. — to the library, you can get any book you like there. 8. The doctor says I must not — out, not in such weather. 9. — and have tea with us. 10. He usually — home late in the evening when the children were already in bed.

 

Еx 11   Complete the following sentences by nouns corresponding to the words in bold type.      

 

(A) 1. She can't answer the questions. She doesn't know the—. 2. In fine weather he usually walks to the office. It's a short —. 3. (i) I can't drink the tea. It's too hot. (ii)Tea is a national — of the Eng­lish. 4. My brother works at a factory. He says the—is interesting enough. 5. (i) In the country, a pub is often part of an inn where you can stay for the night. (ii) My friends will come to Moscow for a short —.

 

(B) 1. The book describes the Olympic Games opening ceremony in full. The book gives a full — of the Olympic Games opening ceremony. 2. The film version of the story is different from the book. There is a — between the film version of the story and the book. 3. We often discussed books and films in class. Those—were most interesting.

 

Ex 12   Translate the following sentences, using a different phrasal verb in each.

 

look back, get back, come back, give back, walk back, sit back, go back

 

1. Повертайтеся скоріше! 2. Я закінчу читати книгу і поверну її тобі. 3. Він відкинувся на спинку стільця і закурив. 4. Усю зворотню дорогу від станції додому він йшов пішки. 5. Ми зайшли до кав’ярні, випили по чашці кави, і він пішов назад на роботу. 6. Не озирайся. 7. Коли вони дісталися назад до табору, було близько другої години ночі.

 

Ех 13   Compare the meaning of the following words with words of the same root in Ukrainian.

 

favourite, family, inspect, vegetables, fruit, bacon, marmalade, toast, pudding, cake, biscuit.

 

Ex 14    Combine the following sentences according to the model.

 

Model:        1. I don't know the book well enough. I can't discuss it.

I don't know the book well enough to discuss it.

2. He has enough money. He can buy a new suit, He has enough money to buy a new suit.

 

1. He knows English well enough. He can read English books in the original. 2. The boy is not strong enough. He can't swim across the river. 3. I don't remember the poem well enough. I can't tell it by heart. 14. Have you enough time? Can you stay for tea? 5. The museum is near enough. We can walk there.

 

Ex 15   Use 'enough' with the words in bold type.

 

1. Let's go and see the film. It's interesting. 2. We can go for a long country walk today. The weather is warm. 3. Don't leave. There is work for all. 4. I can't tell you the story from beginning to end. I have no time. 5. You can't do this work. You are not strong. 6. You must know this actor. He is famous. 7. Now I can buy a TV set. I have money. 3. You needn't buy any notebooks. I have notebooks at home.

 

Ex 16   Make up sentences with the given phrases according to the model. Trans­late them into Ukrainian.

 

Model:        1. There is nothing he (she, etc) likes better than his favour­ite breakfast of cornflakes.

2. There is nothing I (they, etc) like better than to play tennis (playing tennis).

 

1. a good mid-day meal; iced tea on a hot day; a quiet evening at home with the family; modern painting; etc

2. discuss new books and films; play a game of chess after the working day is over; watch a football match on TV; sit down to a book by his favourite writer; etc             

 

Eх 17   Study the following phrases and recall the sentences in the text.

 

sit down to breakfast; look through (the headlines); a breakfast of smth; tea with milk; after breakfast; on Saturday; go to work; go by train; at about 7:30; at offices (factories, the "local"); at eleven; at mid-day; stop for lunch; close for an hour; from one to two; be fond of sth/sb; in the middle of the afternoon; a break for tea; between four and six; before supper; be over; stay at home; listen to the radio; be off (to work); ready for sth.

 

Ex 18   Fill in the blanks with prepositions or adverbs.

 

 (A) 1. "How do you like your coffee?" "— milk and a lot — sugar." 2. "How do I get — the shopping centre?" "— bus. The bus-stop is over there —the street." 3. The note became clearer only after he looked — it another time. 4. She liked to stay — home — the evening — an interesting book. 5. They are fond — classical music. They can listen — Bach or Beethoven — hours. 6. When the last exam was — he was so tired that she couldn't sleep — night. 7. He liked to have supper — his family. 8. We shall first go—that part—the museum where the old masters are. 9. Now I want to take you — the house —a cup of tea. 10. She said she had friends — Chester — whom she plan­ned to stay — a week or two. 11. "When will you leave — Sukhumi?" "Not before the end — the month." "How long will you stay there?" "Not more than — two weeks. Then some time — the middle — July I will go — Odessa — boat." 12. Where are you —? Describe your home town—us. 13. I saw this film — our local cinema last month. 14. "I'm — — the library!" "When will you be back home?" "I'll be — — supper, — — eight o'clock." 15. The director was out, so I left my re­port — the secretary. 16. "How long will your friends be staying — us?" "They are coming — the week-end," 17. Tell us the story once again, but leave — the details this time. 18. We had a heated discussion —  the modern school of painting.

(B) Al and Max came — Henry's lunchroom, sat — and began to look — the menu.

Al's face was small and white. Max's face was different — Al's but they both looked very much alike. They both had their hats and gloves on; their coats were too small — them.

A waiter came——their table.

"What do you want to have — dinner, Al?" Max asked.

"I want to have meat — a lot — vegetables and fruit pudding."

"This is dinner," said the waiter, "Now I can't give you anything — sandwiches. Come — any time — five and you can have dinner. But now we close — an hour till five."

          (After "The Killers" by E. Hemingway)

 

Ex 19    Fill in the blanks with a suitable word. Use the correct form. Translate the sentences into Ukrainian .

 

describe, description, discuss, discussion, stay n v, watch v, leave v (2), favourite, except, as, enough, any   

                

1. The picture gallery is open all days of the week — Tuesday. 2. I know the man well —. You needn't — him to me. 3. "How was the film?" "Oh, I loved it. All my — actors are in it." 4. That afternoon he — at the office later than usual. He had work to do. 5. Did you tell him to — his address with the secretary? 6. During her — at her mother's she did all the shopping, cooking and house-cleaning. 7. — he read on he got more and more interested in the subject. 8. Can you give me some writing paper? — old paper will do. 9. In those days we often went into the small café across the street for a quick cup of tea and a short — of the latest film or book. 10. My sister looked into the room and said she had a few things to — with me. 11. The old man stopped at the busy street corner to — the holiday crowds. 12. If I remember right, the book begins with a — of the author's home town. 13. They went to the theatre and — their children with the baby-sitter.

 

Ex 20   Replace the Ukrainian words and phrases by suitable English equivalents in the correct form. Retell the passage. 

 

Mr Sellyer's bookshop is (через) street from my house. It (розташований) in а tall (сучасний) building and it is quite (знаменитий). It is always (повний) people.

I often go there to (проглядати) new books. (Справді), there's nothing I like better than to (проглядати) the (різні) books he has on his shelves. When I go to Mr Sellyer's shop I usually (проводжу) there fоr (декілька) hours.             

On that day (поки) I (проглядав) the books I (спостерігав) Mr Sellyer at work.. I (опишу) some of his methods to you.

A lady came into the shop and asked for a book.

"(Будь-яку) book or something special?" said Mr Sellyer showing her "Golden Dreams"'.* "Mr Slush is а (знаменитий) author and this is his latest book. It is interesting (достатньо) to read. The readers (дуже любдять) his books."

Another lady entered the shop. She was in black. Mr Sellyer also gave her "Golden Dreams". "It's a beautiful book," he said, "A love story, very simple, but sad, (звичайно). When my wife read it she cried all the time."

"Have you any good light reading for vacation time?" asked the next customer. Mr Sellyer recommended "Golden Dreams" (ще pаз). "The most humorous book of the season," he sаid. "My wife began laughing the minute she (сіла  за) it. It's her (улюблена) book now."

Every customer who entered the shop went away with "Golden dreams". To one lady he (описав) it as the reading for a holiday, to another as a book to read on a rainy day and to a fourth as the right book for a fine dау.

It was (біля) four o'clock and time to go home. But before I (пішов з) the shop I came up to Mr Sellyer. I wanted to (обговорити) "Golden Dreams" with him.                       

"Do you like the book yourself?" I asked.  

"I have no time to read every book in my shop."  

"But did your wife like the book?" 

"I am not married, sir," answered Mr Sellyer smiling.

(After Stephen Leacock)

 

Ex 21    Test translation.                                       

 

(A) 1. Вранці я встаю біля сьомої години, роблю зарядку і за кілька хвилин сідаю снідати. За сніданком я встигаю переглянути газету. 2. Я йду з дому о восьмій годині. В інститут я їду автобусом. 3. Ми навчаємося щодня крім неділі. Заняття починаються о дев'ятій ранку і закінчуються о третій годині дня. 4. У нас читаються лекції з різних предметів. Мій улюблений предмет — історія. 5. На уроці англійської мови ми розмовляємо англійською, ставимо один одному запитання і відповідаємо на них. Закінчивши читання тексту, ми обговорюємо його. 6. Я часто лишаюся в інституті займатися. У нас гарний читальний зал і багата бібліотека, де можна отримати будь-яку книгу. Протягом дня читальний зал звичайно заповнений студентами. 7. Всі наші студенти люблять спорт. Одні захоплюються лижами і ковзанами, інші волейболом і тенісом. Багато студентів люблять грати в шахи. Однак найулюбленіший вид спорту більшості студентів — це  футбол чи хокей.

 

(В) 1. — Де ви звичайно харчуєтеся? — Снідаю і вечеряю я вдома, а обідаю в інституті. 2. В неділю ми часто обідаємо в кав’ярні навпроти. У них завжди різноманітний вибір страв: м'ясних, овочевих, рибних. 3. — Що у нас сьогодні на обід? — На перше суп, на друге м'ясна страва з овочами і на третє щось солодке. 4. — Яка ваша улюблена страва? — Я люблю все крім риби. 5. Скажіть дітям, щоб вони не забували мити руки перед їжею. 6. Скоріше сідаєте в потяг, він рушає через дві хвилини. 7. — Скажіть, будь ласка, як мені доїхати звідси до центру? — Будь-який автобус довезе вас туди. Автобусна зупинка навпроти. 8. Він поїхав автобусом, оскільки в нього не вистачило грошей на таксі. 9. Вони поїхали на південь вчора і пробудуть там до кінця відпустки. 10. Я його не досить добре знаю, щоб обговорювати з ним такі питання. 11. Попроси Миколу описати картини, які він бачив вчора в музеї. Він зробить це краще мене. Він навіть зробить це краще ніж будь-хто з нас. 12. Я недостатньо добре зрозумів вчора ваше пояснення. Повторіть, будь ласка, ще раз. 13. Гра була настільки цікавою, що я лишився дивитись її до кінця. 14. Понад усе моєму синові подобаються книжки, в яких описуються історичні події.

 

GRAMMAR            

 

The Indefinite Tense forms (Present, Past and Future)

 

Ex 22   Study the following chart.

 

Present	I usually go to work by bus. They live in the country. We don't know his address. Does she speak English? The book describes the museums of our town. The earth moves round the sun.
Past	1.  She lived in Smolensk before the war (in 1940, three years ago, etc). 2.  He caught a big fish just now (yesterday, last week). 3.  When he came, she told him everything. 4.  When did you see him last? 5.  He got to the station in time, bought a ticket and went out on the platform.
Future	I shall ('ll)* finish this work tomorrow (in two days, next week, etc).  We shall not (shan't) have a meeting on Monday. She will ('ll) be busy in the evening. They will not (won't) come here next year.

 

Еx 23    Practise the 3rd person singular. Present Indefinite Tense.

 

M o d e l  1:    Does Ann study at the Institute for Foreign Languages?

No, she doesn't. She studies at the Institute for Interna­tional Relations.

 

1. Does he teach at school? (at the Institute). 2. Does it often rain here in summer? (in autumn). 3. Does she work at a factory? (at an of­fice). 4. Does he live in Leningrad? (in Moscow). 5. Does he get up at 7 o'clock? (at 8 o'clock). 6. Does he go to his office by bus? (by the un­derground). 7. Does she sleep in the open air during the summer? (in the house). 8. Does he smoke before lunch? (after lunch),

 

M о d e 1  2: You speak English and Mary speaks French.

 

1. They like to dance and she — to sing. 2. Her parents live in the country and she — in town. 3. I go to bed at 11 o'clock but the child — to bed at nine o'clock. 4. We have tea at five o'clock and Mary — milk at five o'clock. 5. They watch TV in the evening and their sоn — it in the afternoon. 6. You read English books and your brother — French books. 7. I hear well and my grandmother— badly.

 

Ex 24    Open the brackets, using the Present Indefinite tense form, and retell the story.

 

MID-MORNING BREAK

 

Have your ever heard of "elevenses"?

At eleven o'clock a lot of people (stop working) and (have) a cup of tea or coffee, or, if they (be) at school, a bottle of milk. This mid-morn­ing snack (be) called "elevenses".           '

"Elevenses" also (mean), of course, time for a chat and there (be) always a lot to talk about. Ladies (talk) about the weather and the latest fashion. Men (discuss) politics, business and the latest news. Mike and Jane (work) at an office. They usually (have) their "elevenses" right in the office room. It (not take) them much time, fifteen minutes all in all. Mike (like) his tea rather sweet and strong. Jane usually (have) a cup of coffee with one lump of sugar.

 

Ex 25  Complete the following sentences, using the Past Indefinite Tense.

 

M o d e l :  Now he lives in Moscow but a few years ago he lived in Kiev.

 

I. Now he studies English but at school —. 2. Now he often sleeps in the daytime but he never — before 3. Now she knows something about the life of these people but before she came to live here she — nothing about them. 4. Now I play tennis well but when I was eight­een —. 5. I am a student now and have my lunch at the Institute but when I was a schoolboy, I —. 6. He leaves home at 8 in the morning but when he lived in the country he —. 7. He doesn't smoke now but only a few months ago —. 8. She seldom writes to me now but there film was to their liking. 6. I don't. My brother does. He goes to work by the underground. 7. No, it isn't. Fifty roubles is not enough to buy a good radio-set. 8. No, they won't. They are out of town. 9. I do. But my English is not quite up to the mark. 10. Yes, there are. The only thing we haven't got in our flat is air-conditioning.

 

Ex 34    Express disagreement with the following statements.

 

1. She never has milk for supper. 2. He won't answer her letters. 3. They studied German at school. 4. The students at our Institute have lunch at three o'clock. 5. She will never go there by plane. 6. There won't be many people in the streets on Sunday. 7. They work at this office on Saturdays. 8. He left school long before the war.

 

Ex 35   Make up sentences from the following groups of words, the missing elements may be added.

 

1. during their summer vacation; go home; all foreign students.
2. next year; these students; study many more subjects.
3. be his favourite writer; Mark Twain; when he was a schoolboy.
4. bring more chairs; be a lot of guests; at today's meeting.
5. when it began to rain; stop playing football; the boys. 
6. be no more wars; if peace-loving people; fight for peace.
7. often; we; have long discussions; the current situation; our teacher.  
8. after two years in the army; come back; a different man; I am sure.
9. Bernard Shaw; be born to a poor family; begin to work at an early age.
10. the last years of his life; Nikolai Gogol; Suvorov Boulevard; live; here; read for the first time; to the actors of the Art Theatre; his comedy "Inspector General".
11. Alaska; leave for; 1897; Jack London together with thousands of other people; not find gold; write a lot of stories.

 

Ex 36   Translate the following sentences into English, using the Indefinite tense forms (Present, Past or Future).

 

1. Він їздить на роботу автобусом. 2. Я пам'ятаю, що я теж їздив на роботу автобусом, коли жив у цьому районі. 3. Учора ми не обідали вдома, ми ходили до ресторану. 4. Що у вас звичайно буває на сніданок? 5. Він почав вивчати англійську мову, коли був ще дитиною. 6. Скільки вам знадобиться часу, щоб закінчити переклад? 7. Він дуже добре описав нам дорогу до історичного пам'ятника. Ми відразу знайшли його. 8. Ти знаєш, коли почнуться збори? 9. Я перегляну вашу доповідь завтра. 10. Мій день починається з зарядки. 11. Коли він виїхав до Санки-Петербурга? 12. Всі студенти їздили до Києва під час канікул, крім Петрова. 13. — Потяг давно відійшов? — Десять хвилин тому. 14. Коли я жив у селі, я любив ранкові прогулянки перед сніданком. 15. Цей автобус тут не зупиняється, пройдіть трохи далі по вулиці. 16. Вчора в них була бесіда на цю тему. 17.Він не завжди обідає в інституті.

 

 

Ех 37    Open the brackets, using the correct tense form.

 

THERE IS NO PRESENT WITHOUT THE PAST

 

Although we (live) in the twentieth century, many people (be inter­ested) in things that (happen) in the sixteenth century or (happen) in the twenty-first century. A lot of films, books and plays (be) about historical subjects or science fiction.* One day you (watch) a film about Henry VIII, and the next day (read) a book about men on Mars.

We must remember though that the present (come) from the past, and the future (come) from what (happen) now.

It (be) difficult to imagine man in different ages. What (feel) it like to live in the thirteenth century? What (eat) we in the year 2050? Of course, we (know) a lot about what (happen) in the past. There (be) books that (describe) the past, letters and things from the past centuries. But what it (be) like in the twenty-second century? Historians (look) at our clothes and (laugh)? They (be surprised) that our transport (be) slow, and our life busy? They (think) that our food (be) strange? Perhaps they (think) we (be) lucky to live in a world which still (have) some room and where people (be) happy. Or perhaps they (be) happy living on the Moon or even Mars and (stay there and not wonder) about what (happen) on Earth.

 

Reported Speech

 

Ex 38   Use Reported Speech according to the model.

 

M o d e l  1:                   She says: "I am busy."

She says (that) she is busy.      

 

1. They say: "We have lunch at the Institute." 2. He says: "My parents live in Kiev." 3. She says: "I entered the Institute three years ago." 4. Mary says: "I can describe the place to you. I know it very well." 5. John says: "I'll meet my parents at the station." 6. The teacher says: "You know this lesson."    

 

M o d e l  2:

 

	Direct Speech	Reported Speech
Peter asks (me,          him, etc)	1. "Are you a student?" 2. "Does Mary know my address?" 3. "Will you be present at the meeting?" 4. "Did they come here by train or by bus?"	if/whether I am a stu­dent if/whether Mary knows his address if/whether I'll be pre­sent at the meeting whether  they came here by train or by bus

 

 

1. Do you often have lunch here? 2. Will you have coffee or milk for breakfast? 3. Does she like tea better than coffee? 4. Will you leave in a week? 5. Do trains stop here? 6. Are you both fond of music? 7. Did she get a letter from her parents? 8. Were they all there at the station? 9. Is there anything else to see in this town? 10. Are all boys fond of playing football?

 

M o d e l  3: He asks: "Why (when, how many times a week, etc) do you get up so early?"

He asks (wonders) why (when, how many times a week)

I get up so early.                               

 

Begin the sentence with: (a) I wonder (ask) why...

(b) I don't know (nobody knows) why (when...)

 

1. Why do they stop their work at one o'clock? 2. How many stu­dents are there at Moscow University? 3. What questions did they dis­cuss at their meeting? 4. Where did he hear the news? 5. When will he leave for Leningrad? 6. What did she speak about at the meeting? 7. How many students will be present at the conference? 8. How long did he stay there? 9. How did she describe the place to them? 10. Who teaches them English?

 

Sequence of Tenses

 

Ex 39   Study the following chart.     

Direct Speech	Reported Speech
They said: “We are late. We are sorry.” He asked: “Do you always take a walk in the afternoon?” She said: “I’ll * answer the phone.” I asked: “When will the taxi be here?” They said that they were late and they were sorry. He asked me (wondered, wanted to know) if (whether) I always took a walk in the afternoon. She said that she would answer the phone. I asked when the taxi would be there.

Ex 40   Use Reported Speech.                                              

 

l. She said: "I like oranges better than bananas." 2. The music teacher said (to me): "You play the piece very well." 3. "Are you busy now?" he asked. 4. The dean said: "I want to have a word with you." 5. "Do you always have ice-cream for dessert?" she asked. 6. "We'll have enough time to finish the work," the workers said. 7. The teacher asked: "How long will it take you to prepare your talk?" 8. My mother asked: "Why are you so sad?" 9. "Shall I open the window?" the student asked. 10. The boy said: "I'll never smoke again." 11. The librarian said: "There are a lot of English books in our library." 12. "Do you know why he is absent?" the teacher asked.

 

Ex 41    Read the dialogue, study the sample in narrative form, refer the narrative to the past.

 

WAITING FOR TEA  

 

(Anne, Peter, Mother)

 

A.: Where's Mother, Peter?

P.: She is out shopping, but she'll be back soon.

A.: I am hungry, I want my tea.

P.: Oh, here's Mother. Anne is hungry, so am I.

M.: Sorry, dears. There are so many people shopping, but I won't be long.                 

A.: What have you got, Mummy?

M.: Plenty of good things, darling. See how heavy my shopping bag is.

P.: Did you get a pot of marmalade? We finished the last one at breakfast, and there are no more cornflakes.

M.: Well, I've got a big pot of marmalade this time to last us longer but I haven't got the cornflakes. There was no more room in my shop­ping bag. Buy one or two packets, Peter, after tea.

P.: All right, Mother.               

 

 * The verbs “shall” and “will” according to the rules of sequence of tenses have the forms of “should” and “would” in the Future-in-the-Past. In modern English “would” is more common for all persons of the singular and plural. “Should” must be used when it has the meaning “Do you want me to…”

Sample Paraphrase

 

Anne and Peter are alone at home. Anne wonders where Mother is. Peter tells her she is out shopping and will be back soon. They are both hungry and want their tea. Soon Mother comes in. She explains to them why she is late. There were so many people shopping. She also says tea will soon be ready. Anne wants to see what Mother has in her bag. There are a lot of good things in it, it is heavy. Peter asks her about the marmalade because they finished the pot at breakfast. But this time Mother has got a larger pot to last them longer. There was not enough room in the bag to buy cornflakes and she asks Peter to buy a packet or two after tea. He says he will.              

 

Ex 42    Rewrite (or retell) in narrative form.

 

MONDAY MORNING

 

Monday morning is always the worst morning of the week in the Crawford family. Everybody is sleepy and everybody is in a hurry.

"Hurry up, Nick," father called out as he stood in front of the bathroom door. "I've got a train to catch."

"I'm shaving," Nick answered. "I'll be out in a minute."      

"Breakfast is ready," mother called from the kitchen. "Where's David? Is he still in bed?" She went up to David's room: "Get up! It's a quarter to eight. Your breakfast will get cold."

"I don't want any breakfast," David said; "I'll have another five minutes sleep."

At this moment the postman rang the bell;

"Good morning, Mrs.Crawford. Isn't it a nice day?"

"Monday is never a nice day in our house."

(After "Present Day English for Foreign Students" by E. F. Candlin)

 

The Article

 

(a) W i t h  t h e  n a m e s  o f  m e a l s

 

Ex 43    Study the following chart.                

It's time for dinner. What a good dinner! You are a fine cook. The dinner she gave us was well-cooked. After dinner we shall have coffee.

 

Ex 44    Insert the article where necessary.                                        

 

1. — supper will be served at nine. 2. Father usually reads his morn­ing paper at — breakfast. 3. She had — breakfast of toast with butter which she washed down with a cup of coffee. 4. He left house soon after — breakfast and promised to be back some time before — lunch. 5. We shall have — light supper because we had — good dinner. 6. Do we have time to watch the film on TV before — supper? 7. She invited us to stay for — dinner, and — dinner, I must say, was very good. 8. There will be nobody to — dinner except the family.

 

Ex 45   Translate the following.

 

1. Що в нас сьогодні на вечерю? 2. У кав’ярні навпроти завжди можна отримати гарячий сніданок. 3. По неділях у нас звичайно хтось приходить на обід обіду. 4. У нас досить часу для невеликої прогулянки перед сніданком. 5. Твоя сестра пригостила нас прекрасним обідом. 6. Ми поснідаємо на терасі, добре? 7. Лікарі рекомендують ранню і легку вечерю. 8. Купити щось на обід? 9. Будь ласка, замов обід із трьох страв і на мене теж. 10. Я більш за все люблю кашу на сніданок.

 

(b)  W i t h   n a m e s  o f  m a t e r i a l s

 

Ex 46  Study the following chart.

 

This country exports coffee. The coffee is of high quality. Have a cup of hot coffee.

 

Ex 47    Explain the use of the article. Translate the sentences.

 

1. Waiter, a coffee and two teas, please. 2. I met him at a dinner at Smith's house. 3. "Essentuky" is a mineral water. 4. Of all the teas I like the green tea most; it's a nice drink on a hot day. 5. A hot coal fell from the fire on the carpet. 6. Have an ice-cream. 7. Hungary is famous for its wines. 8. This is a light Caucasian wine.

 

Ex 48    Insert the article where necessary.

 

1. He usually has a glass of — water with his dinner. 2. There are places where — water is as precious as gold.* 3. — water in the lake is so clear that you can see every single stone. 4. After a hard day's work I like — hot milk. 5. Come quickly, — milk is getting cold. 6. Don't sit on — sand, it's damp after the rain. 7. My shoes are full of — sand. 8. There are people who will eat — ice-cream in the street even in winter. 9. Why is — coal better for heating than wood? 10. — coal of Newcastle is rich in carbon. 11. Put the bottle into the ice-box to cool — wine for dinner.

 

READING

 

Ex 49   Read the text, and do the assignments coming after it.

 

Many people begin their day by reading the paper. In this way they learn what is going on in the world. Sometimes, however, they don't have the time to read the news carefully and must be satisfied with a quick look at the front page; at other times they may be in such a hurry that they have time only to look through the headlines.

Most newspapers have several sections. There are, in addition to the front page with the most important news, the sports section, book reviews, special articles on topics of interest at the moment, the amuse­ment section, a business page, and the editorials.

The first function of newspapers is to give the news. It is very im­portant to know the difference between fact and opinion and to com­pare the space various newspapers give to the same news items. Some will give several columns to a murder case and a few lines to a really important event.  

The Times, The Guardian and The Daily Telegraph are Britain's "quality" newspapers. They tell a lot about what is going on in the world. These papers are strongly right-wing in their opinions. The read­ers of these papers are usually people who work in the City, and profes­sional politicians.

The Daily Mirror, the Daily express and The Daily Mail are the "mass-circulation", "popular" papers. They are right-wing in their opinions, too. Though all the "popular" papers give the main news of the day, there is very little background information. In fact, a lot of the pages are full of pictures and gossip, not news. All "popular" news­papers are easy to read.

Almost all of Britain's national newspapers are published in Fleet Street. This street has been the home of the British press for over 300 years.

 

Assignments

 

(a) Quickly look through the list and mark the lettered phrase nearest in meaning to the word or phrase tested.

 

1. Opinion: (i) a belief not based on facts; (ii) the advice of an ex­pert; (iii) that which a person thinks about something.     

2. Editorial: (i) an article on current events; (ii) an article expressing the opinions of the paper's editor or publisher; (iii) a sort of crossword puzzle.

3. Background information: (i) information about the reporter; (ii) facts about a problem or event; (iii) information needed to understand a problem or event.           

4. Gossip: (i) a friendly talk; (ii) informal writing in magazines and newspapers about the lives of well-known persons and different social happenings (amusements, parties, receptions, etc); (iii) frivolous talk about other people's business, especially of a personal or sensational character.

 

(b) Say why the words 'quality', 'mass-circulation', and 'popular' are in inverted commas.                          .

 

(c) Explain the difference between: (i) news and gossip; (ii) fact and opinion.

 

(d) State briefly the main function of a newspaper.

 

(e) Describe a newspaper, the types of material that go to make up each of its sec­tions. State the purpose of the editorial.

 

(f) Explain how a 'quality' newspaper differs from a 'mass-curculation' newspaper.

 

(g) Explain why it is important for a newspaper reader to know the difference between FACT and OPINION.

 

(h) Mention two reasons why people read newspapers.

 

(i)  Explain the literal and figurative meanings of 'Fleet Street',

 

(j) Make up questions covering the contents of the text.

 

(k) Give a brief talk on the newspaper you read, explaining why you prefer it to other papers.

 

SPEECH AND COMPOSITION

 

Ex 50    Answer the following questions, using the vocabulary of the lesson. Sum up your answers (orally or in writing).

 

MEALS

 

1. What are the meals of the day? 2. How many meals do you have during the day? 3. What time do you usually have breakfast (lunch, etc)? 4. What is the time for lunch and dinner in Britain? 5. What is your favourite breakfast? 6. What is the difference between an Eng­lish and a "continental" breakfast? 7. What do you usually take for breakfast (lunch, etc)? 8. What are your favourite dishes? 9. What na­tional dishes do you know? 10. What is the Russian (Ukrainian, etc.) national dish? 11. Which are the best restaurants (cafés) in your town? What are they like? 12. Where do you usually take your meals?

FREE TIME

 

1. When do you have free time? 2. What do you usually do when you are free? 3. Do you help about the house in your free time? What household or family duties do you have? 4. How often do you go to the theatre (cinema, local, club, etc)? 5. What sport are you fond of particu­larly, and why? 6. How often do you watch TV (listen in)? Which is your favourite programme? 7. What is your hobby? 8. What do you usually do on Sundays? When on vacation?

 

Ex 51    Read the following. Answer the questions. Retell (or write up) the passage in English.

 

СЬОГОДНІ В МЕНЮ АЛГАТОР-ФРІ

 

На одній з тихих вуличок Монпарнасу в Парижі є невеликий ресторан. Ресторан уславлений на весь Париж своєю кухнею. Лише в меню цього ресторану є такі страви, як суп з морських змій (sea snakes), паштет з носорога (rhinoceros paté) і алігатор-фрі.

Багато парижан люблять ці екзотичні страви, і в будь-який день тижня в ресторані повно відвідувачів.

Один раз у ресторан прийшов кореспондент газети. Переглянувши меню, він запитав шеф-повара: «Де ви дістаєте стільки алігаторів і носорогів, що на усіх відвідувачів завжди всього вистачає?»

Шеф відповів: «Коли закінчуються алігатори, я просто відкриваю бляшанки з тушкованою яловичиною. І, знаєте, клієнти задоволені».

 

Questions

 

1. What is there in a quiet street in Montparnasse? 2. What is the restaurant famous for? 3. What dishes do they have on the menu? 4. Why is the restaurant full of customers every day of the week? 5. Who came to the restaurant one day? 6. What question did he ask the head cook after he looked through the menu? 7. What does the head cook do when there are no more alligators? 8. Do the customers know the dif­ference between fried alligators and canned beef?         

 

Ex 52    Take a daily (weekly) newspaper, read the heading and sum up the information contained in it.* After this, talk to your friends about the papers you read, using the questions given below as guides.

 

1. Why is it important to read the papers regularly? 2. What news­papers do you read? 3. When do you usually read your papers? 4. What section of the newspaper do you read first? 5. Who else in the family reads your paper? etc  

 

Ex 53   Act as interpreter. Sum up the dialogue.

 

Q: Which newspaper was the most popular in the USSR?

А: Газета “Правда” — була найпопулярнішою газетою з 8000 газет, що видавалися СРСР. “Правда” була органом Центрального Комітету Комуністичної партії Радянського Союзу.

Q: When was it founded? When did its first issue come out?

А: Вона була заснована В. І. Леніним у 1912 році. Її перший номер вийшов 5 травня 1912 року.

Q: What is its daily circulation?

А: Її щоденний тираж складав більш ніж 10 000 000 примірників. Вона виходила на 6—8 сторінках.                          

Q: Does it cover only the events of home life?                

А: Вона висвітлювала всі важливі події як всередині країни, так і за кордоном.

Q: What other newspapers were there in the Soviet Union?

А: У Радянському Союзі 8000 газет. Серед них можна назвати газету “Известия” («Вісті Рад народних депутатів СРСР»), яку видавала Президія Верховної Ради СРСР, газету «Труд» — що була органом профспілок СРСР і інші.

Q: In what language are the newspapers in your country published?

А: Газети друкувалися мовами майже всіх  народів та народностей, що проживали у Радянському Союзі.

Q: А яка газета є органом Комуністичної партії Великобританії?

A: It’s, the Morning Star, formerly the Daily Worker, which came out in January 1930. It's the working-class newspaper.

 

Ex 54   Speak on the following topics, using the words and phrases given below.

 

1. In the Morning                        

 

every day except Sunday; the day begins; get up at six (seven, etc; late, early); do one's morning exercises; take a bath (shower); wash one's hands and face; clean one's teeth; shave; comb one's hair; dress; put on one's shirt (tie, shoes, etc); sit down to breakfast; eat; drink; look through the newspapers (headlines); leave home; go to one's work (office, the Institute, etc); go by bus  (the underground, etc); take a bus; take a morning walk.

 

2. At the Institute

 

classes begin at ...; come to the Institute; have lessons (lectures, etc); study many different subjects, such as English, etc; be presentat the lesson; be absent from the lesson; except; during the lesson;ask (answer) questions; write a dictation (exercises, etc); read a text (article, etc); discuss an interesting problem (book, film, the current situation, etc); describe; give a description; have a meeting; the meeting is over at ...              

 

3. In the Reading Room

 

after classes; go to the Reading Room; do one's homework; sit down to work; work at one's English (a report, etc); take a book from the shelf; learn the new words (expressions); translate an article from English into Russian; look through the newspapers (magazines); begin (finish) one's work; be ready to leave at five (six, etc).

 

4. At the Institute Cafeteria

 

lunch break; have (take) lunch; self-service; sit down at a table; look through the menu card; take potato (vegetable, etc) soup for the first course; take meat (fish) for the second course; like the cooking; have no time for lunch; have a snack; have sandwich with a glass of milk.                                           .

 

5. In the Evening 

 

stay at home; visit a friend-go to the cinema (theatre, etc); watch TV; watch one's favourite programme (a football match, etc); listen to the radio (music, a concert); discuss the weather (the current situation, a new film, etc); be fond of music (books, reading, etc); do some reading; play a game of chess (billiards, etc) with a friend; go to bed early (late; at ... o'clock).

 

Ex 55    Discuss the following, giving your arguments for or against.

 

1. Your friend says that men make houses and women make homes. You believe that nowadays both men and women make houses and the role of the men in making a home is as important as that of a woman.

2. You think that many illnesses result from overeating, and that three meals a day is quite enough for a person. Your friend says that a young, growing person must eat four or five times a day.

3. Your friend says that all great men kept diaries. He believes, in fact, that all people should keep diaries. Diaries are important writ­ten documents for future historians. You say you have nothing to write in a diary. He disagrees with you.

4. Your friend says that it is not at all necessary to read newspapers, it is quite enough to watch tv. The news programme, he believes, has all the news you may want in it.

 

Ex 56    Subjects for oral and written composition.

 

1. Describe a day in the life of an Englishman.
2. Say what newspaper this particular Englishman is likely to read. Give your reasons.
3. Say whether you think this particular Englishman works at an office or at a factory. Give your reasons.
   1. Describe your working day.
   2. Speak on things you like doing, and why.
   3. Speak on your hobby.
   4. Describe what you usually do in the evening on a week-day, on a Saturday or Sunday.
      1. Explain the proverb: "Home is where the heart is."

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

LESSON THREE

 

Text: More about the English.

Grammar: The Continuous Tense Forms (Present, Past and Future).

Reported Speech. Sequence of Tenses (contd).

Degrees of Comparison of Adverbs.

 

MORE ABOUT THE ENGLISH

 

Like any other country Britain has its manners and customs as well as reputation.

Foreigners often say that in English trains people never speak to each other. But this, of course, is not true.

Not long ago I was travelling to London. In my compartment there were many passengers and they talked to each other almost all the time. They told each other where they lived, where they were going and, of course, talked about the weather. As soon as the train started a little girl, sitting by the window, called out: "We're off!" I found out that she was going to her aunt's in Chiswick.¹ "It's somewhere near the Thames but I don't know exactly where ... Shall we be passing anywhere near it?" "Chiswick? That's easy to find. You can get to it on the Tube. I'll show you where to go when we arrive," I told her.

"Goodness,² how fast the train is going!" said an old lady. "Do they go so fast in foggy weather and at night?" Her neighbour smiled, took out a book and began to read. Here was a typical Englishman: during the whole journey he did not say a single word. But as we arrived in London, he got up, and turning to the lady he said with a strong accent: "Excuse me. I do not understand English. I am from Poland."

The English people often say something about the weather when they begin a conversation with strangers. In fact, people talk about the weather more in Britain than in most parts of the world. For one thing, the weather in Britain changes very quickly. One day may be fine and the next day may be wet. When you go to bed the stars may be shining brightly and when you wake up it may be raining heavily. You can never be quite sure what the weather is going to be like. The English often say "Other countries have a climate, in England we have weather." For another thing, the weather is a safe topic for conversation. When two Englishmen meet, if they can't think of anything else to talk about or if they don't know each other well enough to discuss personal matters, they talk about the weather.

If it's nice and warm and the sun is shining brightly, a person usu­ally says, "It's a lovely morning, isn't it?" or "Isn't it hot today?", and the answer is "Yes, it's wonderful weather we're having." After a night of heavy snowfall and hard frost he may say: "A cold morning, isn't it?", and the answer is "Yes, we're having a very cold winter."

Or perhaps the day is dull; it is raining a little, the sky is grey and cloudy, and everyone is wearing a raincoat or carrying an umbrella. As it gets darker a thick fog covers London. Cars and buses put on their lights and move slowly along the wet, slippery roads. As one friend meets another the usual remark is, "Isn't the weather awful!"

As the weather changes so often, it is of course quite important. It plays a big part in the lives of the British people.. Every daily news­paper publishes a weather forecast. Both the radio and the television broadcast news about the weather several times each day.

 

NOTES

 

1. Chiswick: a small town in Middlesex, England.

2. Goodness: an exclamation of surprise or wonder боже мій¹ ба­тюшки!

 

 

VOCABULARY

 

true a 1. правдивий, правильний a true story (fact, description, etc); 2. вірний, відданий a true friend (comrade, etc) He is a true friend of our family (to me). Phr come true сбуватися His dreams came true; truth n істина, правда Phr tell the truth сказати правду, правду кажучи; (un)truthful а (не)правдивий .

travel vi подорожувати travel by train (plane, air, sea, etc) He travelled all over the world (round the country, etc); travel n подорож He told us about his travels. Phr go on a travel (trip, journey); a book of travels; a travel film

start vi 1. відправлятися, вирушати (в дорогу) We shall start in five minutes. Phr start on a trip (journey) поїхати у подорож; start for some place (Leningrad, etc) vi/vt; 2. починати (-ся) start work (a conversation, a discussion, a war, etc) Classes start at nine; start to do (doing) sth; start n початок Phr from start to finish=from begin­ning to end

pass vt/vi 1. проходити, проїзжати (повз) Не passed me and didn't say a word. What town will the train be passing? 2. проходити (про час) Time passes very quickly. 3. складати (іспит) Не passed his examinations well.

arrive vi прибувати, приїжджати arrive in a country (city, big town); arrive at a station (village, hotel, etc); arrival n прибуття

fast а швидкий a fast runner (game, etc); a fast train швидкий поїзд; My watch is ten minutes fast (slow) Мій годинник поспішає (відстає) на 10 хвилин ; fast adv швидко walk (read, think, move, etc) fast

whole а увесь, цілий (викор. тільки як означення) the whole world (town, day, book, group, etc); the whole of Europe (Asia, etc) Phr on the whole в цілому. On the whole you are right.

turn vt/vi 1. повертати (ся) Не turned (his head) and said some­thing. She turned and left the room. Phr turn (to the) right/left (round the corner); 2. звертатися до когось (із запитанням, за порадою, за допомогою и т. п.) turn to sb with a question (for advice, for help, etc)

stranger n незнайомець, чужинець Не is a stranger here (to me, to the place); strange a 1. незнайомий, невідомий а strange face (voice, place, etc); 2. дивний, незвичний a strange question (look, thing, story, idea, etc) There is something strange about the man (place, etc).

change vt 1. змінювати, міняти; обмінювати change a plan (one's address, one's name; one's clothes, etc) Can you change a five rouble note?; vi 2. змінюватися, мінятися The weather changes very often in England. Phr change for the better (worse); changeable а непостійний, мінливий нестійкий changeable weather; a changeable climate (situation; person, etc); 3. робити пересадку change to a bus(for another Metro line); change n зміна, переміна Phr make changes (in sth) вносити зміни (у що-н); for a change !!!для разнообразия I'll take fruit soup today for a change.

wake vi (woke, woken) up 1. прокидатися; vt 2. (роз)будити (кого-н) Wake me up at seven o'clock, please.

sure а упевнений Are you sure of his knowledge? Perhaps they'll come but I am not quite sure about it. I am sure (that) everything will be all right. Phr be sure of oneself бути самовпевненим. Phr make sure переконатися, пересвідчитися. Не made sure that the door was closed. Phr for sure напевно I know it for sure; surely adv звичайно, безперечно

(un)safe а (не)безпечний, (не)надійний a safe topic (subject, place, hour, etc) Don't drive so fast, it's not safe; safely adv безпечно

matter n справа, питання an important (different, personal, business, etc) matter What's the matter? У чому справа? Що трапилось? What's the matter with you? Що з Вами? There is something the matter with sb/sth Phr it's a matter of time (chance, taste, principle, etc) це справа часу (!!!случая, смаку, принципу і т. і.)

hard a 1. жорсткий, твердий Is this wood hard or soft? 2. важкий, тяжкий hard work; a hard man (life, time, day, task, etc); 3. сильний (про мороз, вітер, дощ і т. і.) a hard frost (wind, rain, etc); hard adv 1. старанно, завзято, наполегливо work (study, think, etc) hard; 2. силь­но It was raining hard yesterday.

dull a 1. нудний, нецікавий a dull book (film, party, life, man, etc); 2. похмурий (о погоде) dull weather; a dull morning (day, etc)

wear vt/vi (wore, worn) носити(ся) (про одяг) She is wearing a new dress today. This material wears well; worn-out зношений, старий worn-out clothes (shoes, etc)

cover vt 1. вкривати; прикривати, закривати Dark clouds cov­ered the sky. She covered her eyes with her hands. Phr be covered (with) бути вкритим The ground is covered with dry leaves; 2. (fig) охоплювати, відноситися (до чого-н) What events does the article cover?

move vt двигати, посувати move a table (chair, etc); vi рухатися, посуватися; переїжджати Не was too weak to move. When are you moving to the new flat? Phr move in (out) в’їжджати в нову квартиру (виїжджати з квартири); movement n рух I heard some movement in the other room. a revolutionary (labour, national, youth, etc) move­ment

publish vt публікувати; видавати, опублікувати publish a news­paper (book, magazine, etc); publish news (advertisements, etc), a pub­lishing house (office) видавництво

broadcast vt (broadcast) передавати по радіо; вести передачу; транслювати broadcast news (an opera, a concert, a football match, sb's speech, weather report, etc); broadcast (= broadcasting) n радіомовлення

 

WORD COMBINATIONS

 

as well as ще, на додаток (до), також

call out крикнути, вигукнути

for one thing з одного боку; for another (thing) з іншого боку

put on (out) the lights вмикати (вимикати) світло

play a big (small, important, etc) part in sth грати велику (малу, важливу і т. і.) роль у чому-н

weather forecast прогноз погоди

 

EXERCISES

 

COMPREHENSION

 

Ex 1   Answer the following questions.

 

1. What reputation do the English have among foreigners? 2. Where was the author going one day? 3. What did the passengers in his compartment talk about? 4. Why did the author describe one of the passengers as a typical Englishman? 5. Why didn't this passenger say a single word during the whole journey to London? 6. How do the English peo­ple usually start a conversation with strangers? 7. Why is the weather always a safe topic for conversation? 8. What is the usual remark for good (bad, cold) weather? 9. What does London look like on a rainy day? (When a thick fog covers the city?)

 

Ex 2  Look through the text once again, and see if you can find facts to prove that:

 

1. Every country has its own reputation.

2. People in Britain talk about the weather more than in any other country in the world.

3. The weather, good or bad, is the safest subject for conversation with strangers as well as with friends.

4. The English are rather proud of their weather.

5. The weather is really important to the British.

 

Ex 3 Pick out words and expressions from the text, and group them under thefollowing headings.

 

1. Travelling by train. 2. Good weather. 3. Bad weather. 4. Talk­ing to strangers. 5. Driving in bad weather.

 

Ex 4    Find in the text the English for:

 

Традиції та звичаї країни; у поїзді; купе вагона; пасажир; говорити про погоду; вночі; дістати книгу; на протязі усієї подорожі;  не промовити жодного слова; говорити з сильним акцентом; зав’язати розмову з незнайомою людиною; швидко змінюватися; йти спати; світити яскраво; безпечна тема для розмови; обговорювати особисті справи; чудовий ранок; прекрасна погода; сильний снігопад; сильний мороз; холодна зима; похмурий день; сіре, вкрите хмарами небо; йти під парасолькою; густий туман; увімкнути фари; повільно просуватися; мокра слизька дорога; жахлива погода; відігравати велику роль у чиємусь житті; щоденна газета; публікувати прогноз погоди.

 

KEY STRUCTURES AND WORD STUDY

 

Ex 5   Give the four forms of the following verbs.

 

say, speak, travel, tell, find, show, take, understand, shine, wake, meet, think, wear, carry, put, play, broadcast.

 

Ex 6  Make up five groups of three words associated in meaning or area of usage.

 

manners	passenger	newspaper	topic	train
television	subject	snowfall	customs	radio
theme	frost	compartment	fog	habits

 

Ex 7 Replace the words in bold type by their opposites. Make all necessary changes. Translate the sentences into Russian.

 

1. There was a light frost during the night. 2. Clearing away the snow was hard work for a boy of his age. 3. The man moved quickly to the door. 4. She only looks kind. 5. The girl heard every single word of her parents' conversation. 6. The sky is clear. 7. The girl was ill. There wasa dull look in her eyes. 8. The boy is a slow learner. 9. The woman put away her purse. 10. The train left the station on time. 11. The car turned right. 12. Part of the day he was writing an article for the local newspaper.

 

Ex 8 Recast the following according to the model.

 

Model: 1. Newspapers publish a weather forecast every day.

Newspapers publish a weather forecast daily.

2. "Ogonyok" is a social-political, literary and art maga­zine that is published once a week.

"Ogonyok" is a weekly magazine.

 

1. The Moscow Metro trains carry more than six million passen­gers every day. 2. What magazine that is published once a quarter of the year do you know? 3. The doctor told the patient to take the med­icine every hour. 4. The Budget day is an event in the life of the coun­try that usually takes place once a year. 5. The number of readers in the Lenin Library is more than 5,000 a day. 6. They have meetings every month to discuss business matters.

 

Ex 9 Recast the following, using adjectives with the suffix '-y'. Make necessary changes.

 

Model:        It often rains in autumn.

Autumn is a rainy season.

 

1. Sometimes London has bad fogs in November. 2. After a night of hard frost the river was covered with ice. 3. When we woke up in the morning the sun was shining brightly. 4. There is hardly any part in the town that has so much wind than the district around these hills. 5. You can't bathe today. The water is as cold as ice. 6. Today the sky is covered with heavy clouds. 7. There was dirt all around the place. 8. There was a heavy storm on the sea last night. 9. The beach was covered with fine sand.

 

Ex 10  Translate the following into English, using a different phrasal verb in each of the sentences.

 

take out, call out, read out, come out, get out, run out, look out, bring out, go out

 

1. Сусід з купе витяг бутерброда і почав їсти. 2. Вона не любила виходити на вулицю в таку погоду. 3. Старий важко виліз із машини. 4. Принеси сюди стільці. Давай посидимо у саду. 5. Нашвидку випивши чашку кави, він вибіг із дому. 6. Вийди на хвилиночку, мені треба поговорити з тобою. 7. На вулиці хлопці голосно викрикували назви газет. 8. Вона   виглянула у вікно, але на вулиці вже нікого не було. 9. Прочитай третє речення вголос.

 

 

Ex 11  Compare the meaning of the following words of the same root in Russian.

 

manner, reputation, passenger, typical, accent, strange, personal, remark, to publish.

 

Ex 12  Translate, using 'say', 'speak', 'tell'.

 

1. Він сказав, що його сім’я переїжджає на дачу у вівторок. 2. Накажи братові розбудити мене о шостій. 3. Твій приятель, як завжди, проговорив цілу годину, але не сказав нічого нового. 4. Перекажи йому, що швидкий прибуває до Риги о 10 годині вечора. Попроси його зустріти мене на вокзалі, якщо йому це зручно. 5. Секретарка сказала, щоб я звернувся до вас із цим питанням. 6. З ним цікаво поговорити, він багато подорожував. 7. Студенти кажуть, що книга нудна і їм хотілося б почитати щось більш сучасне. 8. У нашому купе був чоловік, який говорив із сильним акцентом,  і я ледь розумів, що він розповідав. 9. Скажи їм, щоб вони сідали вечеряти без мене, я трошки запізнюся. 10. Він пройшов повз мене і не сказав жодного слова.

 

Ех 13  Make up sentences with the following phrases, using 'say', 'tell', 'speak'.

 

about the weather; was raining hard; the truth, I am sure; cover the flowers for the night; the exact time; he would start on the trip next Monday; she wasn't sure of the day of their arrival; very fast; I don't know the language well enough to understand him; he was a stranger here himself and didn't know the way to the museum; change at the next station; wear glasses; not forget to put out the light; about the won­derful music the composer writes for children.

 

Ex 14  Translate the following

(a) using 'little', 'a little', 'few', "a few'*:

 

     1. Я не знав, що у тому, що він розповідав, було мало правди. 2. Він трохи подумав перед тим, як відповісти. 3. Погода потроху змінюється з кожним днем, і зараз уже значно холодніше, ніж було на початку місяця. 4. Не йди, ми будемо обідати через декілька хвилин. 5. Його мало хто розуміє, він говорить із сильним акцентом. 6. Він завжди говорить мало, а того вечора взагалі не промовив і слова. 7. Мало хто їздить цим поїздом. 8. Я побачу його через декілька днів.

 

(b) using 'like any (other) ...':

 

1. Як будь-яке дачне селище, Мамонтівка пустіє, коли закінчується літній сезон. 2. Вчора, як будь-якого іншого понеділка, в нас було дуже багато роботи; на кінець тижня роботи буває менше. 3. Ти запитуєш, що собою являє вулиця, на якій я живу. Як будь-яка центральна вулиця у великому місті, вона вдень перевантажена транспортом. 4. Він, як будь-який зоолог, може годинами говорити про тваринний світ нашої планети. 5. Як будь-якій молодій людині, йому хотілося подорожувати. 6. - Чому він не хоче переїжджати? – Як будь-яка стара людина, він не любить перемін. 7. Хіба ти не знаєш, що він, як будь-який справжній спортсмен, не палить?

 

 

Ех 15 Study the following phrases, and (a) recall the sentences in which they are used in the text; (b) use them in sentences of your own.

 

in a train (compartment); speak (talk) to sb; about sth/sb; by the window; call out; find out; go (travel) to some place; get to some place; on the Tube; in foggy weather; at night; take out sth (take sth out of a bag); during the journey; arrive in/at a place; get up; turn to sb; say sth (speak) with an accent; be from some place; say sth about sth/sb; in a part of the world; for one thing ... for another; go to bed; wake up; a safe topic for conversation; think of sth/sb; put on/out the lights; move along the road.

 

Ex 16 Fill in the blanks with prepositions or adverbs.

 

(A) 1. The old man slept badly — the train, and woke — several times — the night. 2. "Do I have to change trains?" "Yes, — the next station." 3. If you want to get — the underground station, go — this street as far as the traffic lights, then take the first turning — the left. 4. They were not quite sure — the exact day — their son's arrival. They only knew that he would arrive — Moscow some day the coming week. 5. The train arrives — this small station — night and stops — three minutes only. 6. I'll wake you —— five; we must start — the trip very early, before it gets too hot to travel. 7. "Please stand — when I call — your names," the teacher said. 8. This is not a topic — con­versation — front — the children. 9. "What do you know — your neigh­bours?" "Not much. We say good-morning — each other, speak — the weather and that's about all." 10. I am so happy to hear you are mov­ing — a new flat next month. 11. The weather forecast said that the weather was changing — the better. 12. "What's the matter — you? What did the doctor tell you?" "I've just found — that my brother's condition has changed — the worse." 13. He was — such difficulty that he turned — help — a complete stranger. 14. The professor said my report was good but, to make it better, I must make a few changes — it. 15. The teacher's second question was — the part Cromwell played — the history — England, and the girl knew the answer — that, too. 16. I am not sure I always get him right, he speaks — such a heavy accent. 17. Will you put — the light, it's getting dark and I can't see what I am reading any more. 18. It was a most unusual picture to see the streets of this southern town covered — snow. 19. Motorists don't like driving — foggy weather. 20. A raincoat is good only — rainy days; why do you wear it — all weather? 21. Why do you speak so highly — this writer? — one thing, it's early days to say what will become of him (it's his first book), — another, he is still very young.

 

(В) — the train Stephen moved — the corridor looking for a seat. He passed carriage after carriage. The train was full.

— one compartment there was a girl sitting — the corner — the window. She was different — all those dull-looking English. She had sad dark eyes of the South. It was all wrong that this girl — some place — the south — Europe (Stephen was almost sure — it) should be — a train going — the midlands of England.

She was fine, exotic. What was she doing — this country — fogs and rains?

The girl had also noticed him. He was, she thought, like the actors she had seen — Wild West Films.

Stephen thought: "I've got to know who she is and what she's doing here... I've got to find —"

And when Stephen came — the carriage, Pilar knew that, — course, he wanted to talk — her. The English people, Pilar knew, often said something — the weather when they started a conversation — stran­gers.

But Stephen said: "The train is very full."

"Oh, yes, indeed. The people go away — London, because it is so black there."

He smiled and said: "True, London is rather an awful place. You are not English?"

"I come — Spain."

"What made you come — England?"

"I am going to stay — my relatives — the country... — my Eng­lish relatives."

(After "A Holiday for Murder" by A. Christie)

 

Ex 17 Fill in the blanks with a suitable word. Use the correct form.

 

matter n, arrival, arrive, pass v (2), change v (2), cover v, move v (2), truth, whole, hard, awful, exact, dull, sure, true, fast, strange

 

1. The traffic lights — from green to red and all cars stop. 2. Let's go out on the platform. The train will be — any minute now. 3. The light is too strong, it's bad for the eyes, — the lamp with something. 4. That was an — thing to do! Go and say you're sorry. 5. There's no such thing as easy work. All work is —. 6. She wrote to a friend asking him to meet her daughter on her — in Moscow, giving him the — time, date and place. 7. Some people say that Dickens is too — for the modern reader, but nothing can be farther from the —. 8. I wonder what's the — with John. He's so quiet these days. 9. After a night of heavy rain the roads were very slippery. I — along in my car very slowly, but I was afraid the — time. 10. Did he say he was coming at four? Are you — you heard him right? 11. Several years — before the magazine published the — story of the poet's life. 12. The other day my neighbour came to me with a — story. It was something about noises he heard at night. I didn't know what to think. 13. The boy was learning — but there was still a lot to learn. 14. She telephoned to say that as she was — to another part of the town, she would be also — her place of work. 15. A week —, then another, and still there was no news of the expedition.

 

Ex 18  Replace the Russian words and phrases by suitable English equivalents in the correct form. Retell the passage.

 

In summer I (поїхав) to Scarboro. When I (прибув) there it was late afternoon. After dinner I put on my raincoat and went out for a walk. It was а (похмурий) day, the sky (було вкрите) with clouds, and it was raining a little. The wind was very strong and it was diffi­cult to walk, but I wanted some air. (У той час, коли) I (просувався) slowly along the (тихій) (пустій) street I saw (незнайомого мені чоловіка). Не first (пройшов повз) me, but then he stopped.

"Is that you, old man?" he (крикнув). "It's (чудово) to see you! I was never so glad to see you in my (все) life!"

I (повернув) my head. It was Jones.

"Why, what are you doing here? What's the (справа)?" I said. "And aren't you cold?" Jones (був одягнутий у) flannel trousers and a thin shirt. "Why don't you go home?"

"I cannot," he answered. "I forgot the name of the hotel where my wife and I (зупинилися). Take me with you and give me something to eat."

"Haven't you any money?" I asked.

"(Жодного) penny. We (дісталися) here from York, my wife and I, at (приблизно) eleven. We (залишили) our things at the station and went to a hotel. I (змінив) my clothes and (вийшов прогулятися). The sun was shining brightly and there was nothing in the (прогноз погоди) about rain. But I forgot to take the address."

"Can you (описати) the street or the house?"

"No," he said sadly.

"Well, I'm (впевнений) that we'll (з’ясуємо) where you live soon (до­сить)," I said. I took him to my hotel and (нагодував його). Here we (обговорили) the situation. We then (почали) telephoning all the ho­tels in Scarboro. We did it so well that next afternoon Jones found both his hotel and his wife.

(After "An Absent-Minded Man" by Jerome K. Jerome)

 

Ex 19   Complete the questions and answers.

ON WEATHER

 

A: What is the weather like in England?

В: — changes in our country more often than in other countries, that's why we say: "Other countries have —"

A: Are all the days alike in autumn?

B: Oh, no, — and the next day —

A: Look! The sky is covered with heavy dark — and it's going to —

B: It may, but you can never be sure —. After a whole day of —

A: — it often rain in —?

B: — is a rainy month. You were quite right, it is — already. The people in the street are opening — and the pavements are wet with — But don't think it will last —

A: Do Englishmen always — raincoats and — umbrellas in autumn?

B: As a rule, they do.

A: And what — in winter?

B: Wintercoats, if —

A: I see that — for conversation.

B: It is. We never get tired of it.

A: What do you say to start a conversation?

B: —

 

Ex 20 Test translation.

 

(A) 1. – Розкажіть, будь ласка, яка у вас буває зима. – Зима у нас настає рано. Інколи вже в кінці листопада все вкривається снігом. Грудень та січень – найхолодніші місяці року. У грудні випадає багато снігу, а у січні – найсильніші морози. Взимку дні короткі, а ночі довгі. Сонце світить яскраво, але воно не гріє.

        2. Восени погода зазвичай сира. Небо сіре, вкрите хмарами. Часто йдуть дощі. Сонця мало. Вночі буває сильний туман. Вітер часто змінюється. Коли він дує з півночі, то стає холодно.

 

(В) 1. Він мені вірний друг. Я завжди можу звернутися до нього за порадою 2. Ви говорите, що всі ці факти достовірні. Правду кажучи, я в цьому не зовсім впевнений. 3. У своїх оповіданнях автор дає правдивий опис життя  тих, хто живе на острові.4. Мій старший брат дуже любить подорожувати. Для нього не має  нічого кращого, ніж подорожувати морем.5. - Ваш годинник показує точний час? – Ні, він поспішає (відстає) на п’ять хвилин. 6. Не говоріть так швидко. Вас важко розуміти. 7. Ми зателефонували на станцію, щоб дізнатися про час прибуття поїзда із Києва.  8. Якщо ми будемо проїжджати повз Байкал вночі, розбудіть мене, будь ласка. Я хочу подивитися на це чудове озеро. 9. Дивно, що під час зборів він не промовив і слова. Ми вирішили, що з ним щось трапилося. 10. – Скажіть, будь ласка, як пройти до музею Пушкіна? – Це десь поблизу, але я не знаю, де точно. Справа у тому, що я нетутешній. Зверніться до когось іще. 11. Я витрачаю більше години на те, щоб дістатися з дому до роботи. Спочатку я їду на метро з пересадкою у центрі, а потім автобусом. 12. – Де мені зробити пересадку на станцію метро Пушкінська? – Їдьте до станції Горьківська, а там пересядете на Пушкінську. 13. Я впевнений, що після нашої розмови все зміниться на краще. 14. Екзаменаційна сесія – важкий час у студентів. Вони багато і напружено працюють. 15. Хто наполегливо працює, той гарно складає іспити. 16. Ви зараз вільні? Я хочу поговорити з вами по дуже важливій справі. 17. – Коли ви переїжджаєте на нову квартиру? – Як тільки закінчиться учбовий рік. 18. Він не така вже й нудна людина, як ви кажете. Ми з ним чудово поговорили про поточні події. 19. Музика відіграє важливу роль у його житті. Його улюблений композитор – Чайковський. 20. В Англії погода дуже мінлива. Тому англійці завжди носять з собою парасольки. 21. Починається дощ. Одягни плаща та візьми із собою парасольку. 22. Він крикнув їй щось, але вона не почула. 23. Я хочу знати всю правду щодо цієї справи.

 

GRAMMAR

 

The Continuous Tense Forms (Present, Past and Future)

 

Ex 21 Study the following chart.

 

The Present Continuous Tense	1. She is in her room. She is looking through the morning newspapers. 2. They are working at this problem at present.
The Past Continuous Tense	1. He was working in the garden at six in the morn­ing (when I came home, after lunch, etc) 2. They were studying at the University in 1977.
The Future Continuous Tense	1. I wonder what he will be doing at this time tomor­row. 2. They will be writing their course papers in April. 3. I can send the telegram. I'll be passing by the post-office.

 

Ex 22  Answer the following questions, using the continuous tense forms (Present, Past or Future).

 

1. What is the weather like? (rain a little). 2. Why didn't you go to the country yesterday? (rain). 3. What will the weather be like to­morrow? (the radio, give the weather forecast in a few minutes). 4. Why did the militia-man stop him? (walk across the street in the wrong place). 5. Why don't you want to go to the cinema tonight? (finish a book which I must give back tomorrow). 6. Where is Mother? (work in the gar­den). 7. Why didn't he hear the bell? (play football). 8. Why can't we speak to him now? (write business letters). 9. What is the noise about? (watch a football match). 10. Why do you think you won't get much sleep tonight? (travel all night). 11. Will you come to the party? (not move to a new flat).

 

Ex 23  Practise the following according to the model (mind the possible adverbial modifiers of time: 'now', 'today', 'this morning', 'tonight', etc).

 

Model 1:     She usually reads the newspaper at breakfast but she is not reading it today. She is busy with other things.

 

1. They often watch TV in the evening. 2. He always works in the garden after office hours. 3. He usually plays chess very well. 4. He goes to the library every day. 5. She always leaves town in summer. 6. She always sleeps after lunch.

 

Model 2: Please tell John it's time to finish the work. But he is (already)

finishing it.

 

1. Tell the children it's time to get up. 2. Please, tell her to wash the floor. 3. May I ask you to translate this article? 4. Please, ask him to look through her report. 5. Please, tell her to make some coffee. 6. Tell them it's time to leave for the station.

 

Ex 24 Open the brackets, using the Present Continuous or the Present Indefinite according to the sense.

 

1. She (wear) a new coat today. 2. Peter never (wear) a hat. 3. I (get up) at eight in the morning. 4. It's eight o'clock. He (get up). 5. What you (say)? I (not hear) you well enough. 6. It (get) late. It's time to go home. 7. It (get) dark early in winter. 8. Listen! Somebody (sing) in the street! 9. She (sing) well and she (have) a pleasant voice. 10. When it is foggy in London, cars (move) very slowly. 11. Our train (move) very fast.

 

Ex 25  Translate the following sentences, using either the Present Indefinite Tense or the Present Continuous according to the sense.

 

1.(і) Ти багато читаєш? (іі) Що ти читаєш? 2. (і) Чи часто тут іде дощ? (іі) Мені здається, йде дощ. 3. (і) Він пише батькам досить часто. (іі) Він зайнятий. Він щось пише. 4. (і) Він не носить теплого пальта взимку. (іі) Він сьогодні у новому пальті. 5. (і) Дитина прокидається декілька разів за ніч. (іі) Не зчиняйте галасу. Дитина прокидається. 6. (і) Вони часто обговорюють такі проблеми. (іі) Вони обговорюють щось цікаве. 7. (і) Погода в Англії змінюється дуже часто. (іі) Візьми плаща. Погода змінюється.

 

Ех 26 Open the brackets, using either the Past Indefinite or the Past Continuous Tense according to the sense.

 

1. When we got off the train it (rain) heavily. 2. The summer that year was cold. It often (rain). 3. The weather was foggy. Cars and buses (move) slowly. 4. While I (pack) my things, he (ring) up for a taxi to take me to the station. 5. The house was quiet. The boys (play) chess and Mary (read) a book. 6. When you (see) him last? 7. I (buy) the guide book in London. It (catch) my eye when I (pass)-a shop window. I (re­turn), (call) at the shop and (buy) it. 8. In 1972 Peter (be) in Siberia, he (build) a railway together with his friends. Later he (write) a book about it. 9. Who (speak) over the telephone at five yesterday? The line (be) busy for an hour at least. 10. The whole family (watch) a detective film on TV when I (come) into the room. 11.1 (look) into the window and (see) an old woman (sit) at it, a cat (sleep) on the window-sill, next to a flower pot. The picture (take) me back to my childhood. 12. Ships (travel) from Southampton to New York in four or five days last season.

 

Ex 27 Open the brackets, using the correct tense form. Use Reported Speech in place of Direct Speech.

 

RAINY SUNDAY

 

It was Sunday. I never (get up) early on Sundays. I sometimes (stay) in bed until lunch-time. Last Sunday I (get) up very late. I (look) out of the window, it (be) dark outside. "What a day!" I (think). "It (rain) again." Just then the telephone (ring). It (be) my Aunt Lucy. "I (be) at the station. I (come) to see you." "But I still (have) breakfast," I (say). "What you (do)?" she (ask). "I (have) breakfast," I (repeat). "Dear me!" she (say), "You always (get up) so late? It (be) one o'clock."

 

Ex 28   Make up sentences, using the Past Continuous Tense.

 

I	to play badminton in the garden	when we arrived.
Mother	still to rain	when the telegram came
We	to get dark	when he turned to her.
It	to make coffee in the kit­chen	when suddenly it began to rain.
He	to come into the station	when the door bell rang.
She	to write business letters	when we returned home
The train	to smile	when I looked out of the window.

 

Ex 29 Translate the following sentences, using either the Past Indefinite or the Past Continuous tense form.

 

1. Наш поїзд їхав дуже швидко, я не встигав читати назви станцій, повз які ми проїжджали. 2. Коли поїзд рушив, він щось мені крикнув, але я нічого не почув. 3. Коли я дістався до станції, вже темніло. 4. Ми викликали лікаря, коли зрозуміли, що її стан погіршується. 5. – Коли ви бачили її востаннє? – Я не пам’ятаю точно, але знаю, що це було минулого місяця. 6. Учора у цей час ми були ще у поїзді і їхали по Україні.7. Коли він увімкнув світло, то побачив, що хтось спав у ліжку. 8. Коли поїзд прибув, ми всі стояли на платформі. 9. Я снідав у маленькому кафе на станції, коли побачив його у вікно. Він стояв під великим годинником і чекав на когось.

Ех 30 Complete the following sentences, using the Future Continuous Tense according to the model.

 

Model:  My vacation is coming to an end. (return to the University in two days).                 I'll be returning to the University in two days.

 

1. I can't discuss the matter with you now. But (see you tomorrow), won't I? 2. "I think, he'll be here in time." "Yes, I think he will." (he, come by the fast train). 3. She is on a visit, (she, not dine with us today). 4. I don't think they will come. (they, move to a new flat). 5. There are a lot of people here and (more, arrive next week). 6. Let's wait. (he, wake up soon). 7. Look, it is getting dark. (it, rain in a minute). 8. There's nothing he likes better than to tell stories. I wonder what (he, tell us next). 9. "Who (give) a talk on the current situation Friday next? 10. Don't leave yet. (we, have supper in about twenty minutes).

 

Ex 31 Translate the following sentences, using the Future Continuous Tense.

1. Давайте підемо скоріше. За хвилину почнеться (буде) дощ. 2. Я не буду писати йому. Я побачусь із ним. 3. Приходьте, будь ласка, Соколов буде розповідати про свою поїздку до Англії. 4. Через місяць ми переїжджаємо на нову квартиру. 5. Ти будеш завтра проходити повз кінотеатр, купи два квитки. 6. – У чому ти будеш на вечірці? – У новій сукні, звичайно. 7. Нікуди не йди. Поїзд прибуває за декілька хвилин. 8. Влітку ви, звичайно, знову будете подорожувати?

 

Mixed Bag

 

Ex 32 Complete the following, using the Continuous tense forms (Present, Past or Future).

 

Model:        Ask the students of Group One to come here. (have classes).

They are having classes now.

 

1. Where is Jane? It's time to leave, (have breakfast). 2. What are your plans for tonight? (take a friend to a concert). 3. Is your dress ready? (wear it to the party tomorrow). 4. Where's everybody? (cover the roses in the garden, have a hard frost at night). 5. Let's have dinner at a res­taurant tomorrow. But we can't. The Browns (come for dinner). 6. Why didn't you come at 4 o'clock yesterday? (wait for me?). 7. Don't make so much noise, (anybody, sleep?). 8. Why did we see so little of you last month? (write a paper on history).

 

 

 

 

 

Ex 33 Open the brackets, using the correct tense form.

 

IN THE WAITING ROOM

 

I (enter) the dentist's waiting room which (be) full. Like any other waiting room, it (have) an atmosphere of its own. A small table (be covered) with very old magazines; the curtains (be) of indefinite colour and the armchairs definitely unclean. There (be) dusty pictures on the wall. I (take) my seat and (decide) to pass the time watching the people around me.

A little man beside me (turn) over the pages of a magazine quickly and nervously. It (be) hard to understand what he (look) at; from time to time he (throw) the magazine on the table and (pick up) another. Opposite me there (be) a young mother who (try) hard to quiet her son. The boy (make) aeroplane-noises as he (move) an ashtray on the floor. Near him an old man (sleep) and the boy's mother (be) afraid that sooner or later her son (wake up) him. I myself (be) sleepy. The boy (be) quiet now in his mother's arms. There (be) a deathly silence in the room and just at this moment the loud speaker (call) out the name of the next lucky person.

(After "Sixty Steps to Précis" by L. Q. Alexander)

 

The Use of the Present Indefinite Tense in Adverbial Clauses of Time and Condition with the Meaning of the Future

 

Ex 34 Study the following chart.

 

You'll do it He'll speak to her I won't discuss this question   We'll have a party She'll go to the country

when you find the time. while you are busy with your work. until (till) he comes. before she leaves. if it doesn't rain.

 

Ex 35   Complete the following sentences on the above pattern.

 

1. You'll understand this book when you (get older). 2. If the weather (change for the better), we'll go to the country. 3. He will phone you as soon as he (wake up). 4. I'll call a doctor if she (get worse). 5. You will never make this mistake again if you (learn things the right way). 6. I won't speak to you again until you (tell me the whole truth). 7. If she (go by a fast train), she'll arrive in time. 8. We'll stay in Moscow till we (get an answer to our letter). 9. He will get to her place before everybody (arrive). 10. When the train (arrive in Kiev) I'll get off to buy newspapers. 11. You won't be cold if you (wear a warm coat). 12. After they (make changes in the plan) we'll discuss it again. 13. If you (speak so fast), nobody will understand you.

 

 

 

Ex 36    Answer the following questions, using adverbial clauses of condition.

 

(A) Model: When will the train pass Tambov? (not be late).

If it is not late, it will pass the town at 2:30.

 

1. How long will it take you to read a book of three hundred pages? (do nothing else). 2. When will you finish your course paper? (everything; be all right). 3. Will he take her to the theatre? (get one more ticket). 4. Will you go to the country tomorrow? (not rain). 5. Will he travel to the., Crimea by train? (not get a ticket for the train; go there by plane). 6. When will he make his report on Britain's economy? (get well).

 

(B) What will happen if: 1. we talk all at once? (hear nothing). 2. you teach him everything at once? (learn nothing). 3. we don't wait for him? (not find the way to the museum). 4. you don't work hard at your English? (get a poor mark). 5. he doesn't arrive in time? (not wait for him). 6. the weather doesn't change for the better? (stay in town).

 

Ex 37 Translate the following sentences info English (mind the use of tenses in adverbial clauses of time and condition).

 

1. Якщо ви посунете книжкову шафу від вікна, у кімнаті буде світліше. 2. Якщо ви будете проходити повз кіно, купіть квитки на нову картину. 3. Як тільки я знайду її адресу, я вам зателефоную. 4. Скільки часу вам знадобиться , щоб дістатися до інституту, якщо ви будете жити за містом? 5. Що ми будемо робити, якщо вона спізниться? 6. Якщо вона залишиться дома з дитиною, я поїду з вами. 7. Якщо погода буде дощовою, я візьму плаща. 8. Ми не почнемо обговорювати це питання, доки не зберуться (прийдуть) усі студенти нашої групи. 9. Обміркуй усе гарненько, перш ніж дати відповідь. 10. Я залишуся у місті, поки не настане гарна погода. 11. Коли ти повідомиш мені свою адресу, я відповім тобі телеграмою і одразу ж виїду. 12. Поки ти ходитимеш по магазинах, я зберу речі.

 

Reported Speech. Sequence of Tenses (contd)

 

Ex 38 Study the following chart

 

I don't know if she will come tomorrow. Ask her when they will move to their new flat. I wondered if they would discuss this question at the meeting. He wanted to know when I would make a report on the work of the English speaking club

 

 

 

Ex 39 Complete the following sentences according to the above chart.

 

1. I was not sure if he (get to the village before dark). 2. He doesn't know when they (arrive). 3. I wonder when he (wake up). 4. Do you know when he (have a talk with her about her future work)? 5. They asked him if he (go by plane). 6. They want to know if there (be any changes in their plans).

 

Ex 40 Practise the following according to the model.

 

Model:   I don't know if (when) he will come but if (when) he comes (does), I'll speak to him about it. (Give two variants if pos­sible.)

 

1. I don't know if she (get the tickets for the concert) but if (phone you). 2. We don't know if the weather (change for the worse) but-if it (not go to the country). 3. She doesn't know if she (find out his address today) but if she (send him a telegram). 4. He doesn't know if the teacher (look through our course-papers this week) but if she... we (have time to make changes). 5. We don't know when the delegation (arrive) but when they (show them the places of interest). 6. I don't know if he (come) but if he... his arrival (change my plans). 7. I don't know if he (stay) for the week-end but if he (ask him to tell us about his trip to England). 8. She doesn't know when he (wake up) but when he (phone you).

 

Ex 41 Complete the following sentences, bearing in mind the chart and the model

above.

 

1. The students knew when the delegation (arrive) but they were not sure if (at the appointed time). 2. We asked the weather man when the weather (change for the better) and if (remain good till the end of the month). 3. I wasn't sure if they (get to the station in that fog in time). 4. It was not clear if the weather (change) but what we wanted to know was if the plane (be late). 5. She was not sure if anybody (meet at the

station) and she wanted to know if (find a taxi). 6. Mother did not ask me if (come late) but she wanted to know when (return). 7. The foreign tourists wondered if (have a chance to see Leningrad). 8. At the time I did not know whether (buy tickets for a fast train).

 

Ex 42    Study the chart, and use Reported Speech in the following sentences.

 

(А)

Direct Speech	Reported Speech
He asked: (a) "What are you discussing?" (b)  "Will you be see­ing her?" 2. She said: "The children were playing in the garden when it started raining."	1. (a) He asked what we were discussing. (b) He asked if I would be seeing her. 2. She said that the children were playing in the garden when it started raining.

 

1. "Don't wait for me. I'll be dining out," he said. 2. "The weather is changing for the worse," the guide said. "It will be raining in a mi­nute." 3. "Our office will be moving to a new building, won't it?" the secretary asked. 4. "All the passengers were looking out of the compart­ment window when the train was passing the lake," the porter said. 5. "What big cities shall we be passing?" the fellow-traveller asked me. 6. Hurry uр. The train will be starting in a minute," I shouted after him. 7. "What were they broadcasting when he turned on the radio?" she asked. 8. "The baby is waking up, quiet," Mother said to me. 9. "She was wearing a new dress at the party and looked very beautiful," he said.

 

(В)

Direct Speech	Reported Speech
He asked: "What will you do, if you don't get the ticket for the train?" 2. She said: "I'll leave as soon as I get a telegram."	He asked what I would do if I did not get the ticket for the train.   She said (that) she would leave as soon as she got a telegram.

 

1. "Will it be safe to stay in the mountains for the night if the weath­er doesn't change for the better?" we asked the guide. 2. The porter said: "I'll wake you up, when the train arrives in Smolensk." 3. My wife said to me: "While you are away, I'll do the packing." 4. "Don't leave until I phone you," he asked me. 5. "After he leaves hospital, they'll take him to the South," the doctor said. 6. "They'll wait for the fisherman to return until it gets dark," the local man explained to me. 7. "As soon as I hear from him, I'll let you know," my neighbour said to me. 8. "I'll live in town till my husband returns from the expedition and when he returns, we'll go to the sea-side together," she said.

 

Ex 43 Open the brackets and paraphrase the dialogue for Reported Speech.

 

FOOD AND TALK

 

Last week at a dinner party the hostess (ask) me to sit next to Mrs Rumbold. She (be) a large unsmiling lady in a tight black dress. She (not look) up when I (take) my seat beside her. Her eyes (be fixed) on her plate and in a short time she (be) busy eating. I (try) to make conversation.

"A new play is coming to the Globe soon," I said, "Will you be seeing it?"

"No," she answered.

"Will you be spending your holidays abroad this year?" I asked.

"No," she said.

"Will you be staying in England?" I asked.

"No," she answered.

In despair I (ask) her whether she (enjoy) her dinner. "Young man," she answered, "if you eat more and talk less, we shall both enjoy our dinner."

(After "An Elementary Course" by L. G. Alexander)

 

Ex 44 Rewrite (or retell) in narrative form the following passage from the text. From: "As soon as the train started ..." up to: "... I am from Poland."

 

Degrees of Comparison of Adverbs

 

Ex 45 Study the following chart.

 

Positive degree	Comparative degree	Superlative degree
late early	later earlier	latest earliest
exactly beautifully	more exactly more beautifully	most exactly most beautifully
often   quickly   slowly	oftener more often quicker more quickly slower more slowly	oftenest most often quickest most quickly slowest most slowly
well badly much* little	better worse more less	best worst most least

Ex 46  Make up sentences, using the adverbs given in the chart according to the following model.

 

Model: Nick speaks French well, Ann speaks French better than Nick, and Peter speaks French best (of all).

 

Ex 47 Translate the following sentences, using 'much', 'far', 'a great deal', 'still' with the adverbs in comparative degree.

 

1.Мій брат говорить французькою набагато краще, ніж англійською. 2. Деяким людям набагато більше подобається подорожувати взимку, ніж влітку. 3. У неділю я встаю набагато пізніше, ніж звичайно. 4. Перед іспитами студенти, як правило, набагато більше і старанніше навчаються. 5. Моя сестра набагато частіше за мене ходить у театр. 6. Учора наші спортсмени грали ще скоріше. 7. Із словником ви перекладете статтю набагато точніше. 8. Сьогодні сонце світить набагато яскравіше, ніж учора.

 

The Article

 

(a) With names of natural phenomena

 

Ex 48  Study the chart.

 

It was rain, rain all the week-end. A heavy rain started when  we arrived at the station. The rain lasted for two days. We had a lot of snow* last night. In the morning the snow was thick on the road. Yesterday we had 10 degrees of frost. There was a heavy frost in the night. The frost killed all the plants.

 

Ex 49 Explain the use of the article. Retell the passage.

 

The weather is the most important topic in Britain. On the Con­tinent, if you want to describe someone as a very dull person, you re­mark: "He will only discuss the weather with you." In Britain this is a topic which is always interesting for the English.

Here are two conversations:

 

For Bad Weather	For Good Weather
— It's an awful day, isn't it? — Yes, isn't the day awful? — The rain ... I hate rain. — Such a day in July. Rain in the morning, then some sunshine and then rain all day long.	— It's a lovely day, isn't it? — Yes, isn't the day lovely? — The sun...  — Isn't it wonderful! — It's so nice and warm. — I think it's so nice when it's warm, isn't it?

 

Learn both the conversations by heart. And even if you do not say anything else for the rest of your life, just repeat the conversations, Eng­lishmen will think that you are an awfully clever man with nice man­ners.

(After "How to Be an Alien" by G. Mikes)

 

Ex 50   Translate the following.

 

1.Густий туман вкрив усе місто. 2. Давай зачекаємо, дощ скоро припиниться. 3. Вітер із заходу зазвичай приносить дощ. 4. Як використовується сила вітру? 5. Вітер був сильним, і йти було важко. 6. Сильний мороз знищив фруктові дерева. 7. Учора ввечері йшов сильний сніг, випало багато снігу. 8. Подивись, сніг навколо фабрики зовсім чорний. 9. Він виглянув у вікно – скрізь лежав сніг: на деревах, на доріжках у саду, на клумбах.

 

(b)With parts of the day and seasons

 

Ex 51   Study the chart.

 

It is early/late morning (evening, etc.). It was a bright Sunday morning of early/late autumn (spring, etc). They came in the morning (afternoon, etc); in (the) autumn (win­ter, etc). It was a rainy morning (night, etc); a rainy autumn (spring, etc). I met him on the morning of the exam; in the autumn of 1980. He is here since Friday morning (autumn, etc).

 

Ex 52 Fill in the blanks with articles where necessary.

 

1.— autumn has come and early in — morning sheets of — ice cover the puddles on the road. 2. — rain never stopped in — night, and — morning started with — dull rain typical of — late autumn. 3. We had — cold winter last year with a lot of — snow. — frost didn't let go even during — day. 4. The champion said he would always re­member — winter of 1980 when he went mountain-skiing for the first time. 5. All through — winter the old hunter is alone in the taiga, the first tourists come only in — summer. 6. You can get to Yakutsk only by plane but in — bad weather there may be no flights and the passen­gers have to wait in the airport all through — night hoping that — weath­er may change for the better in — morning and they will be able to catch a plane some time during — day. I have been waiting here since — Monday noon. 7. It was — late afternoon on — foggy September day when we left the town in our car. 8. We are expecting them in — eve­ning, some time after seven.

 

READING

 

Ex 53 Read the text, and do the assignments coming after it.

 

In England everything is the other way round.

On Sundays on the Continent even the poorest person puts on his best suit, tries to look respectable, and at the same time the life of the country becomes gay and cheerful; in England even the richest lord or motor-manufacturer dresses in rags, does not shave, and the country becomes dull and sad. On the Continent there is one subject you must never discuss — the weather; in England, if you do not repeat the phrase "Lovely day, isn't it?" about two hundred times a day, people will say you are a bit dull.

On the Continent some street cats are loved, others are only re­spected; in England they are universally worshipped as in ancient Egypt. On the Continent people have good food; in England people have good table manners.

On the Continent learned persons love to quote Aristotle, Horace, Montaigne* and show off their knowledge; in England only uneducated people show off their knowledge, nobody quotes Latin and Greek authors in the course of a conversation, unless he has never read them.

On the Continent almost every nation whether little or great has openly declared at one time or another that it is superior to all other nations; the English fight heroic wars to combat these dangerous ideas without ever mentioning which isreally the most superior race in the world. On the Continent the population consists of a small percentage of criminals and the rest are honest people. On the other hand, people on the Continent either tell you the truth or lie; in England they hardly ever lie, but they never tell the truth.

Many Continentals think life is a game; the English think cricket is a game.

                                (After "How to Be an Alien" by G. Mikes)

 

Assignments

 

(a)  Quickly look through the list and mark the lettered phrase nearest In meaning to the word or phrase tested.

 

1. Rags: (i) fashionable clothes worn by English aristocrats; (ii) a special sort of dress worn by bus conductors; (iii) old torn clothes.

2. Worship: (i) be fond of; (ii) make an idol of; (iii) hate.

3. Learned person: (i) an expert; (ii) a first-year student; (iii) a person having much knowledge.

4. Quote: (i) repeat the exact words (from a book): (ii) mention some interesting facts from a book; (iii) read books by these authors.

5. Show off: (i) discuss topics of general interest; (ii) try to show others that one knows more than they do; (iii) discuss personal mat­ters.

6. Uneducated people: (i) people who never went to school; (ii) peo­ple who can only read and write; (iii) people without a university educa­tion.

7. Superior: (i) no different from others; (ii) just as good as every­body else; (iii) much better than others.

8. Dangerous: (i) unsafe; (ii) interesting; (iii) exotic.

9. Hardly ever: (i) almost never; (ii) never; (iii) nearly always.

 

(b) Complete the following.

 

1. "Fight" is synonymous with —. 2. "To tell the truth" is the opposite of —. 3. The opposite of "criminals" is —. 4. The difference between a "learned" person and an "educated" one is that —.

 

(c) Choose the answer that expresses most accurately what is stated in the passage. Only one answer is correct.

 

1. To the English the Continent is: (i) Europe; (ii) Europe and Asia; (iii) Europe without Britain.

2. In England they worship: (i) all street cats; (ii) some cats; (iii) cats from Egypt.

3. In England Latin and Greek authors are quoted by: (i) educated people; (ii) learned persons; (iii) people who have never read these authors.

4. The idea behind the sentence "The English fight heroic wars to combat these dangerous ideas without ever mentioning which is really the most superior race in the world" is that: (i) the English are more heroic than other nations; (ii) the English think they are the most su­perior race; (iii) the English have a bad reputation.

5. On the Continent the population mostly consists of: (i) criminals; (ii) honest people; (iii) people who are neither honest nor criminal.

6. "In England they hardly ever lie, but they never tell the truth" means that English people: (i) neither lie nor tell the truth; (ii) never lie; (iii) always lie.

7. "The English think cricket is a game" means: (i) the English take life seriously; (ii) the English like to play cricket; (iii) the English think life is like a game of cricket.

8. "The other way round" means: (i) very much the same; (ii) just the opposite; (iii) with some differences.

(d) Sum up what the text has to say on each of the following points.

 

1. Sundays on the Continent and in England. 2. The Englishman's favourite subject of conversation. 3. The fondness of the English for animals in general and cats in particular. 4. Food and cooking on the Continent and in England. 5. What the English think of foreigners. 6. How the English take life.

 

(e) Discuss the following.

 

1. What the English think of themselves.

2. The reputation the English have among foreigners.

3. What the author thinks about the English.

 

(f)  Say if, in the author's opinion, the English have a sense of humour, or not. Quote examples from the text to prove your statement.

 

(g) Make a list of all the different ways in which the English differ from the Continentals.

 

(h) The humorous effect of the passage depends a good deal on exaggeration. Quote examples of exaggeration you have noticed in it.

 

(i)  Ask questions, covering the contents of the text.

 

(j) Give a talk, stating your agreement (or disagreement) with the author's argu­ments and conclusions.

 

Ex 54  Read the passage as rapidly as you can. Time yourself. During the second reading, pay special attention to the words you don't know: look carefully at the context and see if you can get an idea of what they mean. Make an outline of the passage.

 

There are four climatic zones in the Soviet Union: arctic, subarctic, continental and subtropical. The climate is the coldest in the Arctic, where there are several months of the polar night in the winter. But the nearness of the ocean is very important. In the summer, even in the sunny months, the weather is cloudy with damp snow and temperatures seldom above freezing point.

The European areas of the USSR have a milder climate. The winter is not so cold and the summer is not very hot. In the East-European part of Russia the climate is continental. To the east of the Baltic and Black Seas the winter is colder and the summer is hotter. The southern coast of the Crimea has the warmest winter with no frosts.

Because of the warm Black Sea the summer in the Caucasus is hot and the winter is mild. Farther east to the shores of the Caspian the sum­mer is hotter and the winter is a little colder. This is, in fact, a dry sub­tropical region!

Soviet Central Asia is the hottest and driest region of the country. Here there is no cloud for weeks on end and because of the hot surTthere is practically no vegetation.

 

SPEECH AND COMPOSITION

 

Ex 55 Answer the following questions. Sum up your answers (orally, or in writing).

 

CLIMATE

 

1. What climate do you have in your part of the country? 2. What is the climate like in Britain? 3. What is the difference between a sea and a continental climate? 4. What kind of climate do you think is the ideal one?

 

CLOTHES AND FASHIONS

 

1. What do men (women, children) usually wear in winter (summer, etc; on a rainy day; in cold, damp, hot, etc weather)? 2. What do you wear at home (at the office, Institute, etc; when on vacation; to a party, reception, the theatre, etc)? 3. How do fashions change with the times? 4. Why do fashions change every now and then? 5. What can clothes tell of a person's character, his life style, etc? 6. What are people's clothes made of? 7. What clothes are made of wool (cotton, silk, leather, nylon, etc)? 8. What do the English mean when they say "We are not rich enough to buy cheap things"?

 

Ex 56  Read the weather forecasts, note their style. Say what time of the year they refer to. Consult your local paper, and (a) give the full story behind the brief item about the weather; (b) write up the weather forecast in English.

 

WEATHER: Showers, win­try at times. Outlook: Cold with rain or sleet.		WEATHER: Cloudy with rain. Some sunny intervals. Temperatures will range from near normal in the South to cold in the North. Windy.		WEATHER: Mainly cloudy with rain. Normal temper­atures. Outlook for tomorrow and Thursday: Changeable.
		Tomorrow and Monday: Rain at first in the South, with some snow over high ground.
WEATHER:Generally very cold, with very cold north				WEATHER: Showers. Rath­er cold. Tomorrow and
­easterly air-stream contin­uing. Sunny and dry, with frost and some icy patches.				Thursday: Occasional rain with some snow In North. Temperatures below normal.
		WEATHER: Cloudy at first, clear in the after­noon. Outlook: Mostly mildand unsettled.
WEATHER: Sunny inter­vals, but showers in East­ern areas; cold and windy. Outlook: Cloudy with show­ers; cold.				WEATHER: Bright with showers. Outlook: Sunny intervals and showers.

 

Ex 57  Read the passage. Answer the questions. Retell (or write up) the passage in English.

          

Як і у кожного народу, у англійців багато гарних традицій і спорт – одна з них.

            Англійці полюбляють спорт. Взимку у неділю на вокзалі можна часто побачити цілі родини з лижами: мама, тато, діти, а інколи і дідусь з бабусею. Я бачив багато таких родин. Поїзди, що йдуть у засніжені горні райони, заповнені лижниками різного віку.

             А традиції англійців щодо одягу? У даному випадку я не кажу про одяг клерків або гвардійців, я маю на увазі звичайний, повсякденний одяг англійців.

              Серед англійців дуже рідко можна зустріти людей у занадто яскравому одязі. Якщо ви побачите чоловіка у яскравій краватці або сорочці, не питайте його, як пройти на Гордон-сквер, він не може вам цього сказати, тому що він приїжджий.

                                                                               ( С. Образцов “Дві поїздки до Лондону”)

 

Questions

 

1. What traditions are among the best traditions of the English? 2. Where do the English people usually go skiing? 3. What descrip­tion does the author give of the crowds of skiers going North? 4. How do people travel to the snowy, mountainous parts of the country? 5. Is it a short or a long journey from London to the Highlands of Scotland? 6. What does the author say about the English tradition in usual every­day clothes? 7. How will you know a stranger in London?

 

Ex 58   Act as interpreter. Sum up the dialogue.

 

A:  I'd like to visit the Soviet Union. What should I start with?

В: Вам треба звернутися до “Інтуристу”, який організує екскурсії для           іноземних туристів.

A:  What is the best time to visit Kyiv?

В: Багато хто приїздить влітку. Але дехто вважає, що набагато цікавіше   відвідати Київ взимку, коли відкриті всі театри та концертні зали, і  потрапити на свято “Київська зима”.

A: Oh, and how about Ukrainian winter with its severe frosts?

В:  Зима в нас не така вже й сувора, як дехто вважає. Звичайна температура взимку у Києві від –12 С до –15 С. А мороз переноситься легко, тому що повітря сухе.

A:  Yes, I hear that the climate in and around Kyiv is healthy and pleasant for tourism. How can one get to Kyiv?

В:  По-перше, у Київ можна приїхати поїздом. Існує залізничне сполучення між Києвом та багатьма іноземними містами.

A: Yes, I've heard a lot about Soviet railways and their excellent re­cord of service. How else can one travel to Kyiv?

В:  У Київ можна прилетіти літаком. У Києві два аеропорти. У Києв також можна приплисти і на пароплаві. Ласкаво просимо до нас у Київ.

 

 

***

 

А:  Як вам сподобалося київське метро?

В:  In my opinion the Kyiv Metro is the finest in the world. It's not only the quickest way of getting across the city, it is also a unique engineering and architectural structure.

А:  Які станції вам сподобалися більш за все?

В:  I like all the stations I've seen. No two stations are alike. They are light and of a cleanliness that gladdens the eye. How old is the Kyiv  Metro?

А:  Перша лінія була відкрита у травні 1961 року і тоді було усього лише 5 станцій.

В:  And how many are there now?

А: У 2006 році було 44 станці]. Але в майбутньому їх кількість значно зросте.

В:  How many passengers does it carry every day?

А:  Більше 3 мільйонів.

В:  How fast do the Metro trains run?

A:  90 км за годину.

В:  I was surprised to learn that the fare is 50 kopecks which covers all the distance and transfers (changes) to other lines. It's the lowest fare in the world.

 

Ex 59 Speak on the following topics. Make use of the words and phrases listed below.

 

1. The Seasons in Town and in the Country

 

Spring: a wonderful season; lovely spring mornings (days); April showers, March winds bring warm weather; get warmer and warmer; break into leaf (of trees); the first flowers; green grass; everything comes to life; the best time for walks in the country.

 

Summer: hot; cool; dry; fine weather; shine brightly (of the sun); blue skies; go on a holiday; leave town; go to the country (seaside, etc); go swimming (boating, etc); lie in the sun; brown as a berry; wear light clothes (frocks, shorts, T-shirts, etc); enjoy oneself immensely; have a good time; summer is only too short.

 

Autumn: Indian summer; be over; rain hard; a thick fog; awful (beastly) weather; a dull (wet, etc) morning; change for the worse; wear a raincoat and carry an umbrella; leaves cover the ground like a thick carpet; grey, cloudy skies; wet, slippery roads.

 

Winter: a heavy snowfall; everything is white with snow; the ground is covered with snow; not a single leaf on the trees; no birds singing in the woods; a hard frost; bright sunshine; cold, but pleasant weather; go skiing (skating); be good for one's health; have a wonderful time.

 

2. Meeting a Friend in the Street

 

go by car; heavy traffic; move slowly; stop at the traffic lights;

see a friend; walk along the street; stop at the side of the street; get out of the car; stop to say "Hallo" to an old friend; know each other well enough; discuss personal (business, etc) matters; offer one's friend a lift.

 

3. Off to the Theatre

 

have two tickets; invite a friend; come home from work; shave; change one's shirt (tie, socks, etc); put on a clean shirt; clean one's shoes; brush one's coat (suit, etc); leave home; have little time; go by taxi; arrive at the theatre; meet sb at the entrance; find out at the last moment; be sure that ....

 

4. At the Theatre

 

take one's seat in the hall; watch the play with interest; be fond of such plays; like the play very much; the play discusses matters of great importance; describe life in a small village (big town, etc); give the true story behind the events; walk home; thank sb for a lovely eve­ning.

 

Ex 60   Discuss the following, giving your arguments for or against.

 

1. The climate has an effect on people.

2 The weather has helped to form the English character.

3. Your friend says that manners make the man. What do you think?

4. There are many who think that it is clothes that make the man (particularly the woman).

5. You like travelling by air, your friends like travelling by train. You think that flying is not only faster, but also much safer.

6. You like meeting and talking to strangers. You say that it helps you to learn more about people and the world.

 

Ex 61   Subjects for oral and written composition.

 

1. Explain why the English say: "Other countries have a climate, in England we have weather."

2. Describe your city: (a) in winter (autumn, summer, spring); (b) on a cold frosty morning; (c) on a bright sunny day.

3. My favourite season.

4. Describe a journey by train (plane, boat).

5. There is an English proverb which says: "Other times, other manners." Give an example of how manners change with the times.

6. People often enter into conversation when they are travelling in a train or on a boat. How would you explain this?

 

 

LESSON FOUR

 

Text:           At Home (from "A Kind of Loving" by Stan Barstow)¹

Grammar: The Perfect Tense Forms (Present, Past and Future). Reported Speech. Sequence of Tenses (contd).

 

AT HOME

 

The bus I catch doesn't go up the hill and when I get off at the cor­ner I catch the smell of fish and chips and I cross the road and call at the shop and buy a fish and four penn'orth² of chips. I eat them out of the paper as I'm going up the hill. I really like fish and chips and there's no better way of eating them than in the open air. They last me till I get to the gate.

It's half past ten and the Old Lady and the Old Man³ are sitting with the table-lamp on watching television when I go in.

"Do you want some supper?" the Old Lady asks me.

"I've had some fish and chips on my way."

"You'll want a drink of something, I suppose?"

"It's all right; don't bother; I'll make some cocoa."

I go into the kitchen and make the cocoa and bring it back into the living-room and sit down on the sofa at the back and light a cigarette. I'm thinking about Ingrid as I watch the picture⁴ that's on TV. I'm wondering what happened that she didn't come to meet me.

"Where've you been?" the Old Lady says in a minute.

"Pictures."

"By yourself?"

"With Willy Lomas."

"Willy Lomas? I don't think I know him, do I?"

"I used to⁶ go to school with him."

"I don't know why you pay good money to go to the pictures when you can see them at home for nothing," says the Old Man.

"You can't show colour⁶ and Cinemascope on TV."

"Cinemascope?"

"Wide screen ..... bigger."

"But they're pictures, just the same, aren't they?"

I don't bother to argue about it. The picture's finished and there's a toothpaste ad⁷ on and I get up and throw my cig-end⁸ in the fire.⁹

"Going up?"¹⁰ the Old Lady says.

"Yes, I'm ready for it. Had a busy day today."

I say good night and go upstairs. There's a light in Jim's room. I go into our bathroom and wash my face and clean my teeth as quickly as I can. As I'm coming out Jim calls me.

"What is it?"

"A letter for you."

I take it and look at it. I look at my name on the envelope and all at once I begin to get excited.

"Where did you get this?"

"I found it behind the front door. Somebody pushed it in while we were watching television. There's no stamp on it."

There's no address on it, either; just my name.

I shut the door behind me¹¹ before I open the letter. "Dear Vie,"¹² it says. "My cousin decided to catch a later train and I went with her to the station to see her off. The train was late and it was after half past seven when I got back. I went to where we'd arranged to meet but of course you'd gone. I'm going to be at the same place tomorrow night. (Sunday). I hope you can come. Love,¹³

Ingrid."

(Adapted)

 

NOTES

 

1. Stan Barstow was born in 1928 in the West Riding of Yorkshire, England, in the family of a coal-miner. "A Kind of Loving" was his first published novel, and came out in 1960. He has also written "Ask Me Tomorrow", published in 1962.

2. four penn'orth: four pennyworth на чотири пенси eg She bought two roubles' worth of apples. Вона купила на два карбованці яблук.

3. the Old Lady and the Old Man: a familiar way of speaking of one's parents

4. picture: a cinematograph film; pictures (BrE)=movies (AmE);the cinema

5. (used (followed by to+Infinitive): бувало; колись (знав, працював і т.і.)

We use this for repeated action in the past, generally with the idea that the action is finished now. Eg I used to go to school with him (but I don't now).

6. colour: technicolour кольоровий (про фільм)

7. ad: advertisement реклама

8. cig-end: cigarette-end недокурок

9. fire: here вогонь каміна

Many English homes still have fireplaces with open fires to warm up the room in cold weather.

10. Going up?: Going upstairs? Going to bed?

The traditional English one-family house has two storeys: upstairs and downstairs. The bedrooms and bathroom are always upstairs. Down­stairs are the living room, dining room and kitchen.

11. I shut the door behind me: Я зачиняю за собою двері. Note that in English this construction with behind will always have a personal pronoun in the objective case.

12. Vic: short for "Victor". The boy's full name is Victor Brown.

13. Love: this is usually written at the end of a letter to a friend. Corresponds to the Russian з привітом.

 

VOCABULARY

 

kind n вид, род, гатунок (сорт) different kinds of books (goods, trees, etc) What kind of a man (student, etc) is he? Що він за людина (студент і т. і.)?

catch vt (caught) 1. ловити, піймати; схопити; вловити catch a ball (bird, fish; sb's idea, etc); catch sb by the hand; 2. поспіти (встигнути), попасти на автобус (потяг і т. і.) catch a bus (train, etc) Phr catch (a) cold за­студитись

cross vt переходити, перетинати (вулицю, дорогу, річку і т. і.) cross a street (road, river, etc); crossing n перехрестя; перехід (через вулицу); переїзд по воді, переправа; пересічення

worth а вартий; заслуговуючий (уваги і т. і.) The coat is worth the money you paid for it. They worked hard but it was worth it. Phr be worth doing вартий зробити The film is worth seeing.

real а теперішній (справжній), справжній; дійсний real gold (silk, etc); a real friend (hero, etc); the real truth; reality n дійсність, реаль­ність; really adv дійсно, якраз Do you really think so?

way n 1. шлях, дорога a long (short, hard, etc) way; You have taken the right (wrong) way ... Phr on the (one's) way home (to some place) по дорозі додому; on the (one's) way back на зворотньому шляху; Phr by the way доречі, між іншим; 2. спосіб, засіб, метод, манера, спосіб дії I'll find a way to do it. I don't like his way of speaking. What is the quickest way of learning (to learn) a foreign language?

last vi 1. тривати, продовжуватись How long did the meeting (lecture, concert, rain, trip, etc) last? 2. досить (бути в достатній кількості) The money (food, etc) will last them till the end of the month(for a whole week, etc).

happen vi траплятися, діятися (зчинятися) How did it happen? The story happened two years ago. What's happened to (with) him?

pay vt (paid) платити How much did they pay (you) for the article? pay n плата, зарплата What's your pay? payment n оплата, платіж, плата to make payment здійснювати платіж

same indef pron той же самий; такий же the same book (room, town, day, man, etc) Phr just (all) the same все одно (все рівно) It's all the same to me.

throw vt (threw, thrown) кидати, кинути; throw sth to (at) sb кидати що-небудь кому-небудь (в когось, в кого-небудь)

be excited хвилюватись; get excited розхвилюватись Everybody was excited by the news. Don't get excited! He хвилюйтесь! excitement n хвилювання, збудження; exciting а хвилюючий, захоплюючий an exciting story (speech, film, book, moment, event, etc); excited схвильований, збуджений an excited voice (face, child, etc)

behind prep за, позад (кого-небудь/чого-небудь) (also fig.) He left the room and closed the door behind him. What's behind his words (actions, etc)? Phr leave sb/sth behind залишати

push vt штовхати push a door (car, boat, person) (also fig); push n поштовх  give a push

just adv 1. точно, як раз, саме так This is just the book I want; 2. тільки, всього лиш Не is just a child.

decide vt вирішувати decide a question, etc; We decided to stay in town. They haven't yet decided what to do (where to go; etc); decision n рі­шення Phr take (make) a decision прийняти рішення; decisive а вирішальний a decisive moment (step, argument, event, etc)

arrange vt 1. влаштувати, організовувати; домовлятися arrange a party (meeting, trip, etc); We've arranged to meet on Saturday. I've arranged for a meeting next week. 2. приводити в порядок; розставляти (книги, меблі і т. і.) arrange one's business (plans, etc); arrange books (furniture, etc); arrangement n 1. погодження, домовленність There is an arrangement between them about the price (payment, etc) Phr have (make) an arrangement (with sb) умовлятися, домовлятися (з ким-небудь); 2. pl приготування, заходи, плани Phr make arrange­ments (for sth) робити приготування до (чого-сь)

hope vi надіятись I hope to see you soon. We hope that everything will be all right. Phr hope for the better надіятись на краще ; hope n надія have some (little, strong, no, etc) hope for sth

 

WORD COMBINATIONS

 

get off, виходити (з автобуса, потяга і т.і.)

get on сідати (в автобус, на потяг і т.і.)

call at some place заходити куди-небудь; call on sb заходити до когось

in the open air на (свіжому) повітрі (не в  приміщенні)

be on 1. іти (про фільм, концерт і т.і.); 2. бути ввімкнутим, працювати (про радіо, телевізор, світло і т. і.)

all right 1. добре, гаразд (виражає схвалення, згода); 2. все добре, все в порядку

I suppose я гадаю (думаю, рахую)

light a cigarette закурити (запалити)

by oneself сам, один, самостійно

see sb off (to some place) проводжати кого-небудь (кудись)

see sb home проводжати (кого-небудь) додому

 

EXERCISES

 

COMPREHENSION

 

Ex 1 Answer the following questions.

 

1. Why did Victor get off at the corner? 2. What did he buy at the little shop? 3. How did he like eating his fish and chips? 4. When did Victor get home? 5. What were his parents doing when he came in? 6. Why didn't he want any supper? 7. What was he thinking about as he watched TV? 8. What surprise did Victor's brother have for him? 9. Why did Victor get excited when he saw his name on the envelope? 10. Where had Jim found the letter? 11. Why did Victor shut the door behind him before opening the letter? 12. Who'd written the letter? 13. What did the letter say?

 

Ex 2 Look through the text once again, and:

 

1. Say how old you think Victor is and what he does.

2. Explain why Victor did not tell the whole truth to his parents.

3. Say if you believe Victor had really been to the pictures, or not.

4. Describe Victor's mood when he returns home, and how it changes when he gets the letter.

5. Give as much background information about the Brown family as you possibly can.

 

Ex 3 Find in the text the English for:

 

встигнути на автобус; зійти на розі; відчути запах; перейти вулицю; зайти до магазину; сидіти при засвіченій лампі; приготувати какао; піти до кухні; сісти на диван; запалити; вчитися в школі разом з кимось; платити гроші; дивитись кіно; широкий екран; побажати надобраніч; умиватися; чистити зуби; парадні двері; зачинити за собою двері; роздрукувати лист; поїхати більш пізнім потягом; там, де ми домовились зустрітися; на тому ж (старому) місці.

 

KEY STRUCTURES AND WORD STUDY

 

Ex 4 Give the four forms of the following verbs.

 

catch, go, buy, eat, sit, make, bring, come, know, pay, see, throw, shut

 

Ex 5 Make up five groups of three words associated in meaning or area of usage.

 

smell kitchen letter

sofa cigar taste

envelope touch bathroom

cigarette chair pipe

table-lamp stamp living room

 

Ex 6 Replace the words in bold type by their opposites. Make all necessary changes. Translate the sentences.

 

1. I met the doctor in ten years' time, and he was a different man. 2. The whole company arrived at the station to meet their friend. 3. Am I doing it the right way? 4. She's changed her mind about going to the party. 5. She stayed indoors part of the day. 6. He got on the bus in a small out-of-the-way village. 7. He says he's just sold his tape-recorder. 8. There was a narrow staircase leading downstairs. 9. The young man threw an excited look at his neighbour. 10. The suitcase is behind the door. 11. The book was duller than anything I'd had ever read before.

 

Ex 7 Fill in the blanks with 'excited' or 'exciting'.

 

1. The telephone rang. An — voice asked me if I already knew about the changes in the arrangements for the week-end. 2. It's a very usual kind of play. There's really nothing — about it. 3. She gave an — little laugh. She always laughed that way when she was nervous. 4. She's a very — person. There's never a dull moment when she's anywhere near. 5. What — news! What's happened? What is everybody so — about?

 

Ex 8 Recast the following sentences, using verbs instead of nouns. Make the necessary changes.

 

1. Sometimes it's difficult to make a quick decision. 2. How long did your stay with the Johnsons last? 3. Where does this strong smell come from — the cheese? 4. The discussion of both questions will take us no more than three quarters of an hour. 5. I am not sure whether they have made any changes in their original plan. 6. The doctor has hopes that the boy will get well soon. 7. He gets his pay twice a month. 8. I never know his thoughts. 9. Do you know the exact day of their arri­val? 10. He gave the door a hard push and it opened.

 

Ex 9 Recast the following, using a group-verb instead of verbs.

 

1. Let us rest a little before we start. 2. During the break they usu­ally smoke in the smoking-room. 3. Did you talk with your elder broth­er on the subject? 4. Let me look at what you have written. 5. I like walking in the rain. 6. He pushed the door hard. 7. Do you really want me to swim in this icy water? 8. We must wash the car after a run along the country road.

 

Ex 10 Translate the following sentences into English, using suitable phrasal verbs.

 

take up, look up, wake up, come up, get up, stand up, run up, put up

 

1. Він вийшов на вулицю,підняв руку, і таксі зупинилося. 2. Дитинапідняла очі на матір і посміхнулася. 3. Автобус зупинився. Вонавстала і,піднявши сумку з підлоги, пішла до виходу. 4. Хлопчисько підбіг і запитав, котра година. 5. Цікаво, ти також, як і я, встаєш відразу ж, як тільки прокинешся? 6. Він повільно наближався до нас і, коли підійшов, усі ми вже прощалися один з одним.

 

 

 

Ех 11  In (A) study the following chart, and in (B) supply the missing parts.

 

(A)	1. lately за останній час; нещодавно	1. He has travelled a lot la­tely.
	2. for the last/past few weeks, months, years, etc за останні декілька тижнів	2. He has worked too much for the last few days.
	3. last time минулий раз	3. We discussed that ques­tion last time.
	4. last/for the last time в останній раз	4. When did you see him last?

 

(В) 1. When did you get a letter from him —? 2. He has changed for the better —. 3. Although she had not seen him — she recognized him at once. 4. He visited his native town — when he was still a boy. 5. How often has he missed classes —? 6. This film was on at our local cinema —. 7. I watched this film on TV several times —. 8. "She has not called on us —. What's happened to her?" "She left for Lenin­grad —." 9. There haven't been thick fogs in London —.

 

Ex 12 Translate the following sentences (consult the chart in Ex 11, if necessary).

 

1. Коли ви були в Саратові востаннє? 2. За останні роки наше місто змінилося до невпізнанності. 3. Минулого разу йому не вистачило стипендії до кінця місяця тому, що він купив словник. 4. Минулого разу ти обіцяв зайти до нас. 5.Останні кілька днів не було дощу і земля зовсім суха. 6. Коли ви одержали звістку від нього востаннє? 7. Останнім часом я прочитав багато цікавих книг. 8. Чому він спізнюється? Останнім часом це трапляється з ним досить часто.

 

Ех 13  Translate the following sentences, using 'till' ('until') or 'before' accor­ding to the sense.

 

до	till (аж до) I'll stay here till 5.
	before (перед, раніш) Call on me before 5.

 

1. Ми будемо чекати вас до шостої години. 2. Це сталося до нашого приїзду. 3. Вони стежили за грою до самого кінця матчу. 4. Обговорення продовжувалося до вечора. 5. Ми прийшли за десять хвилин до початку концерту. 6. Вони мешкали тут аж до самого початку війни. 7. Вони мешкали тут ще до війни. 8. Наша установа переїде в нове приміщення до нового року. 9. Ми збираємося пробути тут до кінця літа. 10. Вони поїхалище до обіду. 11. Ми домовились зустрітися до зборів. 12. Розбудіть мене до сьомої години, будь ласка. 13. Він встигає переглянути газету ще до сніданку. 14. Діти були на свіжому повітрі до самоговечора. 15. Він зійшов з автобуса за дві зупинки до своєї і пішов додому пішки.

 

Ех 14 Translate the following, using 'too' or 'either'.

 

1. Я іду спати. Телевізор вимкнути? — Так, вже пізно. Я також більше не буду дивитися. 2. Вони сьогодні також збираються за місто, тільки більш пізнім потягом. 3. Я також не люблю ходити в кіно один, підемо разом. 4. Цей лист мені, але для вас також є лист. 5. Коли будеш викидати старі газети, викинь і ці журнали. 6. — Отже, я пішов. — Почекай мене, я теж піду з тобою. 7. Я також не ходив учора на вокзал проводжати її, я був зайнятий. 8. На роботі його нема, вдома теж. Цікаво, де він. 9. Вона також мовчала і не знала, як почати цю неприємну розмову. 10. Ми також не знаємо точно, де він живе; знаємо тільки, що недалеко звідси.

 

Ех 15 Translate the following, using 'used to + Infinitive'.*

 

1. Я сподіваюся, ви мене не забули, ми колись разом навчались. 2. Бачите той маленький будиночок на іншій стороні вулиці? Ми там колись жили. 3. Один час вони були друзями, потім щось відбулося, і вони більше не бачаться. 4. У молодості він багато подорожував; його будинок — справжній музей. 5. Вона, бувало, до нас часто заходила до того, як її родина переїхала в новий район. 6. Коли я працював на заводі, я звичайно їхав на роботу першим автобусом. 7. Колись він любив класичну музику і міг годинами слухати Баха і Бетховена (Bach, Beethoven). 8. Ви раніш носили окуляри, чи не так? 9. Колись він грав тільки маленькі ролі, а зараз він знаменитий актор. 10. — Я не бачив його понад три роки. — Хіба він не бував у вас регулярно минулого літа?

 

Ех 16 Study the following phrases and (a) recall the sentences in which they are used in the text; (b) use them in sentences of your own.

 

go up/down the hill (street); get off/on the bus; at the corner; call at a shop (some place); go into the kitchen (go in); in the open (air); get to the gate (some place); be on (about a lamp, film, show, TV); on one's way (home; to some place); sit down on the sofa; think about sb/sth; in a minute (month, three days); go to school; at home; for nothing (money; two pounds); show sth on TV; get up (from a chair); come out (of the room); look at sb/sth; on the envelope; behind the door; shut the door behind sb; see sb off; get back (home; to some place); at the same place.

 

Ex 17 Fill in the blanks with prepositions or adverbs wherever necessary.

 

(A) 1. He pushed the button and the lift began moving —. His office was — the 7th floor. 2. Put — the cigarette, please, I don't like the smell — your tobacco. 3. He finished his drink, paid — it and got — — the seat, ready to go. 4. — his way — —the room he shut the door— him silently not to wake — the sleeping child. 5. After supper she sat --- --- the work and the light was — — her room the greater part — the night 6. You'll be passing — the cinema — your way — work, won't you? Have a look what's —. We may go — the pictures — the even­ing. 7. "How do I get — the stadium? Is it a long way — here?" "It is. Take bus 45 — the corner — High Street." "Where do I get —?" "— the last stop." 8. The man threw the ball — the water and the dog brought it —. 9. You must have a six-copeck stamp — the envelope if you want your letter to go — air mail. 10. "Shall we go — the coun­try — some later train tonight?" "It's all the same — me." 11. What's happened—the children? What's all this noise and excitement—? 12. "Will anybody be seeing you —?" "Yes, I've arranged—Bill." 13. I'd like to discuss—you the arrangements—the party. 14. If you look — this drop — water under the microscope, you will see how full—life it is.

 

(B) Peter, a thirteen-year-old boy, sat — a big chair — front — the TV screen. His mother wasn't —home, so there was nobody who would tell him what he could and what he couldn't watch. He was glad not to be — bed — 11 o'clock. When the television advertisements were —, Peter closed his eyes and thought — himself as one — the large unshaven men — pistols, walking slowly — a dark stairway towards the door — which, everybody knew, the Boss was waiting. — a few mi­nutes Peter knew, the ads would be over, so he had just enough time to go — the kitchen and get something nice — the refrigerator. — the kitchen he did not put — the light and it was strange to see how the kitchen looked — the dark when nobody else was — home.

(After "Peter Two" by Irwin Shaw)

 

Ex 18 Fill in the blanks with a suitable word. Use the correct form. Translate the sentences into Ukrainian.

 

really, happen (2), just (2), catch (2), decide, decision (2), last v, arrange (2), arrangement, push v (2), hope v, throw v (2), way (2) same, kind, behind, excitement

 

1. He's never been late before. I wonder what's — to him. 2. It's in man's nature to — for the best. 3. How can she know about such things. She's — a child. 4. What's the quickest—to learn a foreign language? 5. My friend — my look and smiled back. 6. How much lon­ger is this awful weather going to —? 7. The teacher asked for the full story — the headlines. 8. Has your sister — changed as much as you say? 9. We've — for a meeting on Thursday. Is that all right with you? 10. The car had stopped again. We all got out and started —. 11. It's an important step. Give him all the time he wants to make this —. Don't — him too hard. 12. What's the matter? What's all this — about? 13. In a personal matter of this — it's awfully difficult to make the right —. 14. When she found out what part he had played in the whole story she — not to see him any more. 15. The composer — the piano piece for orchestra. 16. She — the bone to the dog. 17. After the children had gone to bed we stayed up to discuss the — for the New Year's par­ty. 18. — think of it! He was born on the — day as I was. 19. On his — home he met a friend whom he hadn't seen for years. 20. As soon as she entered the house she — the smell of fried bacon and eggs. 21. My friend — me a questioning look. 22. The woman — the chair a little closer to the fire. 23. The little boy was in the river before anybody knew what had —.

 

Ex 19 Replace the Russian words and phrases by suitable English equivalents in the correct form. Retell the passage.

 

I don't (дійсно) know what's the (справа) with me, but it is clear that a lot of things are different lately. I never (раніше) to wear glasses. But now if I want (пізнати) what (відбувається) in the world I must wear them. The only other (спосіб) is to ask somebody to read the papers aloud. That is not very good (також), because people speak in such voices these days that I can't hear them very well.

Everything is farther than it (було) to be. (З однієї сторони), the (шлях) to the station is twice as long now. (З іншої сторони), the trains (відправляються) sooner too. I don't run after them any more, because they start (бистріше) these days when I try (встигнути на) them. I ask the conductor (декілька) times during my (поїздки) if the next station is where I (вихожу) and he always says it isn't. Usually I put on my hat and coat and stand near the door (тільки) to be (впевнений) I don't (проїхав) my stop.

Even the weather (змінюється). It's colder in winter and the summers are hotter than they (бувало) to be. I always (одягаю) galoshes now when I go out, because the rain today is wetter than the rain we (рані­ше) to get.

People (змінюються) too. They're younger than they (колись) to be when I was their age. I went back not long ago to my college which I finished in 1943 — that is, 1933 — sorry, 1923. The college is (повно) children. It is (правда), they are more polite than in my time; (декілька) students called me "sir" and one of them asked if he could help me (перейти) the street.

(After "How to Guess your Age" by C. Ford)

 

Ex 20   Speak on the following topics. Use the words and phrases given below.

 

1. Waiting for Ingrid

arrange to meet sb; think sb is the right kind of girl; get fond of sb; hope to see sb; wait for several hours; be unhappy (angry); wonder what had happened; have no hope; think that there's sth strange about it; decide to go home.

 

 

2. On the Way Home

 

be a long way from home; catch a bus; get off at the corner; cross the road; catch the smell of fish and chips; call at a shop; buy a fish and four penn'orth of chips; eat sth out of the paper; there's no better way of eating fish and chips than .... ; last; throw away the paper bag.

 

3. At Home

 

come home (get in) at...; find everybody in (at home); watch TV; want a drink of sth; make cocoa; go into the kitchen; bring the cocoa back into the living room; sit quietly on the sofa; light (smoke) a ciga­rette; think about sb; not want to discuss sth; not tell the truth; throw the cig-end into the fire; be tired; have a busy day; say good night; go upstairs.

 

4. Getting the Letter

 

on one's way to...; call sb's name; have a letter for sb; a personal letter; tell sb how and where he'd found the letter; behind the front door; see one's name on the envelope; get a pleasant surprise; begin to get excited; shut the door behind oneself; open the letter; a wonderful letter; be full of excitement; be really happy; learn what had really happened.                        

 

5. Ingrid Decides to Write a Letter

 

cousin; come for a short stay;' change one's plans; decide to catch a later train; go to the station to see sb off; not know how to tell sb about the change in one's arrangements; decide to write a letter; on one's way home from the station; push the letter under the front door; hope to see sb; exactly the same place.

 

Ex 21 Test translation.

 

1. Я недостатньо добре його знаю, щоб сказати тобі, що він за людина. Я зустрічався з ним лише декілька разів. 2. Ви ще встигнете на потяг о сьомій годині, якщо поїдете на таксі. Правда, у цей час дня важко піймати таксі. 3. Тут немає моста на той бік. Єдиний спосіб перебратися через річку - на човні. 4. Ви не так написали адресу. Англійці пишуть адресу таким чином: спочатку вони вказують прізвище, потім номер будинку і вулицю, а потім уже назва міста і країни. 5. Мені дуже сподобалося, як він вчора виступив на зборах. Він говорив мало, але сказав багато. 6. Хоча зворотний шлях тривав майже тиждень, час спливав дуже швидко. 7. Він дуже змінився з часу нашої останньої зустрічі. Щось трапилось? 8. — Як ми поїдемо? На автобусі чи на таксі? — Мені все однаково. 9. Не хвилюйтеся! Я впевнений, що все буде добре. 10. Коли він дізнався про цю новину, він страшенно розхвилювався. Він дістав цигарку і запалив. 11. Коли дитина заснула, мати вийшла з кімнати і зачинила за собою двері. 12. — Ти хочеш їсти? — Ні, дякую, я нічого не хочу, тільки чашечку кави, якщо можна.13. Не штовхайтеся, будь ласка. На цій зупинці всі виходять. 14. Ми сподіваємося, що ви зайдете до нас, як тільки повернетеся з подорожі. 15. — Ви не знаєте, що сьогодні показують в кінотеатрі «Росія»? — «Війна і мир». Фільм іде з понеділка. 16. Ти прийдеш завтра проводжати його? Він від’їжджає до Володивостока. Ми всі домовилися зустрітися на вокзалі. 17. Вчора була чудова погода. Ми весь день були на свіжому повітрі.

 

GRAMMAR

 

The Present Perfect Tense

 

Ex 22 Study the following chart.

 

He has travelled a lot. He has never been to Leningrad. He has always wanted to have a car. We have already done our work. They have just finished the text. I haven't seen him this week (lately, for the last few days, etc). I've known him since 1947 (I was a child ;I came here, etc).

 

Ex 23  Complete the following situations according to the model (bear in mind the chart above).

 

Model:    It's cold in the room (the window, be open, for a long time).

The window has been open for a long time.

 

1. It's warm (the weather, be fine, all week). 2. Peter is absent (he, be ill, for a week). 3. She can't show you the way there (never, be there). 4. He may go to the cinema (he, do one's work). 5. I can't say anything about this film (not see it, yet). 6. We may go for a walk (the rain, stop). 7. She knows English well (live in England, for three years). 8. Don't describe the place to me (I, be there, several times). 9. I know him very well (be friends since childhood). 10. You look wonderful (I, just, come back, after, a good rest). 11. It's getting colder every day (winter, come).

 

Ex 24 Answer the following questions, using the Present Perfect Tense.

 

1. Why can't you give the book back? (not finish, yet). 2. Why can't you repeat the question? (not hear). 3. Are they leaving? (not change their plans). 4. What's the matter with you? I think ... (catch cold). 5. Why is it so quiet in the house? (everybody, leave). 6. Where will you go in summer? (not decide, yet). 7. How long has this film been on? (for about a week). 8. Have you ever been late for classes? (never). 9. How are they? I don't know (not see them lately). 10. Where is yesterday's newspaper? (just, throw out). 11. How long have you lived in Moscow? (since, be born). 12. How much time has passed since he left? (a fort­night). 13. How many times have you been to Leningrad?

 

Ex 25 Give two answers to the following questions according to the model.

 

Model:          How long have you lived here?

(a) I've lived in Kyiv for three years.

(b)I've lived in Kyiv since 19...

 

1. How long have they known each other? 2. Howl long have you had this coat? 3. How long has this film been on? 4. How long has he been out? 5. How long have you been a student? 6. How long has she been absent from classes? 7. How long have you been here? 8. How long have the children been with their aunt?

 

Ex 26 Give answers to the following questions according to the model.

 

Model 1: Have you ever been to Tashkent?

No, I've never (not) been there.

 

1. Has he ever told you the story of his life? 2. Have you ever trans­lated anything from English into Russian? 3. Has it ever been so warm in April before? 4. Have you ever read anything by John Updike? 5. Have you ever been to the Far East? 6. Has he ever shown his picture to any­body? 7. Have they ever spoken to you about their plans for the future? 8. Have they ever studied this problem?

 

Model 2:   Have you finished the book yet?

No, I haven't finished it yet.

I am still reading it.      

 

1. Have you translated the article yet? 2. Have they finished dis­cussing the problem? 3. Have you decided who will make a report on the international situation? 4. Has she had her lunch yet? 5. Have they finished working at their course papers? 6. Has he woken up? (to sleep). 7. Has she made breakfast?

 

Ex 27 Express (a) agreement, (b) disagreement and complete the situation, if nec­essary, according to the model.

 

Model: 1. He has done all his home-work.

(a) (Yes,) he has. (b) But he hasn't. He has done only one exercise.

2. Jack hasn't bought the text-book.

(a) (No,) he hasn't. He can't get it. (b) But he has. Here it is.

 

1. You have never been to this theatre before. 2. He has answered all the questions. 3. They have called on him several times. 4. You've caught a cold. 5. The film has been on at our local cinema the whole week. 6. You've made three mistakes in your dictation.

 

Ex 28 Practise the following according to the model.

 

Model: You may leave the child with her. She is fond of children.

She always has been.*

 

1. I don't like their parties. They are dull. 2. It's difficult to ask him for anything. He is a hard man. 3. Let's buy flowers for her. She is fond of flowers. 4. He is an unpleasant person. He is too sure of him­self. 5. I can't say anything bad about her. She is a nice girl. 6. It's a beautiful place but it is rainy.

 

Ex 29 Make up suitable sentences, using the Present Perfect Tense.

 

1. The wind	see	at the Moscow Art
		Theatre since I was a boy.
2. I	just stop	it will happen one day.
3. The Blue Bird	not answer	from North to East.
4. You	always be kind	everything for your trip.
5. The rain	be on	to you about this new arrange­ment?
6. They	change	him lately.
7. My aunt	always say	to me.
8. The secretary	arrange	my question yet.
9. Nobody	ever speak	her this week?
10. Who	call on

 

Ex 30 Translate the following sentences, using the Present Perfect Tense.

 

1. — Ви бували коли-небудь в Карелії? — Ні, але я дуже багато чув про неї і збираюся як-небудь влітку поїхати туди. 2. Чому ви нічого не зробили, щоб організувати поїздку в ці історичні місця? 3. Ми умовились зустрітися на станції, тобі це зручно? 4. Я заходив до нього на цьому тижні. Він почуває себе значно краще. 5. Мені подобається, як він розставив книжки на полиці. 6. Що з ним трапилось? Я давно його не бачу. 7. Я впевнений, він застудився. Погода так швидко змінилася. Відразу стало холодно. 8. Йому дуже подобається книга, яку ви йому дали. Йому завжди подобалися такі книги. 9. Ми ще не вирішили, хто з нас піде на конференцію. 10. Цей фільм іде з понеділка. 11. Я вже заплатив вам за квитки. 12. Я тут нова людина. Я тут всього кілька днів. 13. Вона тільки що подзвонила йому. Він прийде пізніше. 14. Я бачу, що ти мені не розповів всієї правди. 15. Його лекція дуже цікава. Його лекції були завжди цікавими.

 

Ех 31  Make up sentences with the following groups of words, using either the Past Indefinite or the Present Perfect, supply the missing words.

 

1. the boy; catch cold; no doubt.
2. Shakespeare; many comedies; tragedies.
3. last night; wonderful ballet; "Swan Lake"; the Bolshoi Theatre.
4. the writer; not yet; finish; new book he's writing.
5. during; war; her family; two years; in Siberia.
6. for the last few weeks; thousands; people; visit; the Tretyakov Gal­lery.
7. last summer; holiday; the Crimea.
8. I am hungry; because; not yet; lunch.
9. this story; happen; many years ago.

 

The Past Perfect Tense

 

Ex 32   Study the following chart.*

 

By three o'clock yesterday he had arranged everything for the trip. He said that they had left Moscow a week before. She told me that she had known him since 1962. When we arrived at the stadium, the match had already started. As soon as (when, after) they had finished breakfast the children ran out to play. He did not want to go to the cinema because he had seen the film on TV.

 

Ex 33  Complete the following sentences, using the Past Perfect Tense (see the chart above).

 

(A) 1. He told her that he (buy a TV set the year before). 2. The man at the station said that the train (leave already). 3. Mary told me that she (not get a letter from her son yet). She said that she (not hear from him for some weeks). 4. He understood that he (get off at the wrong sta­tion). 5. He said that his parents (always live in the country). 6. I didn't know that she (change her address). 7. He didn't remember how it all (happen). 8. We were sure that she (tell the truth). 9. I saw that the child (catch a cold). 10. She hoped that I (pay for the tickets already). 11. When he woke up next morning and looked out of the window he understood that it (rain heavily during the night).

 

(B) 1. When we came back, the telegram (arrive already). 2. When I got to the station the train (already leave). 3. The rain (already stop) when we started. 4. When I finished school my elder sister (be a teacher for two years). 5. We (make all the arrangements already) when we learned that he wouldn't come.

 

(C) 1. I knew her immediately because my brother (describe her to me very well). 2. The militiaman stopped her because she (cross the street in the wrong place). 3. I was not hungry because I (have lunch just an hour before). 4. Nobody knew when he came in because he (enter the house through the back door). 5. I thought he knew English well because he (live in England for some years). 6. It happened to him because he (always be too sure of himself).

 

(D) 1. As soon as they (take a decision) they could discuss less impor­tant questions. 2. After we (make a fire) it became warm. 3. When I (throw out all the old newspapers and magazines) I could arrange my new books nicely on the shelf. 4. After he (pay the money for the plane tickets) he had very little left in his pockets. 5. I met her soon after I (learn the news). 6. When he (finish his work) he went to bed.     

 

Ex 34 Practise the following according to the model.

 

Model: Mary told us a story she had never (not) told us before.

 

1. When I was at the Tretyakov Picture Gallery last, I saw some pictures there I —. 2. At their dinner party we met some people we —. 3. I went for a walk and decided to take the road I —. 4. He taught me Judo, in a way nobody —. 5. He showed us the pictures he —. 6. She spoke of something she —. 7. The lecture was very inter­esting, we heard something we —. 8. The dinner was quite unusual, I ate something —.

 

Ex 35 Translate the following sentences, using the correct tense form.

 

(A) 1. Вони сказали, що приїхали сюди потягом. 2. Всі знали, що вони товаришують з дитинства. 3. Ми сказали їм, що ще не владнали цю справу. 4. По радіо оголосили, що потяг із Сочі вже прибув. 5. Він писав, що погода там похмура з першого вересня. 6. Сусід по купе сказав, що ми вже проїхали міст. 7. Коли потяг рушив, я зрозумів, що сіл не на той потяг. 8. Лікар сказав, що дитина застудилася.

 

(B) 1. Коли я знайшов їх будинок, вже стемніло. 2. Коли вона прийшла на збори, ми вже обговорили перше питання. 3. Коли лікар прийшов, вони вже відвезли дитину до лікарні. 4. Коли я повернулася з театру, гості вже розійшлися (пішли). 5. Коли вона приїхала в село, ми мешкали там уже тиждень. 6. Коли я повернувся до купе, я зрозумів, що мій сусід вже зійшов.

 

(C) 1. в кімнаті було холодно, тому що всю ніч було відкрите вікно. 2. Він був занепокоєний тому, що одержав телеграму з дому. 3. Вона одержала погану оцінку на іспиті тому, що зробила дуже багато помилок. 4. Він не хотів обідати у нас тому, що вже поїв в інституті. 5. Йому не вистачило грошей до кінця місяця, тому що він купив велосипед.                

 

The Future Perfect Tense

 

Ex 36 Study the following chart.

 

They will have done their work by 7 o'clock. By this time tomorrow he will have crossed the channel andwill be in England. In 1990 he will have lived in Moscow for twenty years. By the time you come back, he'll have been here for two hours.

 

Ex 37 Complete the following sentences, using the Future Perfect Tense.

 

1. By the time he arrives they — (leave). 2. She is ill now. By the first of April she — (be in hospital for three weeks). 3. He has bought this TV set on credit. He — (pay all the money by the 21st of August). 4. How long has she stayed with your family? By the end of the month she —. 5. She has lived here a long time. By 1990 she —. 6. He is still a school boy, but by this time next year he — (leave school).

 

Ex 38 Translate the following sentences, using the Future Perfect Tense.

 

1. Я сподіваюся, що до кінця зборів ми владнаємо це питання. 2. В наступному році на цей час він проробить на нашому заводі тринадцять років. 3. На той час, коли він приїде, я буду жити на півдні вже два тижні. 4. На той час, коли ти приїдеш додому, ти забудеш все, що я говорив тобі. 5. До 1 Травня вони вже переїдуть у нову квартиру. 6. Вони закінчать будівництво школи до початку навчального року.    

 

Ех 39 Open the brackets, using the correct tense form. Explain the use of the tenses.

 

Mr Sherlock Holmes (sit) one morning at the breakfast table in his room in Baker Street. His friend Dr* Watson (stand) near the window, examining a walking stick which a visitor (forget) the day before. "To Dr Mortimer, from his friend," was engraved upon it, with the date "1884". Sherlock Holmes suddenly (turn) to Watson and (say): "The owner of this stick (have) a dog which (be) larger than a terrier and smal­ler than a mastiff."

"How you (know)?" (ask) Watson in surprise.

"I (examine) that stick carefully and (notice) the marks of a dog's teeth on it," (answer) Holmes. "They (be) too broad for a terrier and not broad enough for a mastiff. Probably the dog often (carry) the stick behind its master. I think it must be a spaniel, in fact it (be) a spaniel."

Holmes (leave) the breakfast-table and (stand) near the window as he (say) this. Watson (look) at him in surprise and (ask): "How can you be so sure of that?"

"For the simple reason that I (see) the dog at our door and I (hear) the bell which its master (ring). I wonder why Dr Mortimer (want) to see Mr Sherlock Holmes. Well, we soon (know). Come in," he (add), there (be) a knock at the door.

(After "The Hound of the Baskervilles" by A. Conan Doyle)

 

Reported Speech. Sequence of Tenses (contd)

 

Ex 40  Study the following chart, compare the use of the tense forms in direct and reported speech.*

 

Direct Speech	Reported Speech
1. Mary said: "I've caught a cold."   2. "Have you seen him since he moved to Kiev?" Mary asked. 3. "Peter saw the film yesterday," Mary said to me. 4. "He lived in Leningrad from 1960 till 1965," she said.** 5. The dean asked them: "Will you have returned by the begin­ning of term?"	1. Mary said that she had caught a cold. 2. Mary asked if I had seen him since he moved to Kiev. 3. Mary told me that Peter had seen the film the day before. 4. She said that he lived in Leningrad from 1960 till 1965. 5. The dean asked them if they would have returned by the beginning of term.

 

Ex 41 Use Reported Speech.

 

1. "Have you travelled abroad much?" he asked. 2. "Who has writ­ten this note?" he asked the secretary. 3. "I've just received a post-card from Mother," my brother said to me. 4. "The students also took part in arranging the conference," the chairman said. 5. "Have you been here long?" the stranger asked me. 6. "Did you really see this happen with your own eyes?" the militiaman asked the boy. 7. "I hope they will have taken a decision by the end of the meeting," she remarked. 8. "Did you watch the detective film on TV yesterday?" he asked her. 9. "This story happened long ago," he said, "and few people remember anything about it." 10. "I haven't read so interesting a book since I don't re­member when," she said.

 

Ex 42  Rewrite (or retell) in narrative form the passage from the text from ‘Where have you been? ...’ up to ‘... But they are pictures just the same, aren't they?’.

 

The Article

 

with the nouns "school", "town", "table", "bed", "hospital", "train"

 

Ex 43 Study the chart.

 

Kislovodsk is a town in the Caucasus. The town is a well-known resort. They stayed in town last summer. If you go to town bring me today's newspapers.

 

Ex 44 Fill in the blanks with the words given in brackets with an appropriate article (where necessary).         

 

1. (і) At lunch-time you can always find him at — in the corner. (ii) I told the waiter I wanted — all -to myself. (iii) There were three of us at — that night. (table). 2. (і) — is too small for the child. (ii) I went upstairs; there was — ready for me. (iii) On Sundays, after the show, the actress seldom went to — before midnight and usually had her breakfast in — on Monday mornings, (bed). 3. (і) — for Saratov leaves in a quarter of an hour. (ii) If you don't catch this train, there is — at 5:27. (iii) Will you go to Odessa by — or plane? (train). 4. (і) Cambridge is 70 miles away from London, — is on the river Cam. (ii) I saw him in — not a week ago. (iii) His family has moved to — somewhere in the South. (town). 5. (і) After lunch the doctor was off to — again. (ii) There used to be — in this building once, now it is a museum of the History of Medicine, (iii) How long have you been in —? (hospital). 6. (і) — has a good football ground, (ii) Next year he'll be old enough to go to —. (iii) We used to learn such things at —. (school).

 

Ex 45 Translate into English.

 

1. — Він вже піднявся? — Ні, ще у ліжку. 2. Іди спати! 3. Лікар підійшов до ліжка, що біля дверей. 4. Він хворий уже з місяць: він у лікарні, хіба ти не знав? 5. Автобус 57 довезе вас до лікарні. 6. Ваші діти вчаться? 7. Цієї осені у них на селі відкриється нова школа. 8. У школі чудова бібліотека. 9. Коли відходить потяг? 10. Чи є будь-який потяг до міста близько сьомої? 11. — Як туди дістатися? — Потягом чи автобусом. 12. В цьому році місту виповнюється 800 років. 13. Ми все минуле літо провели у місті. 14. Ми звичайно обідаємо вп’ятьох. 15. Підсунь стіл до вікна, там значно світліше.

 

READING

 

Ex 46 Read the text, and do the assignments coming after it.

 

Television now plays such an important role in so many people's lives that it is essential for us to try to decide whether it is good or bad.

In the first place, television is not only a convenient source of en­tertainment, but also a comparatively cheap one. For a family of four, for example, it is more convenient as well as cheaper to sit comfortably at home than to go out. There is no transport to arrange. They do not have to find a baby-sitter. They do not have to pay for expensive seats at the theatre, the cinema, the opera or the ballet. All they have to do is turn a knob, and they can see plays, films, operas of every kind, not to mention political discussions and the latest exciting football match. Some people, however, say that this is just where the danger lies. The television viewer need do nothing. He does not even use his legs. He takes no initiative. He makes no choice. He is completely passive and has everything presented to him.

Television, people often say, informs one about current events, the latest developments in science and politics, and presents an endless series of programmes which are both instructive and stimulating. The most faraway countries and the strangest customs are brought into one's living-room. People can say that the radio does this just as well; but on television- everything is much more living, much more real. Yet here again there is a danger. We get to like watching TV so much that it begins to dominate our lives. A friend of mine told me the other day that his television set had broken down and that he and his family had sud­denly found that they had much more time to do things, and that they could really talk to each other again. It makes one think, doesn't it?

There are many arguments for and against television. The poor quality of its programmes is often criticized. I think we must under­stand that television in itself is neither good nor bad. Television is as good or as bad as we make it.

(After "A New Way to Proficiency in English" by John Lennox Cook, Amorey Gethin, Keith Mitchell)

 

Assignments

 

(a) Say what the text is about in (i) one word; (ii) an extended sentence.

 

(b) This text can be described as (i) factual; (ii) humorous; (iii) documentary; (iiii) critical. Give your reasons.

 

(c) Quickly look through the list and mark the lettered phrase nearest in meaning to the word or phrase tested.

 

1. Essential: (i) absolutely necessary; (it) very interesting; (iii) most exciting.

2. Convenient: (i) safe; (ii) comfortable; (ii) wonderful.

3. Entertainment: (i) an exciting show, play, etc; (ii) a dull lecture; (iii) work to do.

4. Cheap: (i) low in price; (ii) high in price; (iii) free.

5. Expensive: (i) low in price; (ii) high in price; (iii) free.

6. Danger: (i) safety; (ii) excitement; (iii) risk.

7. The other day: (i) the day before yesterday; (ii) a few days ago; (iii) last night.

 

(d) Choose the answer that expresses most accurately what is stated in the passage. Only one answer is correct.

 

1. It is essential for us to try to decide whether television is good or bad because: (i) it dominates many people's lives; (ii) lots of people watch TV the whole time; (iii) TV plays an important part in the lives of many people.                       

2. TV is a convenient source of entertainment because: (i) there is no need to arrange for tickets, or transport; (ii) you can watch plays, shows, etc, staying at home and enjoying the comfortof your living-room; (iii) the children are with you and there is no need to find a baby­sitter.

3. TV is a comparatively cheap source of entertainment because: (i) you can watch TV for nothing; (ii) you pay the price of a TV set and can watch any programme you like; (iii) watching TV at home is cheaper than going to the theatre, cinema, etc.

4. The idea behind the sentence "Television is not only a convenient source of entertainment, but also a comparatively cheap one" is that: (i) TV, though convenient, is rather expensive; (ii) TV is much cheaper than other kinds of entertainment (theatre, cinema, etc) but not as con­venient; (iii) TV is favourable to your comfort and at the same time not so expensive as other sources of entertainment.

5. "TV is as good or as bad as we make it" means that: (i) TV is good if it is put to good uses; (ii) TV is bad if it is put to bad uses; (iii) TV may be used for both good and bad purposes.

 

(e) List all the arguments for television.

 

(f) List all the arguments against television.

 

(g) Sum up what the text has to say on each of the following points.

 

1. The dangers of television. 2. TV as a source of information, in­struction and entertainment, and how it fulfils each of these roles.

 

(h) State briefly what, according to the text, explains the growing popularity of TV, and express your own opinion on the subject.

 

(i) Describe briefly a TV programme you especially enjoy watching, and explain why you like it better than the others.

 

Ex 47  Read the passage carefully, without a dictionary. While reading, pay spe­cial attention to international words. Compare their meaning with the Russian words of the same root. Make a list of facts about the TV Tower in Ostankino (in note form*).

 

In 1967 a new Moscow "sight" rose in Ostankino, the concrete TV Tower, one of the world's tallest structures, 539 metres high, and 50 metres in diameter at the base. At the 337 level there is an observation platform to which visitors are taken by fast lifts (travelling at eight metres a second). The platform is also the foyer for the Seventh Heaven Restaurant at the levels between 328 and 334 metres. The restaurant has three dining halls. Their floors slowly rotate one full revolution in 40 minutes or so, so that the diner sees a panorama of Moscow during the meal. The view from both observation tower and restaurant on a clear evening is wonderful.

Near the TV tower is the Television Centre, with studios, a concert hall, and offices. Its programmes, sent out from the tower, cover a ra­dius of 120 kilometres without need for relay stations. The TV Centre is linked through Intervision and Eurovision with all countries in Eu­rope, and through communication satellites with almost all points on the Earth's surface.

Central Television broadcasts on four channels.

 

SPEECH AND COMPOSITION

 

Ex 48  Answer the following questions, using the vocabulary of the lesson. Sum up your answers (orally, or in writing).

 

 

 

 

THE BEST TIME TO MAKE A CALL

 

1. What is the best time of the week (day) to call on a friend? 2. Do you like making calls after you've had a busy day at the Institute (of­fice)? Does it make any difference, is it all the same to you? 3. When did you see your friend last? 4. What is the best way to let your friend know that you're coming if he has no telephone? 5. Are all these ar­rangements necessary if he has a telephone? 6. How long do you usually stay if it's a friendly visit (a business call)?

 

SPEAKING ABOUT COLDS

 

1. When do people catch colds more often: in good or bad weather (on cold and windy, or warm and sunny days)? 2. When did you have a cold last? 3. How long did it last? 4. Must you stay in bed when you have a cold? 5. Do you call a doctor, or do you go to see him? 6. Does your local doctor call on other patients on his way to see you? 7. Does he go about town in a car, or does he walk from house to house? 8. Do you pay the doctor for his visits?

 

LEAVING TOWN FOR A HOLIDAY

 

1. Are you usually excited when going on a holiday? 2. When are you leaving? 3. What day have you decided on? 4. Have you already booked the tickets? 5. Did you go to the station to book the tickets or did you reserve them by telephone? 6. How long will it take you to get your things ready? 7. What arrangements must you make before going away? 8. Will you arrange with somebody to see you off? 9. Do you usually travel light, or do you have a lot of luggage? 10. When will a person say: "I hope you have a nice journey"?

 

Ex 49  Read the passage, answer the questions, and retell (or write up) the pas­sage in English.

 

ЛЮБОВ ... ЛЮБОВ?

 

Таку назву має книга англійського письменника Стіна Барстоу. Це книга про юнака і дівчину, що зустрілись і сподобались одне одному. Через якийсь час він зрозумів, що це помилка, що це не любов, але було вже пізно. Вони одружилися і стали жити в будинку її матері. Їх подружнє життя було нещасливе. Однак молоді люди вирішили почати все спочатку, виїхати з будинку батьків дружини, але це вже кінець книги.

В книзі Стіна Барстоу описується звичайне, повсякденне життя. Прізвище героя, Браун, одне із самих розповсюджених в Англії. Нічого немає романтичного й у тім, як познайомилися Вік Браун і Інгрід (вони працюють на одному заводі). Він забув вдома гроші і просить її купити йому квиток в автобусі.

Книга обговорює проблеми, що важливі і цікаві для молоді будь-якої країни, допомагає їм краще зрозуміти себе й інших.

 

Questions

 

1. What is the name of the book? 2. Who wrote the book? 3. What is the book about? 4. What did the young man understand after some time? Was it real love or a mistake? 5. Where did the young people live after getting married? 6, Was their family life happy? 7. What did t he young people decide to do? 8. How does the book end? 9. What kind of life does the author describe in the book? 10. Why did the author call his hero Brown? 11. Are there many people of the same name in Eng­land? 12. Was there anything romantic about the way Vie met In-grid? 13. Where did they both work? 14. What problems does the book discuss? 15. Why is the book both important and interesting for young people in any country? 16. In what way can the book help young people?

 

Ex 50 Act as interpreter. Sum up the dialogue.

 

Q: What role does TV play in the life of the Soviet people?

А: На це питання важко відповісти одним реченням. Телебачення можна порівняти з далекими дорогами, що відкривають для людини весь час щось нове.

Q: How many channels broadcast TV programmes?

А: Центральне телебачення передає програми по чотирьох каналах.         

Q: What programmes' does the first channel cover?

А: Новини і поточні події, концерти і фільми. А що вас більше за все цікавить?

Q: "The World of Animals" and "Cinema Travel Club".

А: Програми «У світі тварин» і «Клуб мандрівників» люблять і діти і дорослі.

Q: What is your favourite evening programme?

А: По-перше, це програма «Час». Вона починається о 9 годині вечора за московським часом. Крім цього я із задоволенням дивлюсь передачі про мистецтво.

Q: TV can be an excellent source of knowledge. Are there any special programmes for schools and universities?

А: Так, звичайно. Ці програми звичайно передаються по четвертому каналу.

Q: To sum up what has been said here I should say that there are dif­ferent Soviet TV programmes with something of interest for every viewer.

 

Ex 51 Use the following words and expressions in situations of your own.

 

1. The Doctor Calls

 

a beautiful morning; wear light clothes; change (of the weather); start raining; the whole day; get wet; catch (a) cold; get worse; stay in bed; call a doctor; ask what's the matter; describe the symptoms; the best way to get well is ...; last (of the cold).

 

2. Asking the Way

 

go on a business trip; last (of the journey); arrive in a strange city; stay (stop) at a hotel; decide to take a walk all by oneself; cross the street; catch a bus; get late; take the wrong bus home; get off at the wrong stop; find oneself in a strange place; meet a stranger; ask the way; find out; be a long way from one's hotel; walk all the way back; take a decision.

 

3. Seeing a Friend Off

 

help sb with the arrangements for a holiday; get ready for the trip; be (get) excited; have a busy time; call at sb's place; a short (long) way from ...; call a taxi; throw the bags into the car; travel across the city; arrive at the station just in time; catch a train; a fast train; say good­bye to sb; start on one's Journey.

 

4. Traffic Rules Are For You Too

 

get off a bus; heavy traffic; crowds of people; be late for the theatre; cross the street in the wrong place; catch sb; explain the traffic rules to sb; hope that sb will not do it again (repeat the same old mistake).

 

5. Happy Birthday to You

 

arrange a birthday party; send letters (invitations); get every­thing ready for the party; make coffee (tea, etc); have enough food and drinks; be excited; wait for one's guests; wear a new suit (dress, etc); put on all the lights; arrange the flowers; have a really wonderful time; do some dancing (singing); drink (to) sb's health; wish sb many happy returns of the day; last till midnight (of the party).

 

Ex 52 Discuss the following, giving arguments for or against.

 

1. It's about nine o'clock and two friends are just leaving the cin­ema (theatre). They discuss the film (play). One of the friends liked it, the other didn't.

2. Your friend says that watching TV is bad for people. For one thing, people were much healthier when there was no TV, for another, they used to meet their friends more often. You say that a person can learn a lot if he watches TV regularly.

3. You are discussing the "generation gap" with your friends. You see the reason for it in the different interests and aims of the younger and older generations. Your friends disagree with you, saying that the reason lies in the different understanding of one's rights and duties.

4. A TV language programme, no matter how good, is of little use in learning a foreign language.

 

Ex 53 Subjects for oral and written composition.

 

1. Describe an evening in the Brown family.
2. Describe an evening in your own home.
3. Give a brief talk on a TV programme the whole family enjoys watching in the evening.
4. Describe a busy railway station a few minutes before a holiday train leaves.
5. Someone stops you in the street and asks the way to the railway station. Tell him the shortest way, using such landmarks, as a monu­ment, a new school building, a metro station, an intersection, a cinema.
6. Write down a telephone conversation between yourself and a friend in which you make an arrangement to go to the cinema and to have tea at your friend's flat afterwards.
7. Tell a story to illustrate the proverb "All's well that ends well".
8. Complete the following letter:

 

Dear Nick (Tanya),

I was surprised to get your letter this morning, saying that you wait­ed for me the other evening. I am, of course, very sorry that you did so. I sent a telegram in the morning to say that I wasn't coming.

The matter is that ....

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

LESSON FIVE

 

Text: "To Kill a Man" by Jack London¹.

Grammar: Complex Object

Adverbial Clauses of Time.

 

TO KILL A MAN

 

She moved through the big rooms and wide halls of her house. She was looking for a book of poems she had put somewhere and only now remembered. She opened the door of the dining-room and went in. The room was dark and she turned on the lights. As the light came on, she stepped back and cried out.

In front of her, near the wall, stood a man. In his hand was a gun.

"Oh," she said. "What do you want?"

"I think I want to get out. I've lost my way here," he answered iron­ically.

"What are you doing here?"

"Just robbing, Miss, that's all. I didn't expect to find you in, as I saw you with your old man in an auto.² You are Miss Setliffe, aren't you?"

Mrs Setliffe saw his mistake, but she was pleased.

"Now please show me the way out," the man said.

"And what if³ I cry out for help?" asked the woman.

"I must-kill you then," he answered slowly. "You see, Miss, I can't go to prison. A friend is waiting for me outside, and I promised to help him."

"I've never met a robber before," the woman said, "and I can't tell you how exciting it is. Won't you stay a few minutes and talk? I want you to explain the whole thing to me. You don't look like a rob­ber at all. Why don't you work?"

"I did my best, but there's no work for me in this city," he said bit­terly. "I used to be an honest man before I started looking for a job. And now I must go."

But Mrs Setliffe did not want to lose her robber. Such things did not happen often in her life.

Turning to the man she said: "I can't really make you stay, but, come, sit down, and tell me all about it — here at the table."

She took her seat at the table and placed him on the other side of it.

She saw him look about the room, then put the gun on the corner of the table between them. But he was in a strange house and did not know that under the table, near her foot, was an electric bell.

"It's like this, Miss," he began. "I'm not a robber and I didn't come here to steal. You see, I had a little mine once, and old Setliffe took it away from me. I had nothing left. And as my friend needs money badly I just came to take something back from your father. I am really taking what is mine."

"I feel you're right," she said. "But still robbery is robbery."

"I know that," he answered. "What is right is not always legal. That's why I must go."

"No, wait." The woman suddenly took up the gun. At the same time she pushed the bell with her foot.

A door opened behind him, and the man heard somebody enter the room. But he did not even turn his head. Without saying a word, he was looking at the woman, into her hard cold eyes.

"Thomas," she said, "call the police."

The servant left the room. The man and the woman sat at the table, looking into each other's eyes. She enjoyed this moment. She already saw the newspapers with the story of the beautiful young Mrs Setliffe who had caught a dangerous robber in her own house.

"When you are in prison," she said coldly, "think of the lesson I've taught you. Now, tell the truth. I didn't believe a single word of your story. You lied to me."

He did not answer.

"Say something," she cried. "Why don't you ask me to let you go?"

"Yes, I'll say something. You looked so kind and soft and all the time you had your foot on the bell. Do you know what I'm going to do? I'm going to get up from this chair and walk out of that door. But you're not going to shoot. It isn't easy to kill a man and I'm sure you can't do it."

With his eyes on her he stood up slowly. She began to pull the trig­ger.

"Pull harder," he advised. "Pull it, and kill a man."

At the door the man turned round. He spoke to her in a low voice as he called her a bad name.

(Adapted)

 

NOTES

 

1. Jack London (John Griffith) (1876-1916) was born in San Fran­cisco in a very poor family. He had worked at factories; he had travelled across the ocean as a sailor; he had walked from San Francisco to New York with an army of jobless workers. After reading the "Communist Manifesto", Jack London becamean enthusiastic believer in socialism. During the sixteen years of his literary career, he published about fifty books; short stories, novels, essays. One of his best works is "Martin Eden" (1909).  

2. auto: automobile                                    

3. What if...?: А что, если...?

 

VOCABULARY

 

lose vt (lost) 1. губити, загубити (also fig) lose a book (ticket, friend, etc); one's voice (head); money (work, time, etc) Phr lose one's way (= get lost) заблукати, загубитися; 2. програвати lose a game (a competition, war, etc)

expect vt очікувати, чекати; розраховуватися, сподівати expect a vis­itor (letter, question, rain, etc) I didn't expect to see you today. We expect you to help us. expectation n

be (dis)pleased бути (не)задоволеним They were pleased with his answer. We are pleased to meet you.

promise vt обіцяти promise sb (one's) help (a book, a ticket, etc); He promised to come soon; promise n Phr give (make) a (one's) promise давати обіцянку; keep one's promise виконати обіцянку; break one's promise порушити обіцянку; promising а перспективний a promis­ing student (writer, singer, etc)

look vi 1. виглядати, здаватися How did he look when you saw him? He looked happy (pleased, sad, ill, well, older, worn out, tired, etc). Phr look like виглядати (про зовнішність) What does she look like? Як вона виглядає? (Яка у неї зовнішність?) She is tall, very good-looking; 2. бути схожим на на когось look like (= be like) sb He looks like his father. He looks like a doctor.

honest а чесний an honest man (face, smile, decision, answer, etc) Phr be honest with sb бути відвертим (чесним) з кимось dishonest a нечесний, безчесний; (dis)honesty n

make vt (made) примушувати, спонукати make sb do sth; make sb work (read, speak, think, laugh, cry, etc); make sb angry розсердити когось; make sb (un)happy зробити когось щасливим (нещасним) etc

need vt мати потребу (в комусь/чомусь) need a book (dress, pair of shoes, etc); need money (time, (sb's) help, (sb's) advice, etc); How much time do you need to do the work? need n необхідність, потреба. Phr be in need (of sth) потребувати.

badly adv сильно, дуже. Не is badly ill. We need your help badly.

feel vt (felt) 1. почувати, відчувати I felt somebody push me in the crowd. What did you feel when you first travelled by air? 2. вважати We felt that he was right; vi 3. почуватисяHow do you feel? I feel well (better, all right, bad, ill, etc); feeling n, почуття, відчуття Не spoke with feeling. I had a feeling that some­body was watching me.

even adv навіть Не didn't even look at me when I entered.

without prep1. без (когось, чогось; означає відсутність) It's dif­ficult to translate the article without a dictionary. We decided the question without him. Phr do without (sb/sth) обходитися без (когось/чогось) Не can't do without music; 2. не (означає характер дії) She left the room without saying a word.

enjoy vt отримувати задоволення; насолоджуватись enjoy a film (con­cert, book, trip, etc); I enjoy talking with him. Phr enjoy oneself приємно проводити час, розважатися. If you want to enjoy yourself, go and see the new comedy; enjoyment n насолода, задоволення.

own а власний (вживається з присвійними займенниками). My elder brother has a family of his own. He told the story in his own words.

danger n  небезпека  Phr in (out of) danger в (поза) небезпеці (небезпекою); danger­ous а небезпечний; ризикований a dangerous plan (game, road, river; dog; man; etc); dangerous work

believe vt 1. вірити believe a story (sb's words, etc); I believe him (what he says, etc); believe in sb/sth вірити в когось/щось; belief n віра; довіра; переконання I have great belief in his honesty (this doc­tor, this theory, etc). His beliefs are well-known; 2. вважати, думати I believe that he is right. We believe him to be a good musician.

soft a 1. м’який a soft pencil (apple, etc); 2. ніжний, тихий, м’який a soft voice (look, sound, light, colour, breeze, etc); soft music

pull vt тягнути She was pulling the child by the hand. Don't pull the door, push it. Phr pull oneself together взяти себе в руки.

advise vt радити If you don't feel well, I advise you to stay in bed; advice n порада (настанова). Не always gives me good advice. Phr a piece of advice  (одна) порада; take (sb's) advice послідувати (чиїйсь) пораді.

 

WORD COMBINATIONS

 

look for (sb/sth) шукати (когось/щось)

turn on the light(s) (water, gas) увімкнути світло (воду, газ)

turn off the light(s) (water, gas) вимкнути світло (воду, газ)

find sb in застати когось (вдома, на роботі)

you see бачити

at all зовсім (ні), взагалі

do one's best (з)робити все можливе

take a seat зайняти місце, сісти

It's like this Ось яка справа

teach sb a lesson провчити когось

in a low (loud, soft, etc) voice тихим (гучним, ніжним) голосом

 

 

EXERCISES

 

COMPREHENSION

 

Ex 1  Answer the following questions.

 

1. What was Mrs Setliffe doing at the moment when the story be­gins? 2. What made her step back and cry out when she entered the dining-room? 3. What was the man doing in the house? 4. Why was Mrs Setliffe-pleased when the man called her "Miss Setliffe"? 5. Why did Mrs Setliffe want the man to stay and talk to her? 6. How did the man explain why he had come to rob old Setliffe? 7. What made the woman believe that he wasn't a real robber? 8. What was she planning to do? 9. How did it happen that the man left the house and she didn't stop him? 10. Why was the man sure that she wouldn't shoot?

 

Ex 2  Look through the text once again, and:

 

1. Tell as much of the background story of (a) Mrs Setliffe, (b) the man who came to rob Mr Setliffe, as you possibly can.

2. Explain why the man had turned robber.

3. See if you can find facts proving that the "robber" was not only more honest than Mrs Setliffe, but that he was also the better person.

4. Explain why the author gave no name to the man who came to rob Mr Setliffe.

5. Pick out the episode which, in your opinion, is the culminating point of the story.

6. Say if the characters are described directly, through the author's description, or indirectly, through their actions, behaviour or speech.

7. Say if you expected this kind of ending to the story, or it was unexpected.

 

Ex 3  Find in the text the English for the following words and phrases, and use them in retelling and discussing the text.

 

книга віршів; увімкнути світло; відступити на крок; закричати; за­блукати; чесна людина; шукати роботу; покласти на кут стола; під столом; мати гостру необхідність у грошах; несподівано схопити зброю; натиснути на кнопку дзвінка ногою; повернути голову; не кажучи ні слова; викликати поліцію; дивитися в очі один одному; спіймати небезпечного злодія у власному будинку; у в’язниці; провчити когось; не вірити жодному слову; не зводячи очей із когось; натискати на спусковий гачок; повернутися; промовити тихим голосом.

 

KEY STRUCTURES AND WORD STUDY

 

Ex 4  Give the four forms of the following verbs.

 

put, step, cry, stand, lose, do, rob, show, tell, stay, know, steal, leave, feel, hear, teach, lie (казати неправду), let, shoot.

 

Ex 5  Make up live groups of three words associated in meaning or area of usage.

 

job	trigger	surname	machine	essay
gun	penname	business	novel	car
name	poem	auto	bullet	work

 

Ex 6  Replace the words in bold type by their opposites. Make all necessary changes. Translate the sentences.

 

l. The boy stepped forward. 2. Suddenly the lights went out. 3. She greeted us warmly. 4. As could be expected of him, he did his worst. 5. He said he could do without our help quite easily. 6. The stranger had walked in through the door. 7. The man pushed the armchair towards the window. 8. The expedition was in safety. 9. The girl lost her voice. 10. She finally put down her book. 11. The boys caught the bird. 12. He never tells the truth. 13. It was somebody else's decision. 14. She turned away from the window.

 

Ex 7  Compare the meanings of the words in bold type.

 

1. (і) She wants another pair of shoes, (ii) She needs another pair of shoes. 2. (і) We were all unhappy about the arrangement, (ii) We were all displeased with the arrangement. 3. (і) It's a dangerous job. (ii) It's a risky job. (iii) It's an unsafe job. 4. (і) I'm expecting a friend. (ii) I'm waiting for a friend. 5. (і) They found him out. (ii) They found out about him.

 

Ex 8   Recast the following sentences, using verbs instead of the nouns and phrases in bold type.

 

1. Go as far as the traffic lights, then take a turning to the right. 2. Now after your explanation the situation has become a little clearer. 3. He wants your help. 4. She gave me a look full of excitement. 5. He saw her coming and made a step back to let her pass. 6. You have such a happy look on your face. What is it? Another letter from home? 7. Don't make promises if you are not sure you can keep them. 8. In the over­crowded bus I felt somebody give me a push. 9. I saw that he was pleased with my honest answer. 10. My advice to you is to teach him a good les­son. 11. While walking along the river they heard a loud cry for help.

 

Ex 9  Translate the following sentences into English, using a different phrasal verb in each.

 

throw away, go away (2), give away, run away, move away, turn away, look away, put away

 

1. Пора вже викинути всі ці старі газети. 2. Дівчинка відвела очі і заплакала. 3. це правда, що він від’їжджає й тому роздав усі свої книги? 4. Що з ним відбувається? Він пішов не попрощавшись. 5. Фільм був страшенно нудним. Він відвернувся від екрана телевізора й запалив сигарету. 6. Я бачила, як вона перебирала теплі речі на зиму. 7. Хлопчаки натиснули на кнопку дзвінка і втекли. 8. Йому стало холод­но, й він відсунувся від вікна.

 

Ех 10  Paraphrase the, following sentences according to the model. Translate them into Ukrainian.

 

Model    He left the room and didn't say a word.

He left the room without saying a word.

1. My sister turned away and didn't answer my question. 2. They left very early. They didn't wake anybody up. 3. He didn't lose a min­ute. He sat down to work at once. 4. The fast train passed the smaller stations and didn't stop. 5. He asked question after question and didn't wait for an answer. 6. The man sat in front of the TV but didn't watch it. 7. She went into her room and sat down in (to) an armchair. She didn't turn on the lights. 8. When they moved to another place they didn't leave their new address. 9. He never makes a single mistake when he speaks English. 10. He did the job alone. He didn't turn to anybody for help or advice.

 

Ex 11  Paraphrase the following sentences according to the model.

 

Model: He listened to the concert with great pleasure.

             He enjoyed listening to the concert.

 

1. Muscovites are proud of their city and they like to show its places of interest to visitors. 2. It always gives him pleasure to talk with in­teresting people. 3. There is nothing my brother likes better than to read detective stories. 4. It gives me no pleasure to travel by air. 5. Her mother is always happy to have guests in her house. 6. They have bought a colour TV set and they rather like watching travel films.

 

Ex 12  Translate the following sentences, using 'not at all' or 'not quite' accord­ing to the sense.

 

1. Він не зовсім правий. 2. Він зовсім не правий. 3. Я не зовсім добре вас зрозумів. 4. Я зовсім вас не зрозумів. 5. Він зовсім не хвилювався під час іспитів. 6. Ми не зовсім упевнені, що він прийде. 7. Вони не зовсім задоволені його відповіддю. 8. Мені зовсім не потрібна їх допомога. 9. Він був з вами не зовсім відвертий. 10. Я зовсім не знаю, як змусити його розповісти нам всю правду. 11. Вони зовсім не хо­тіли, щоб він залишався  в них на літо. 12. Не бійтеся цієї собаки. Вона зовсім не є небезпечною. 13. Я не зовсім вірю його розповіді.

 

Ех 13 Study the following phrases and (a) recall the sentences in which they are used in the text, (b) use them in sentences of your own.

 

look for sth/sb; turn on/off the light; come/go on/off (about the light); step back; get out; cry out for help; go to prison; wait for sb/sth; outside/inside the house (some place); explain sth to sb; in one's/sb's life; turn to sb (for help, advice, etc); at/on/under the table; look about the room; take sth away from sb; take up sth; at the same time; push sth with the foot (shoulder, etc); look into sb's eyes (face); in prison; think of sth/sb; turn round; in a low (loud, soft, etc) voice.

 

 

 

Ex 14  Fill in the blanks with prepositions or adverbs. Retell passage (B).

 

(A) 1. He was speaking slowly, looking — the right words. 2. Tell John to turn — the gas and light when he leaves home. 3. Look, the child has a box of matches — his hand. Take it — — him quickly. 4. He opened the door — the taxi for her and stepped — to let her get — first. 5. See you tomorrow—the same place and—the same time. 6. I'd gladly turn — him — help but I don't know the man — all. 7. Shall I find you — if I call — your place tomorrow afternoon? 8. Don't think badly — him, he meant well. 9. Didn't he try to explain — you how it had happened? 10. I want to be honest — you and tell you what I think — your work. I can't say I'm at all pleased — it. 11. She stood — her finger — the bell — some time and heard it ringing — the house. 12. He stood — the other side — the street and watched the lights — the house go —.13. — the door she turned — and caught him looking — her — a strange Way. 14. Some weeks passed — bringing any change — the situation. 15. He had smoked — years and now finds it very hard to do — tobacco.

 

(B) A man came — the inn and said he wanted a drink; but as I moved — the room to the bar to get it he sat — — a table and asked me to come nearer.

"I just came to see my friend Bill. Is this table — him?"

I told him I did not know his friend Bill and this table was — a person who was staying — our house whom we called the captain.

"Well," he said, "my friend Bill likes people to call him captain. Is he — the house?"

I told him the captain was —.

"I expected to find him —. Which way has he gone?"

— some time the stranger sat there waiting — the captain like a cat waiting — a mouse. Then we heard the door open and the captain en­tered the house.

"Let's step — that door and give Bill a little surprise," said the stran­ger pulling me — the hand and pushing me — the door. "Bill," said the stranger — a low voice when the captain came — the room. The cap­tain turned — , saw the stranger and stopped — saying a word, looking — the man's hard, cold eyes. I wanted to cry — — help or get — — the room quickly.

(After "Treasure Island" by R. L. Stevenson)

 

Ex 15 Fill in the blanks with a suitable word. Use the correct form. Translate the sentences into Russian.

 

need v (2), feel v, advise, look v (2), believe, pull v, enjoy (2), promise v, lіе v (2), expect (2), even, without (2), own, suddenly, soft, badly, honest (2), pleased, advice (2)

 

1. The doctor — her to move to the country. He said she — a change of air. 2. That cafe across the street — nice enough to me. What if we step in and have a coffee and sandwich each? 3. You can't really go out in this awful weather — a hat. 4. He never said a word but I'm sure he — exactly the same way about the arrangement as we all do. 5. It's always easier to give — than to take it. 6. It was a lovely party and we all — ourselves very much. 7. He wasn't exactly —, yet he wasn't telling the whole truth either. 8. She was better at the job than we had —. 9. Do you really do your — cooking? Isn't that just wonderful! 10. I can't take your — in this matter. This is something I must decide for myself. 11. You don't want me to —, or do you? I can be quite — with you about the whole thing but I'm not at all sure you will like it. 12. He pushed the telephone across the table. "What if you phone them now? I know they — your help —." 13. I like only some kinds of poetry. For me to — it, a poem must be either realistic or humorous. 14. To tell you the truth, I never — him to give an — an­swer to that question of yours. 15. It was such a strange story! I didn't — a single word of it. 16. She gave him a warm smile and he knew she was — to see him. 17. I turned on the radio and — the room "was full of — music. 18. The train had already started when he ran up. We quick­ly — him inside. 19. She walked away — looking back even once. She didn't want us to see she was crying. 20. He doesn't — his age at all.

 

Ex 16 Replace the Ukrainian words and phrases by suitable English equivalents in the correct form. Retell and discuss the passage.

 

Miss Annabel Rochfort-Doyle Fleace, to give her the (повне) name, was the last of her family. She was over eighty, very untidy and very red. The present home had been built in the eighteenth century, when the family was still rich. It could not, of course, compare with Gordon-town, where the American Lady Gordon had all (сучасні зручності): electric, light, central heating and a lift.

In the winter before the one we are talking of, she had been (небезпечно) ill. In April she was better, but slower in her (рухах) and mind. In June, for the first time, she invited her heir* to visit her. Bella dis­liked him from the moment he (приїхав). One day he came to Bella car­rying (декілька) books from the library.

"I say, did you know you had these?" he asked.

"I did," Bella (сказала неправду).

"All first editions."

"You put them back where you found them."

Bella had often heard that books (коштують) a lot of money. So she wrote a letter to a Dublin bookseller. He came to (проглянути) the library. When he (поїхав), he (заплатив) her a thousand pounds for the six books.

And so it (сталося) that Bella (вирішила) to give a party. She called her butler and (пояснила) the idea to him.

Bella (взялася до) work. There were many (приготувань) to make. Cheerfully Bella wrote the names of the guests on the cards and addressed the envelopes. She (не включила) the names of (декількох) people from her list.

On the day of the ball she (прокинулась) early, nervous with (з­буждення, turning over in her mind every detail of the (приготувань).

At a quarter to eight Bella (зайняла своє місце) at the head of the stairs. The house looked (чудово) in the candlelight.

The clock struck eight. Bella waited. Nobody came.

At half past twelve Bella got up from her chair.

"Riley, I think I will have some supper. І (погано почуваюся)."

But (як раз) as she (виходила з) the dining-room there was (рух). Guests (прибували). She saw Riley meet them and heard him announce:

"Lord and Lady Mockstock, Sir Samuel and Lady Gordon."

On the stairs, facing her, were the two women she had not invited — Lady Mockstock the draper's* daughter. Lady Gordon the American.

She looked at them with her (пустими), blue eyes.

"I had not (очікувала) this honour," she said. "Please forgive me if I am unable to entertain you."

Miss Fleace (раптом) sat down and said, "I don't know what's (відбувається)." Riley and two of the servants (перенесли) the old lady to a sofa. A day after she died. Mr Banks (приїхав) from London. Among the things he found in her desk were the invitations to the ball, stamped, addressed, but unposted.

(After "Bella Fleace Gave a Party" by Evelyn Waugh)

 

Ex 17  Speak on the following topics. Use the words and phrases given below.

 

1. The Unexpected Meeting

 

Mrs Setliffe: stay at home; quiet; dark; look for a book; move through the rooms; give the door a push; turn on the lights; suddenly; step back; cry out; ask for an explanation; be pleased; want to find out sth.

the man: believe that the house is empty; see sb leave the house; just the right moment to enter a house; get in through an open window; carry a gun; under the cover of night; look for sth; suddenly; lose one's way; find oneself face to face with a beautiful woman; not be a real robber; believe sb's kind words; be ready to stay and talk; explain the situation to sb; not know the ways of the rich.

 

2. Mrs Setliffe

 

young; beautiful; have a pleasant smile; speak in a soft voice; look kind and soft; in fact; hard and cold; dangerous; be married to a man twice one's age; rich; have a lying heart.

 

 

 

3. Mrs Setliffe Thinks of a Plan

 

do some quick thinking; take a decision; hope to make oneself fa­mous; see one's name in the papers; make a good newspaper story; catch a dangerous robber in one's own house; get excited; enjoy sth; take one's seat; push the bell with one's foot; take up the gun suddenly; send the servant to call the police; be ready to send a man to prison for nothing; expect that ...; watch sb's every movement; not shoot.

 

4. The Man Who Came to Rob Mr Setliffe

 

have a mine; lose it; have nothing left; look for a job; be an honest man; do one's best; have a hard life; meet a friend; listen to the story of his friend's life; need help badly; think of a way to help; promise; have a kind heart; tell sb not to lose hope; leave sb outside; go to take back what is one's own; find oneself in a difficult situation; believe a lie; fully understand what has happened; be a strong man; think fast; take a decision; be all the same to sb; get up and walk out of the room; teach sb a good lesson; find out the truth about sb; be sure that ...

 

Ex 18  Test translation.

 

1. Раджу вам летіти туди літаком. Це значно швидше. Якщо ви поїдете поїздом, то втратите два дні. 2. Оскільки було вже пізно, вони вирішили повернутися додому коротшим шляхом, але заблукали. 3. Все сталося як раз так, як ми і очікували — він програв партію (гру), тому що був надто впевнений у собі. 4. Раджу вам купити цю книгу. Вона вам буде дуже потрібна для роботи в наступному році. 5. Він обіцяв провести нас, але так і не прийшов. Я думаю, що він просто забув. 6. Подивіться, будь ласка, на цю картину. Це його власна робота. Вона вам подобається? 7. Я не памїятаю, як він виглядає. Я бачив його всього лише раз і давно. 8. Ви були у неї вчора в лікарні? Як вона виглядає? 9. Деякий час він був дуже серйозно хворий. Але зараз небезпека вже минула і він почувається набагато краще. 10. Чому ви не вірите йому? Він вам чесно все розповів. 11. У таку жахливу погоду небезпечно відправ­лятися в гори, навіть з провідником (гідом). 12. Чому він пішов так несподівано, навіть не попрощавшись? Щось сталось? — Так, він раптом відчув, що йому недобре. 13. Ми прийшли як раз вчасно. Ми тільки встигли зайняти свої місця, і концерт почався. 14. Вони вирі­шили відправитися в подорож без нього. Лікарі не дозволяють йому їздити в такі тривалі поїздки. 15. Якщо йому потрібна валіза, нехай візьме мою. Я обійдуся без неї. 16. Дуже раджу вам подивитися фільм, який іде в нас у кінотеатрі. Впевнений, що ви отримаєте велике задоволення. 17. Коли ми дізналися, що він у скрутному становищі, ми зробили все, щоб допомогти йому. 18. Що ви тут шукаєте? Ви щось забули? Давайте я допоможу вам. 19. Чому ти так тихо говориш? Хтось спить? 20. Я заходив до них вчора, але не застав нікого вдома. Можливо, вони вже поїхали на дачу.

 

GRAMMAR

Complex Object

 

Ex 19  Study the following chart.

 

I saw him get off the bus. Nobody noticed John come in. We watched the train leave the station. He felt somebody push him lightly in the back. Did you hear her sing?

 

Ex 20   Combine the two sentences into one, using a complex object.

 

Model 1:   He got on the train. We saw it.

We saw him get on the train.

 

1. He made a mistake. Nobody noticed it. 2. The postman brought a telegram. I saw it with my own eyes. 3. He told a lie. Everybody heard it. 4. She got sad. Everybody noticed it. 5. Somebody called your name. I heard it. 6. He stood in the doorway and watched them. They got into a car and went away. 7. We saw the runner. He passed the finish line. 8. The car suddenly turned to the left. I noticed it.

 

Model 2:    I noticed that he was standing near the door.

                  I noticed him standing* near the door.

 

1. The teacher noticed that he was looking through some magazine during the lecture. 2. I hear that somebody is crying. 3. It was pleasant  to watch how they were enjoying themselves. 4. Out of the window she watched how her children were playing in the garden. 5. I noticed that she was speaking very coldly to him. 6. The militiaman saw that we were crossing the road in the wrong place. 7. We heard that somebody was laughing in the next room. 8. Because of the noise nobody heard that the telephone was ringing.

 

Ex 21  Use either the Infinitive or Participle I of the verb in brackets as the second element of the complex object.

 

1. She watched him—away until she could see him no more (walk). 2. I noticed him — her a quick look (give). 3. When I turned my head I saw him still — in the doorway (stand). 4. As he sat on the bank of the river he felt the wind — colder and colder (get). 5. I heard the child — behind the wall (cry). 6. He thought he heard somebody — him (call). 7. She noticed him — something to the man sitting in front of him (pass). 8. Did you hear her — that unpleasant remark (make)?

 

Ex 22  Ask questions to make sure that you've heard the person right.

 

Model:    I heard him sing Russian songs.

What songs did you hear him sing?

 

1. She saw the boy looking through some picture book 2. I heard him telling jokes. 3. We noticed the woman enter the house through the back door. 4. He likes to watch the rain come down. 5. We heard the front door open. 6. I saw them walk along the road. 7. I noticed him give her a hard look. 8. They heard somebody moving behind them. 9. I didn't hear her say this because she spoke in a soft voice.

 

Ex 23 Paraphrase the following sentences, using a complex object after the verbs given in brackets.

 

1. Was anybody standing near the door when you came home? (notice). 2. The baby was making the first steps (watch). 3. Somebody opened the door (hear). 4. He lit a cigarette (see). 5. As I came up to the house it was very dark. Suddenly somebody took me by the hand (feel). 6. He made a mistake (not notice). 7. The boys were throwing stones into the river (watch). 8. He was explaining something to the students (hear). 9. He ran and caught a passing bus (see). 10. Somebody pushed me in the back (feel).

 

Ex 24  Translate the following sentences, using a complex object.

 

1. Я чув, як хтось покликав меня. 2. Він помітив, як вона зблідла. 3. Вона бачила, як поштар піднімався по сходах. 4. Ми спостерігали, як туристи переходили річку. 5. Ви чули, як він учора виступав по радіо? 6. Я бачила, як якийсь чоло­вік показував їй дорогу до станції. 7. Всі чули, як він обіцяв, що більше не буде палити. 8. Вона помітила, що він щось шукав у портфелі, і подумала, що він, можливо, загубив гроші. 9. Я ні­коли не чула, щоб він казав неправду. 10. Ніхто не помітив, як я відчинив двері і вийшов.

 

Ex 25 Translate the following sentences, using a complex object or a subordinate clause according to the sense of the verbs in bold type.*

 

1. Я бачив, що йому не хочеться говорити на цю тему. 2. Я бачив, як він намагався завести машину. 3. Вона чула, що професор, хворіє вже тиждень. 4. Вона чула, як хтось згадав моє ім’я. 5. Ми відчували, що він ще нічого не вирішив. 6. Після заходу сонця ми відчули, як температура повітря почала швидко падати. 7. Ви чули, що вони вже повернулися? 8. Я бачу, ви задоволені подарунком. 9. Я бачив, що всі дивляться вгору і одразу ж відчув, що щось сталось. 10. Ми відчували, що йому не подобається його робота. 11. Коли я сідав на потяг, я раптом відчув, як хтось потягнув мене за пальто.

 

Ех 26  Study the following chart.

 

1. Let me ask you a few questions. 2. Did the doctor let him go out? 3. It took him a long time to make his car start. 4. What makes you think so?

 

Ex 27  Complete the following sentences, using a complex object on the pattern of the above chart (make use of the infinitives).

 

understand, believe, look back, behave like that, help, shoot, go by, move, laugh

 

1. I can't make this car —. 2. What made you — his story? 3. Our father never let us — at birds. 4. Let me — you to carry your things. 5. The jokes he told made everybody —. 6. The noise behind me made me —. 7. You mustn't let the child —. 8. Her words made him — that he was mistaken. 9. I let five minutes or so —

 

Ex 28 Translate the following sentences into Ukrainian, watch the meaning

Of the verb 'let'.

1. Let me know when you leave. 2. He didn't let me pay for the taxi. 3. We must let her make her own decision. 4. I let her have my seat. 5. "When did you write to him last?" "I wrote to him — let me see, three weeks ago." 6. Suddenly he let my hand go. 7. Let this be all among friends. 8. Don't let him leave so early. 9. Let's go to the cinema. 10. He is not talkative himself but he likes to let people talk. 11. Let's not think about it.

 

Ex 29 Ask questions about the parts in bold type to make sure that you've heard the person right.

 

1. She didn't let him smoke in the children's room. 2. She made him sit down and wait for her. 3. They didn't let him tell how it all had hap­pened. 4. I decided to make her keep a promise. 5. You must make her believe you. 6. The conductor didn't let the boy get off the bus while It was still moving.

 

Ex 30 Translate the following sentences, using a complex object with either 'let' or 'make'.

 

1. Він доручив мені вирішити це питання. 2. Чому ти думаеш, що вона неправа? 3. Дай мені знати, коли ти від’їжджаєш. 4. Відпустіть його. 5. Він усіх розсмішив своєю розповіддю. 6. Нехай він не палить тут. 7. Я стояв всю дорогу. Я поступився своїм місцем людині літнього віку. 8. Ми змусили його пообіцяти нам приїхати ще раз. 9 Не дозволяйте їй носити важкі речі. 10. Що змусило його зробити цей крок? 11. Ми не могли зрозуміти, що змусило його сказати неправду? 12. Дитина не відпускала мою руку. 13. Ми не могли зрозуміти що змусило його сказати неправду. 14. Дозвольте мені прийти. 15. Ми змусили  його приходити вчасно. 16. Дайте мені знати про ваше рішення.

 

Ех 31    Study the following chart.*                                         

 

1. Everybody expected him to say a few words on the subject. 2. I didn't expect him to come so early. 3. I want you to understand me. 4. Do you want her to leave tomorrow? 5. I believe her to be a good teacher. 6. She knows him to be very gay. 7. They advised us to take the 12 o'clock train.

 

Ex 32 Paraphrase the following sentences so as to use a complex object after the verbs in brackets.

 

1. He will come by an early train (expect). 2. She loses so much time in talking (not want). 3. He will be pleased with the results of our sports competition (expect).  4. It's good advice (believe). 5. It's a dangerous kind of sport (know). 6. She must see the doctor (advise). 7. You must promise not to do such things again (want). 8. They were at home (believe). 9. You must teach him a lesson (advise). 10. They will enjoy the film (expect). 11. He won't be back so soon (not expect). 12. It won't happen again (not want). 13. Will he come too? (expect).

 

Ex 33  Paraphrase the following, using a complex object according to the model.

 

Model:    He wants the book back. Bring it tomorrow.

He wants you to bring the book back tomorrow.

 

1. Somebody must help him with his English. He expects it. 2. He is an honest man. Everybody knows it. 3. It's a safe way out, I believe. 4. Don't read my letters.I hate this. 5. He will arrive tomorrow. They are expecting him. 6. You must not talk about such things in the presence of the children. I don't like this. 7. Do you think he is about fifty? 8. We believe, it is a mistake. 9. I want you for a few minutes. Help me rearrange the furniture in my room. 10.I have always thought my work is very interesting.

 

Ex 34   Translate the following sentences, using a complex object.

 

I. Він хоче (хотів), щоб: 1. вoна дала обіцянку приїхати. 2. ми вирішили це питання разом з ним. 3. хтось провчив її. 4. вона сказала йому в чому справа. 5. ви пояснили, як користуватися цією машиною. 6. всі пам’ятали, що небезпечно купатися, коли вода ще така холодна. 7. ми домовились про зустріч.        

 

II. Я не хочу (хотів(ла)), щоб: 1. ви казали їй неправду. 2. вони вирішували це питання без мене. 3. ви летіли туди (літаком). 4. ви забували свої обіцянки. 5. вона хвилювалась. 6. вона помітила моє хвилювання. 7. хтось знав про наш від’їзд. 8. ви давали пусті обіцянки.                 

 

III. Ми очікуємо (очікували), що: 1. ви скажете щось з цього питання. 2. вона пояснить нам, чому вона не прийшла. 3. ви зробите все від вас залежне, щоб дістати квітки. 4. він зайде до нас на цьому тижні. 5. наш концерт сподобається їм.

 

IV. Вони не очікують (не очікували), що: 1. вона повірить їм. 2. він ска­же правду. 3. ми закінчимо роботу без їх допомоги. 4. це станеться так скоро. 5. знадобиться їх допомога. 6. хтось піде їх провод­жати.

 

V. 1. Я думаю, що він студент першого курсу. 2. Мені не подобаєть­ся, що ви спізнюєтесь. 3. Вона знала, що він гарний спортсмен. 4. Він радить нам влаштувати вечірку в клубі. 5. Вони вважають, що це єдин­ий вихід. 6. Я вважаю (думаю), що його порада вірна.

 

Mixed Bag

 

Ex 35 Open the brackets, using a complex object. Translate the sentences into Ukrainian.

 

I. I can't let (you, lose) time like this. 2. The telephone ringing made (she, sit up) in bed. 3. Did you see (it, happen) with your own eyes? 4. We saw (he, turn) the corner of the street. 5. She wanted (the whole world, know) how happy she was. 6. Did they expect (we, show) them the city? 7. The bad weather made (she, change) her plans. 8. Don't let (the fire, die). It'll be difficult to make another fire in this wet weather.

Ex 36 Paraphrase the following sentences, using a complex object either with Participle I or Infinitive according to the sense.

 

1. Hundreds of cars were moving along the road. They watched them. 2. The aeroplane landed safely. I watched it. 3. He was reading my pri­vate letters. I noticed it. 4. He made a mistake yesterday. She noticed it. 5. The rain is coming down my back. I can feel it. 6. A man called out her name. She heard him. 7. They were making a terrible noise. I could hear them. 8. He plays tennis. I have never seen it. 9. I saw them through the window. They were waiting by the door. 10. The house shook. I felt it. 11. She found her dog. It was lying asleep on her doorstep. 12. He speaks with a slight accent. I have never noticed it before.

 

Ex 37 Answer the following questions, using a complex object; build up a situa­tion, if necessary; make use of the suggestions.

 

1. What makes you think he is out? (see, leave the house). 2. Does she sing well? (hear, sing, many times). 3. How did he fall down? (let, go, sb's hand). 4. What makes you think he is a good football player? (watch). 5. Why won't he go on the trip with us? (his mother, not want). 6. Why do you want to discuss her discipline? (behave like this, сan't let). 7. How did they enjoy the concert of this famous comedian? (make, laugh). 8. How do you know that he can speak English? (hear). 9. Why are you so sure that he will do this work? (make). 10. Why does he spend so much time (on) gardening? (make, feel happy).

 

Ex 38  Translate the following sentences, using a complex object where possible.

 

1. Було приємно спостерігати, як діти слухали музику. 2. Шум за спиною змусив мене оглянутися, я побачив чоловіка, який ма­хав рукою і щось кричав. 3. Невже ти не бачиш, що він хоче, щоб ти допоміг йому? 4. Мені б не хотілось, щоб ти погано думав про нього. Ми завжди знали його, як дуже чесну людину. 5. Я ніколи не чув, щоб він згадав це ім’я 6. Не дозволяйте дітям дивитися телевізор допізна. Це погано для їх здоров’я. 7. Люб­лю, щоб вікна виходили на південь. 8. Дозвольте мені дати вам пораду. 9. Вони відчули, що їм пора йти. 10. Раптом вона відчула, як хтось злегка торкнувся її плеча. 11. Я помітив, як таксі уповільнило ходу і зупинилося на розі вулиці. 12. Він завжди робить те, що ти хочеш. 13. Він знав, що ця книга цікава, але не очікував, що вона буде такою цікавою. 14. Я чув, він зараз працює над новою книгою. Ви знаєте про що вона ?

 

The Use of the Tenses in Complex Sentences with

Adverbial Clauses of Time

 

(a) introduced by the conjunction 'as'*

 

Ex 39 Answer the following questions according to the model. Make use of the phrases.

 

Model:    When did you meet him? (turn the corner of the street).

I met him (just) as I turned the corner of the street.

 

we, get off the bus; cross the bridge; they, come nearer; they, walk to­gether towards the house; we, pass the cafe; wait for her; shave; read the letter

 

When: 1. did it begin to rain? 2. did he turn away? 3. did she smile? 4. did he watch the children play? 5. did she say that she was leaving? 6. did he sing? 7. did she say she wanted a cup of coffee? 8. did they hear somebody call for help?

 

Ex 40  Translatethe following sentences on the pattern of the above exercise.

 

1. Як тільки я зійшов з потягу, він підбіг до мене. 2. Як тіль­ки погода зіпсувалась, ми повернулась до міста. 3. По мірі того як він розповідав цю історію, нам ставало все цікавіше. 4. Як тільки вона увімкнула світло, вона побачила в кімнаті незнайомця. 5. Вона згадала про лист, який забула відправити, коли проходила повз пошту. 6. Як тільки він заговорив, вона одразу згадала, де вона зустріла його вперше.

 

(b) introduced by the  conjunctions 'when', 'after', 'as soon as' (Past Indefinite in the principal clause and Past Per­fect in the adverbial clause)

 

Ex 41 Answer the following questions according to the model. Make use of the phrases.

 

Model:    When did the children run out to play? (as soon as, finish breakfast).

As soon as they had finished breakfast (they ran out to play).

 

after, take a decision; when, the right time, come; after, she, lie to him several times; after, he, explain everything again; when, finish his third cigarette; as soon as, start speaking

 

When: 1. did they leave? 2. did he look at his watch? 3. did the sit­uation become clear to them? 4. did he teach her a lesson? 5. did they take practical steps? 6. did she recognize the stranger?

 

Ex 42 Translate the following sentences, using the conjunctions 'as soon as', 'after', 'when'.

 

1. Після того, як він прочитав одну книгу цього автора, йому захотілось прочитати все, що він написав. 2. Проживши в цьому невеликому місті все життя, він знав його історію, кожен куточок, кожне дерево. 3. Як тільки студенти закінчили будівництво стадіону, вони одразу ж організували перший матч. 4. Він прийшов вже після того, як вони закінчили обговорення цього питання. 5. Вони приїхали на станцію після того, як потяг пішов. 6. Коли вони знесли всі речі вниз, вона викликала таксі. 7. Я зрозумів її думку тільки після того, як поговорив з нею.

 

(c) introduced by the conjunctions 'before', 'till', 'until'

 

Ex 43 Paraphrase the following sentences according to the model and translate them into Ukrainian.

 

Model:    When he called to see me, I had not had breakfast yet.

               He called to see me before I had had breakfast.

 

1. When we arrived at the station, the train had not left yet. 2. When the bell rang, he had not finished his composition yet. 3. When he asked this question, they had not finished the discussion of the problem yet. 4. When it began to rain, they hadn't crossed the river yet. 5. When he left, the telegram had not arrived yet. 6. When he got off, the train had not stopped yet.

 

Ex 44 Answer the following questions according to the model. Make use of the phrases.

 

Model:    How long did (will) they wait? (the train, start)

They welted {will wait) till (until) the train started (starts).

 

the mother, come; get an answer to their letter; it, get dark; it, get too hot; somebody, wake up; move to the South; everybody, leave

 

How long: 1. was he ill? 2. did (will) they stay in town? 3. did the baby cry? 4. did they play football? 5. did they stay in the Crimea? 6. did he sleep? 7. did he stay at the party?

 

Ex 45   Insert 'before' or 'till' ('until').

 

1. I forgot all about the letter — I was outside. 2. He had died just — the war started. 3. She didn’t know what was happening to her — it had happened. 4. We must do something — it's too late. 5. He thought for a moment — he answered her. 6. Sit here and wait — I finish my in­terview. 7. He couldn't do anything — he found the document. 8. Think twice — you take this dangerous step.

 

Ex 46   Translate the following sentences into English.

 

1. Вона ще не задала питання, а він вже знав відповідь. 2. Діти гралися на вулиці, поки не стемніло. 3. Він мовчав, поки я не задала йому це питання. 4. Я раджу вам подумати, перш ніж ви приймете рішення. 5. Ви ніколи не навчитеся писати статті, поки не спробуєте самі написати щось. 6. Дитина втекла до того, як прийшов лікар. 7. Вони дісталися додому до того, як стемніло 8. Вона встигла сісти на автобус до того, як він рушив. 9. Гра продовжувалась до тих пір, поки не пішов дощь. 10. Я не поїду до тих пір, поки не владнаю свої справи.

 

(d) introduced by the conjunction 'while'

 

Ex 47  Complete the following sentences according to the model.

 

Model:    She asked him this question while he (tell us about his stay in London).

She asked him this question while he was telling us about his stay in London.

 

1. Her face didn't show anything while he (say this). 2. We contin­ued to discuss the problem while they (have a smoke in the corridor). 3. While I (wait for you), I looked through all these magazines. 4. It began to rain while he (sleep in the garden). 5. He stopped her while she (enter the office). 6. We waited in the sitting-room while she (speak to a friend over the telephone). 7. Everybody watched his face while he (play the piano). 8. While I (eat my sandwiches) at the station bar, two strangers came in. 9. While she (wait) for the bus, she read the newspa­per.

 

Ex 48  Make up sentences according to the model.

 

Model:    The teacher, write something on the blackboard; the stu­dents, think of the problem.

While the teacher was writing something on the blackboard, the students were thinking of the problem.

 

1. The children, play in the garden; their mother, read a book. 2. She, make breakfast; he, look through the morning papers. 3. I, wait for you; you, watch the football match on TV. 4. They, talk of old days; the band, play dance music. 5. She, make tea in the kitchen; he, unpack his things. 6. These thoughts, pass through his head; he, ask different unimportant questions.

 

The Use of the Present Perfect Tense in the Meaning of the Future Perfect Tense in Adverbial Clauses of Time

 

Ex 49 Complete the following sentences using the Present Perfect Tense in adverbial clauses of time according to the model.

 

Model:    I shan't go anywhere until (finish writing my report).

I shan't go anywhere until I've finished writing my report.

 

1. You'll pay when (get the money from home). 2. I'll come as soon as (write this letter). 3. He won't let you have another book until (give back the one he gave you last week). 4. She will understand what it is only after they (teach her a good lesson). 5. I shan't speak with you until (take your words back). 6. You'll never be well again until (stop smoking). 7. You won't understand the goodness of these people until (live some time with them). 8. I won't let you go till (promise to come again).

 

Ex 50  Translate the following sentences (note the model above).

 

1. Ми не відпустимо вас, поки ви не пообідаєте з нами. 2. Ніхто не буде з вами розмовляти, поки ви не візьмете свої слова назад. 3. Не можна користуватися цим апаратом, поки ви не вивчите інструк­цію. 4. Ви почнете вільно читати английську літературу тільки після того, як прочитаєте декілька книг.

 

Ех 51  Use the correct form of the verbs in brackets.

 

IN THE DINING-CAR

 

John and his wife, Angela, are fond of (travel) and usually they (go) abroad for their holidays. Some time ago they (go) to a small town in Yugoslavia. They also (spend) a very exciting holiday in Italy last year. They (catch) a plane from London to Paris, then they travelled by train to Istambul. The train (move) very slowly through the mountains in Northern Italy. John and Angela (have dinner) in the dining-car when the train (stop) suddenly. They (look) out of the window. It (get) dark, but they (notice) quite a lot of men in green (get on) the train. One of them (speak) angrily. John (think) he (see) fire-arms, but it (become) too dark to be sure.

A few minutes later the dining-car (be) full of men in green. They (ask) everybody for their passports and (look) at them hurriedly. Angela decided that the men (be) police or immigration officials. A man, who (sit) quietly at their desk, (look) very excited. One of the men in green (come up) to the man. But before he (ask) for his passport, the man (jump) from the seat (push) the nearest man hard, and (try) to get out of the window — but it was too small. Other officials (seize) the man and (take) him away. One of them (explain) that the Italian police (expect) them (arrest) the robber because he (steal) three paintings from the Uffizzi Gallery in Florence several weeks before.

(Mozaika, 1970)

 

Ex 52 Rewrite (or retell) in narrative form the following passage from the text. From "In front of her, near the wall, stood a man" ... up to "And now I must go".

 

The Article

 

Ex 53  Study the chart. See how the following nouns 'weather', 'advice', 'news', 'information', 'progress', 'money', 'work' are used.

 

1. What good weather (news, advice, progress, work, informa­tion)! 2. Where is the money (news, advice, work, information) from? It is from Nick. 3. I've got a piece (two pieces) of news (information, advice). 4. There is much (little) work (money, news, information, prog­ress).

 

Ex 54   Translate the following.

 

1. (і) Поради давати легко, але дуже важко слідувати їм. (іі) Доз­вольте мені дати вам пораду, (ііі) Зверніться до нього, він, як правило, дає гарні поради. 2. (і) Що нового? (іі) Це старі новини, я їх уже давно чув. (ііі) Яка чудова новина; вдома зрадіють, коли почують її. 3. (і) — Де гроші? — Вони на столі, (іі) Я не можу дати тобі багато грошей. Двадцять п’ять гривень влаштують тебе (достатньо)? 4. (і) Ця книга містить дані про останню експедицію Беринга, (іі) Нові дані ще не поступили; ми чекаємо їх з хвилини на хвилину. 5. (і) Він шукає роботу, (іі) Це дуже важка робота. Вона не зможе  зробити її самостійно, (ііі) Я хочу бути відвертим з вами. Мені не подобається, як ви зробили цю роботу, (іііі) Він не збирається міняти місце роботи. Тут йому й робота до душі, і колек­тив. 6. (і) — Ви добре відпочили за містом? — Да, була чудова погода і ми більшість часу були на повітрі, (іі) У цьому році з погодою відбувається щось дивне. У нас раніше ніколи не було дощової погоди у грудні, (ііі) Я сподіваюсь, погода не зміниться на гірше; я залишила плащ і парасольку вдома. 7. Він досяг великих успіхів останнім часом. Я знаю, що його викладач дуже задоволений ним.

 

Ех 55   Translate the following.

 

Hall Two is on the second floor. Take Bus Five, get off at the fourth stop.

 

1. — Де зараз чотирнадцята група? — звичайно у цей час у них лекція з історії у другому залі. 2. — Де будуть завтра збори? — В 405-ій аудиторії. 3. — На якій сторінці третій урок? — На п’ятдесят восьмій. 4. — Скажіть, будь ласка, де знаходять­ся картини Репіна? — У п’ятому залі, на другому поверсі. — Дякую. 5. На нашому курсі близько десяти груп; найменша - восьма, в ній тільки три студенти. 6. Ось десятий автобус, ваша зупинка п’ята (звідси). 7. Будинок номер дев’ять — четвертий від рогу.

 

READING

 

Ex 56  Read the text, and do the assignments coming after it.

 

It is useful to be able to estimate and describe characters. There are however, two aspects of the subject. Personal appearance, physical fea­tures, stature and build, clothes or individual details which make one person different from another. Such description is often given of missing persons. There will be little indication of character in these cases.

Yet clothes and appearance are often an index to character, not only the kind of clothes people wear, but how they wear them. A person who takes little interest in his or her appearance, is not likely to be a meth­odical or tidy person.

Characters may be described in several ways: by description, by sug­gestion, by conversation, or by action.

Simple description is perhaps the easiest, but also the least satisfac­tory method, e.g. you may, say John Brown is a very methodical and tidy person, which is a plain statement of fact. If, however, you describe some of his habits which help to build character, such as his neatly-parted hair and clean shoes, his careful and accurate work, tidy desk, and so on, all this will suggest his character far better. If you wish to add that John is also cheerful and good-tempered, you can do so by des­cribing what he says and what he does. If you listen to a person's talk, you soon have some idea of his character. You should remember, also, that "Actions speak louder than words" and by telling how people act, you will be indicating their character.

If you wish to describe people well, you should notice such things as habits, mannerisms, amusements or hobbies, clothes, particularly hats and shoes. Habits and amusements can also tell us much. Character shows itself through such details as one's voice, walk, features, eyes, mouth, hands, rouge, or other make-up.

Yet we cannot say that a person is wholly good or bad, any more than we can say that a high forehead always denotes intelligence or a big chin indicates a strong will.      

                   (After "English Every Day" by R. E. Houseman)

 

Assignments

 

(a) Say what the text is about in (i) a short phrase; (ii) an extended sentence.

 

(b) Quickly look through the list and mark, the lettered phrase nearest in meaning to the word or phrase tested.

 

1. Estimate character: (i) find out a person's true worth; (ii) see the difference between people's characters; (iii) form an opinion of a person's character.

2. Personal appearance: (i) the way a person looks; (ii) the way a person dresses; (iii) the way a person walks and talks.

3. Physical features: (i) the size of a person's hands, feet; (ii) the parts of the face (forehead, nose, etc); (iii) the colour of the hair.

4. Stature: (i) a person's health; (ii) state of mind; (iii) the natural height of a person.

5. Build: (i) the shape and proportions of the body; (ii) the look in a person's eyes; (iii) the way a person laughs.

6. Missing person: (i) somebody who has lost his way; (ii) a person who is lost to others; (iii) a person who is absent.

7. Habit: (i) (an example of) usual behaviour; (ii) a family tradition; (iii) a national holiday.

8. Suggest: (i) describe directly; (ii) indicate indirectly; (iii) express one's opinion.                

9. Good-tempered: (i) very temperamental; (ii) calm and pleasant; (iii) honest and kind.

10. Mannerism: (i) a peculiar way of behaving, speaking, etc, that has become a habit; (ii) the way in which anything is done or happens; (iii) a person's manners.

 

(c) Two of the words in each group below are similar in meaning. Check the word which does not belong.

 

1. appearance; look; manner. 2. character; feature; characteristic. 3. stature; statue; height. 4. build; habit; shape. 5. indication; index; description. 6. kind; sort; mannerism. 7. methodical; analytical; system­atic. 8. clean; tidy; neat. 9. careful; exact; accurate. 10. denote; explain; indicate; 11. temper; intelligence; intellect.

 

(d) Choose the answer that expresses most accurately what is stated in the passage. Only one answer is correct.

 

The idea behind the sentence "Yet we cannot say that a person is wholly good or bad, any more than we can say that a high forehead al­ways denotes intelligence or a big chin indicates a strong will" is that: (i) there is as little connection between a high forehead and intelligence, or a big chin and strong will, as there is between the kind of character a person has and his appearance, habits, mannerisms, etc; (ii) the good­ness or badness of a person is in direct proportion to the height of his forehead and the size of his chin; (iii) it is as impossible to decide wheth­er a person is wholly good or bad on the basis of his appearance or char­acter as it is to say that a person is intelligent because he has a high fore­head, or has a strong will because he has a big chin.

 

(e) Pick out all the words from the text relating to: (i) appearance; (ii) character.

 

(f) Complete the following list.

 

Character shows itself through:

1. clothes (the kind of clothes people wear, and how they wear them).

2. appearance (features, stature; the interest a person takes in his or her appearance),    

3. habits (neatness, tidiness accuracy, cleanliness).

4. temper ....

5. mannerisms ...., etc.

 

(g) Name the traits of character suggested by the following. Say which, in your opinion, are good, and which are bad, and why.

 

A person: 1. takes little interest in his or her appearance; 2. shows great interest in one's appearance; 3. is always well-dressed; 4. wears loud clothes; 5. has neatly-parted hair and clean shoes; 6. works careful­ly and accurately; 7. never leaves a job half-done; 8. works hard; 9. nev­er lies; 10. hardly ever lies but never tells the truth; 11. never speaks the truth; 12. thinks of nobody but himself; 13. secretly believes that he is better than others; 14. is always glad to help others; 15. knows all the answers and therefore never asks for advice; 16. gladly takes advice; 17. thinks carefully before taking a decision; 18. is cold and unfeeling; 19. does the most unexpected things; 20. is bright and pleasant; 21. en­joys discussing other people's personal matters.

 

(h) Briefly state the four ways of describing character. Say which method the au­thor finds the more satisfactory, and why. Express your agreement or disagree­ment.

 

(i) Discuss some popular beliefs about character, eg that handwriting, the lines on your hand, or certain physical features indicate special types of character.

 

(j) Explain why it is useful to be able to estimate and describe character.

 

(k) Read the text critically,* and state your criticism of the author's arguments or conclusions. Express your own opinion on the matter.

 

Ex 57 Read the text, consulting the dictionary, if necessary. Pick out the sen­tence which, in your opinion, expresses the main idea. Make a list of examples the author quotes to prove his main thesis. Write a summary of the passage, in your own words as far as possible.

 

WHERE CRIME STEADILY DECLINES

 

During the first weeks of our stay in the USSR, when after a late show or visit we would be walking homeward on Pravda Street which is usual­ly empty by eleven, my wife and I were naturally inclined to watch for anything moving in the bushes lining the sidewalks.** In most parts of a US city such late walks on empty streets are hardly advisable. But we soon got over that habit and thought nothing of such walks at mid­night or even later.

In view of the extremely serious crime situation in the United States, we often questioned people on crime conditions in the many USSR cities we visited. The usual reply would be something like, "Oh, yes we have crime." Asked if that meant murders, kidnapping, narcotics pushing, organized syndicates in gambling and prostitution, bank holdups and such, the answer with a loud laugh, would be, "Oh, nothing like that!" If you press the question, they may recall some rare serious crime that once attracted public attention. But crime, as we know it in the United States, does not figure much in Soviet public interest. And when you tell Soviet people a little of America's crime situation, they look at you in disbelief, like something from another world.

(After "Where Human Rights Are Real" by George Morris)

 

SPEECH AND COMPOSITION

 

Ex 58  Answer the following questions, using the vocabulary of the lesson. Sum up your answers (orally, or in writing).

 

FIRE IN THE HOUSE

 

1. Why must you always be sure that you have turned off the gas and lights when you leave home? 2. Why is it dangerous to leave the gas on? What may happen? 3. What's the quickest way to put out a fire (if, say, the tablecloth or the curtains are on fire)? 4. Why mustn't you get excited or lose your head? 5. What is the telephone number of the city fire brigade? Why is it usually a two-figure number? 6. Have you ever phoned the fire brigade service? When was it? 7. What must you do if you catch the smell of gas in your flat? 8. Why is it dangerous to light a match or turn on the light if the kitchen is full of gas? What may hap­pen?

 

LOSING ONE'S WAY

 

1. Have you ever lost your way in a strange town (in a forest, etc)? 2. How did it happen? 3. Who helped you to find your way back home (to the hotel; through the forest)? 4. Did you expect help to come so quick­ly? 5. How much time did it take you to get to the right road (place, etc) again? 6. It was kind of the man to take you all the way back (show you the way; explain how to get home), wasn't it?

 

Ex 59  Read the passage. Answer the questions. Retell (or write up) the passage in English.

 

Початок літературної діяльності Джека Лондона відноситься до останнього десятиліття XIX століття. До цього часу в житті Сполучених Штатів Америки відбулися глибокі економічні і соціальні зміни. Американський імперіалізм вступив у свою останню, імперіалістичну стадію розвитку.

У США, як і в країнах Заходу, епоха імперіалізму ознаменувалася настанням жорстокої політичної реакції і загальною кризою буржуазної культури. Офіційна буржуазна література усіляко відволікала читача від серйозних соціальних питань, годувала його байками про загальне благополуччя і «рівні можливості» і виключала будь-який натяк на існування найглибших суспільних протиріч,              

Лише деякі письменники, серед яких насамперед варто назвати імена М. Твена (Mark Twain), Ф. Норриса (Frank Norris), С. Крейна (Stephen Crane), Л. Стеффенса (Lincoln Steffens), Т. Драйзера (Theodore Dreiser), відстоювали правду і боролися за реалістичне мистецтво. Безсумнівно, що до цього прогресивного табору американської літератури належав і Лондон.

Творчість Лондона досягає найвищого розквіту в 1905-1910р. Письменник у цей період бере активну участь у робітничому русі. Він захоплено вітає російську революцію 1905р. Його численні лекції і статті, перейняті глибокою вірою в близьке торжество соціалістичної революції, зробили його найпопулярнішим письменником серед американських робітників. В ці роки він створює свої кращі здобутки: збірки публіцистичних статей «Боротьба класів» (War of the Classes) (1905), «Революція» (Revolution and Other Essays) (1908), романи «Залізна п’ята» (The Iron Heel) (1907) и «Мартін Іден» (Martin Eden).

(Из предисловия П. Федунова к роману «Мартин Иден», 1953 г.)

 

Questions

 

1. When did Jack London turn to writing? 2. What changes had tak­en place in the USA by that time (the last decade of the 19th century)? 3. What was behind those profound socio-economic developments? 4. When did US capitalism enter its final stage of development? 5. Was the USA the only country in the world where imperialism had triggered off brutal political reaction as well as a general crisis of bourgeois cul­ture? 6. How did the official bourgeois literature see its task? 7. In what ways did the official bourgeois literature try to divert the attention of the masses from the burning social problems of the day? 8. What fairy­tales did it feed to the general public? 9. What part did the concepts of general prosperity and "equal opportunity" play in the official prop­aganda campaign? 10. What did official writings have to say about the differences and contradictions in American society? 11. What are the names of the American writers who fought for a truly realistic art? 12. What years mark the peak of Jack London's literary career? 13. What made Jack London's novels and political essays so popular with the Amer­ican working-class reader? Would you say it was his deep belief in an early victory of the socialist revolution? 14. What are Jack London's most famous works? 15. When were they written?

 

Ex 60   Use the following words and phrases in situations of your own.

 

 

1. A Good Lesson

 

used to; lose things; happen; look for an important document; get excited; turn on all the lights; look under the table (behind the chairs, etc); move the piano; push the table out of one's way; be sure that ...; What if ...? a whole hour; have no time left; catch a taxi; be late for; make a decision; put things in their right places; learn one's lesson well.

 

2. A Cry for Help

 

happen; camp near a river; stay behind; do the cooking; make a fire; suddenly; a loud cry; listen without moving; run to the river as fast as one can; a big crowd; show to sth; a dangerous place; a poor swim­mer; be in danger; need help badly; lose one's head; cry out for help; cry to sb; throw а горе (веревка) to sb; catch the rope; pull sb out of the water; come just in time; advise sb; explain the danger to sb.

 

3. A Misunderstanding

 

a tall building; several entrances; arrange to meet sb; wait for sb outside; expect sb to come out through the main entrance; for two whole hours; wonder what has happened; get excited; suddenly; remember; side entrance; be sure that ...; look for sb; look angry; say "Hallo" cold­ly; smile bitterly; explain sth to sb; see one's mistake.

 

Ex 61  Discuss the following, giving your arguments for or against.

 

1. Your friend says that people are as good as they are beautiful. You disagree with him, saying: "Beauty's but skin-deep." Generally speaking, you don't believe that a person's looks reflect his character in any way.

2. Your friend believes that honesty is the best policy. You personal­ly think that sometimes it's better to be tactful than truthful.

 

Ex 62   Subjects for oral and written composition.

 

1. Give character-sketches of (a) Mrs Setliffe; (b) the man who came to rob old Setliffe; (c) old Setliffe.

2. Say whether you think the man did right when he came to old Setliffe's house to take back what he believed to be his own.

3. Explain why the man didn't turn to the police for help.

4. Give a description of Mrs Setliffe as she looked to the man at the beginning of the story and at the end of it.

5. Explain how it happened that Mrs Setliffe's fine words fooled the man for some time.

6. Explain why the man was so sure that Mrs Setliffe would not shoot.

7. Write an article (a) giving a true story of what happened; (b) of the kind that Mrs Setliffe would like to see in the papers.

8. Tell a story to illustrate each of these proverbs: A Friend in Need is a Friend Indeed. Друг познается в беде. Appearances are Deceptive. Внешность обманчива.

9. Explain the paradox: "If you want to be thought a liar, tell the truth."

10. It is often said that people look without seeing. What does this mean?

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

LESSON SIX

 

Text: An Unfinished Story (from "A Writers's Notebook" by W. Somerset Maug­ham)

Grammar: Modal Verbs. Can, May, Must and their Equivalents.

 

AN UNFINISHED STORY

 

A week ago someone told me an incident. He said he wanted me to write a story on it, and since then I have been thinking it over. I don't see what to do. The incident is as follows.

Two young fellows were working on a tea plantation in the hills and they had to fetch the mail from a good way off so that they only got it at rather long intervals. One of the young fellows, let us call him Adams, used to get a lot of letters by every mail, ten or twelve and sometimes more, but the other, Brown, never got one. He used to watch Adams enviously as he took his packet and started to read, he was eager to have a letter, just one letter, and one day, when they were expecting the mail, an idea came into his head. He said to Adams: "Look here, you always have a packet of letters and I never get any. I'll give you five pounds if you let me have one of yours." "I don't mind," said Adams. So Adams agreed to sell one of his letters, and when the mail came in he at once handed Brown his letters and told him he could take any let­ter he liked. Brown gave him a five-pound note, looked over the letters, chose one and returned the rest. In the evening Adams joined Brown for a whisky and soda. For some time they were silent. Then Adams,eagerto find out about the letter, broke the silence, saying: "By the way,what was the letter about?" "I'm not going to tell you," said Brown. Adams was rather surprised and upset. He said: "Well, tell me at least, who it was from?" "That's my business," answered Brown. They had a bit of an argument, but Brown stood on his rights and refused to say any­thing about the letter that he had bought. Adams got angry, and as the weeks went by he did all he could to make Brown let him see the letter. Brown continued to refuse. At last Adams felt he could not stand it any longer and made up his mind to talk the matter over with Brown once again. One day he followed Brown into his office and said: "Look here, here's your five pounds, let me have my letter back again." "Never," said Brown. "I bought and paid for it, it's my letter and I mean to keep it."

That's all. I'm not a writer of the modern school and that is why, perhaps, I can't write it just as it is and leave it. It's against my princi­ples. I want a story to have form, and I don't see how I can give it that if you are unable to give the story the right kind of end.

 

VOCABULARY

 

fetch vt приносити; піти за, приводити fetch a book (chair, taxi, doctor, etc); fetch help (children, etc)

rather adv досить, деякою мірою The story is rather sad. It took him rather long to read the book. I rather enjoyed the play.

envy vt заздрити envy sb sth He envied me my trip round the world. I don't envy you anything, envy n They say such things about him out of envy; envious n заздрісний Phr be envious of sb/sth

mind n 1. ум, розум a great (strong, weak, etc) mind Phr come to one's mind (come to one's head) спадати на думку (приходити в голову); Phr be on one's/sb's mind задумати що-небудь; не давати спокою (про думку); 2. думка, погляд We are all of the same mind. Phr to my (his, her, etc) mind на мою думку (його, її та ін.) думку; з моєї (його, її та ін) точки зору Phr make up one's mind вирішити; change one's mind передумати, змінити рішення; mind vt/vi заперечувати, мати що-небудь проти (зазвичай використовується у запитальних та заперечних контекстах) Do you mind if I open (my opening) the window? — I don't mind it at all. Would you mind opening the window? Відкрийте вікно, будь ласка. He doesn't mind the cold weather a bit. Phr Never mind! He турбуйтеся! Неважливо! Phr Mind your own business! Займайтеся своїмі справами! He лізь не у свою справу! absent-minded а розсіяний; light-minded a легковажний

(dis)agree vi (не) домовлятися; (не) погоджуватися  Не agreed to do it. I can't agree with you (your idea). He agreed to the arrangement. We agreed about/(up)on the price; (dis)agreement n (не)згода; agreement n договір, угода, згода Phr come to an agreement дійти згоди

sell vt (sold) продавати Не sold his photo camera for a large sum of money. What does this shop sell?

hand vt давати, віддавати, передавати Hand the papers to the secre­tary, please. Hand (= pass) me the bread, please. Phr hand in sth пода­вати, здавати, вручати Не was to hand in his report by the end of the month.

choose vt (chose, chosen) обирати choose a book (picture, place, seat; friend, etc); choice n a good (wide, poor etc) choice Phr make a choice (з)робити вибір

return vi/vt повертати(ся) Не promised to return soon. I'll return the book as soon as I've read it; return n Phr on one's return після повернення

rest n залишок, решта, інше, інші the rest of the story (day, way, time, money, etc); the rest of the books (things; people, students, etc); The rest of the way was more difficult. The rest of the students have al­ready come.

join vt 1. приєднувати(ся) (до) May I join you in the game (in the con­versation; on the trip; for an excursion; etc); 2. вступати (в/у); стати чле­ном (клубу, товариства та ін.) join a sports club (society, etc); join the army

break vt/vi (broke, broken) 1. (з)ломати, розбити break a window (pencil, cup, watch, car, etc); break one's arm (leg, nose, etc); 2. порушуватиь; расторгать; переривати break one's promise (one's word, a rule, traffic regulations; an agreement, a contract, a marriage; the silence, the lesson, the journey, the work, etc)

surprise vt дивувати His answer surprised everybody; be surprised дивуватися We were surprised to see him there. He was so surprised that he couldn't say a word. We were surprised at his unexpected arri­val; surprise n подив; сюрприз, несподіванка Не looked at me in (with) surprise. It was a surprise to us all.

upset vt (upset) засмучуватися, прикро вважати The news upset her; be upset засмучуватися, зажуритися We were upset by the bad news. He was upset over (about) the mistake.

argue vi 1. сперечатися, обговорювати They can argue for hours; 2. стверджувати, доводити Copernicus argued that the Earth moves round the Sun; argument n 1. суперечка, дискусія; 2. довід, доказ, аргу­мент

right n право You have no right to speak to me like that. Phr have the right to work (rest and leisure, etc) мати право на працю (відпочинок та ін.)

(не) refuse vt/vi відмовити They refused our help. Вони відмовилися від нашої допомоги. Не refused to join us. We asked him to go with us but he refused; refusal n

stand vt (stood) (використовується у запитальних та заперечних контекстах) виносити, витримувати; терпіти I can't stand the cold.

follow vt 1. проходити, іти (за) What season follows winter? — Spring (does). He felt that somebody was following him. He followed his elder brother in everything. Phr follow sb's example (advice) наслідувати чий-небудь приклад (совету); Phr as follows наступний, подальший The let­ter read as follows. У листі було наступне: Phr follow the policy of peace (cooperation, etc) дотримуватися  політиці міру (співробітництва); 2. стежити (за газетою, ситуацією, пильнувати чиїсь слова, думки, мову.) Не spoke very fast and it was difficult to follow him; follow the newspa­pers (situation, etc) Do you follow me? following adj наступне the following day (week, month, etc); the following следую­щее He said the following.

mean vt (meant) 1. значити, мати значення, означати What does this word mean? What does his silence mean? Your help means a lot to us; 2. думати, мати намір; мати на увазі I never meant to upset you. He didn't mean anybody when he said it. Phr mean well мати найкращі наміри; meaning n

keep vt (kept) 1. тримати, зберігати, залишати (собі) Where do you keep your books (clothes, money, food, etc)? Can you keep all these facts in your head? May I keep your book for two days more? Phr keep a se­cret берегти таємницю; keep a tradition зберігати (підтримувати) тра­дицію, та ін.; 2. залишати, утримувати, затримувати I hope he won't keep us too long. Phr keep sb waiting змушувати кого-небудь чекати (на себе) Не didn't keep us waiting long; vt/vi 3. тримати(ся), зберігати, залишатися (у повному положенні, стані) keep quiet (si­lent, busy, warm, etc); I hope this fine weather keeps a little longer. The work kept him very busy. Phr Keep to the right (left)!.Триматися правого (лівого) боку!

 

WORD COMBINATIONS

 

think sth over обмірковувати що-небудь

look over sth оглянути що-небудь

at least в крайньому разі (випадку)

stand on one's rights наполягати на своїх правах

at last нарешті, врешті

talk sth over обговорити що-небудь

Look here! Послухайте!

that is why тому

as it is як є

 

EXERCISES

 

COMPREHENSION

 

Ex 1   Answer the following questions.

 

1. Where did the incident happen? 2. How often did the two young men get the mail? 3. Which of them used to get a lot of letters by every mail? 4. Why was Brown so eager to get a letter? 5. What idea did Brown have one day when they were expecting the mail? 6. How did Adams like Brown's idea? 7. What agreement did they come to? 8. Why was Adams rather surprised when Brown refused to tell him a single word about the letter that he had bought? 9. Why did the refusal upset Adams? 10. How long did it take Adams to make up his mind that he needed the letter more than the money? 11. Why did Brown refuse to return the letter to Adams? 12. What did Maugham mean when he said that he was not a story writer of the modern school? 13. Why was Maugham unable to write a story on the incident?

 

Ex 2   Look through the text once again, and:

 

1. See if you can tell in what part of the world the incident took place. 2. Say how old were Adams and Brown, and what sort of work they did. 3. Explain why Maugham did not give the real names of the two men. 4. Say what conclusions can be made about (a) Adams's character, (b) Brown's character. 5. See if you can explain why Adams used to get a lot of letters, while Brown never got one. 6. Say which episode, in your opinion, may serve as an illustration to the proverb "Actions speak loud­er than words". 7. Say what, in Maugham's opinion, is the most essen­tial characteristic of a story.

 

Ex 3 Find in the text the English for the following phrases, and use them in retelling and discussing the text.

 

Двоє молодих хлопців; працювати на чайній плантації; у горах; привозити пошту здалеку; одержувати пошту; через досить тривалі проміжки часу; одержувати багато листів з кожною поштою; із заздрістю спостерігати; перебрати листи і вибрати одне з них; розбудуватися; ця моя справа; трохи посперечатися; не відступати від своїх прав; розсердитися;  прикласти всі зусилля; ще раз обговорити це питання; мати намір залишити лист собі; суперечити принципам.

 

KEY STRUCTURES AND WORD STUDY

 

Ex 4  Give the four forms of the following verbs.

 

say, pay, write, think, buy, let, take, read, argue, agree, give, sell, tell, take, choose, find, feel, break, upset, keep, mean.

 

Ex 5   Make up five groups of three words associated in meaning or area of usage.

 

incident     packet                  silence        idea            belief                   

form           quiet                    opinion       stillness      parcel

package     configuration       happening shape          accident

 

Ex 6   Fill in the blanks with 'surprised' or 'surprising'.

 

1. When we came in she gave us a — look. She didn't expect us back so early. 2. The story had a most — end. 3. If his assistant was — at the question, he never showed it. 4. It is — how quickly he learns things. 5. To tell you the truth, we were a bit — to hear him say that he could do without any help. 6. There's really nothing — about the incident; it's what everybody expected to happen.

 

Ex 7  Recast the following sentences, using verbs instead of nouns. Make all necessary changes.

 

1. Did you hear her say anything about the time of her return? 2. When I asked him for help I never expected to hear a refusal. 3. We had a feeling that something unexpected might happen. 4. You gave mea surprise when you said that you had never heard the name of this writer before. 5. They quickly came to an agreement on all the questions. 6. He got "excellent" for his first exam; that was a good start. 7. I am afraid I don't exactly understand your meaning. 8. If he's made a promise, you can be sure he will keep it. 9. After his explanation the grammar rule became quite clear to me. 10. Have you taken any decision yet? 11. I can't give you a very good description of the place as I have been there only once. 12. I don't like your choice, the colour is too bright.

 

Ex 8   Complete the following, using words and phrases opposite in meaning.

 

1. "He never did anything to help." "That's where you are wrong, he — ." 2. "Can he keep a promise?" "I've never known him — one." 3. You may be sure that he is telling you the truth, he has never — in his life. 4. I've found the umbrella which I thought I — . It was behind the door all the time. 5. I am eager to buy at least one of his pictures, if he agrees — of course.

 

 

Ex 9   Translate the following into English, using a suitable phrasal verb.

 

 think over, talk over, look over

 

1. Вони мені відповіли, що не зможуть прийняти ніякого рішення, поки   не зважать (обміркують).
2. А що, якщо обговорити наш план з деканом і послухати, що він скаже.
3. Питання досить серйозне. Треба подумати.
4. Їй не потрібно було передивлятися ті листи, що лежали на столі. Того листа, на який вона чекала, там не було.
5. Питання його трохи здивувало. Він оглянув незнайомця, перш ніж відповісти.
6. Він оглянув машину. Усе було гаразд, можна було вирушати.

 

Ех 10  Compare the meaning of the words in bold type with words of the same root in UKrainian. Translate the sentences.

 

1. What is his main argument against the arrangement? 2. The sports­man is in good form today. 3. How did the incident happen? 4. We all agreed that it was a matter of principle. 5. This medicine is to be taken four times a day at regular intervals. 6. This news was a great surprise to them all. 7. I have no idea what he meant by his words.

 

Ex 11  Translate the following sentences using 'leave', 'keep', 'stay' according to the sense.

 

1. Він залишив речі на вокзалі і пішов за таксі.
2. Чому ви не хочете залишитися в нас ще на декілька днів?
3. Мені потрібні тільки два журнали. Інші ви можете залишити собі.
4. Тому що він був серйозно хворий, йому довелося залишити інститут на деякий час.
5. Залишіть ці листи в секретаря. Він передасть їх директору, як тільки той повернеться.
6. Він не міг більше залишатися в Ялті, тому що не виносить липневої спеки.
7. Облиште свої жарти. Зараз не час жартувати.
8. Він ніколи не залишить товариша в небезпеці.
9. Не заперечуєте, якщо я залишу собі вашу фотографію?
10. Залишіть її. Займіться своєю справою.
11. Залишайтеся на місцях. Нічого небезпечного не відбулося.
12. Залиши все як є, без змін.

 

Ех 12   Paraphrase the following according to the model.

 

Model:        He broke the silence and asked what the letter was about.

He broke the silence asking...

 

1. He left the town and promised to come back soon. 2. The man and the woman sat at the table. They were looking into each other's eyes. 3. The child ran into the room. He was pulling a toy horse behind him. 4. The man sat by the fire. He was thinking the matter over. 5. She didn't agree to the arrangement but refused to explain why. 6. The members of the committee stood up and followed the president into the conference room. 7. When he was a boy he used to sit on the bank and watch the boats move slowly down the river. 8. The runners stood in line and wait­ed for the start signal.

 

Ex 13  Study the following phrases and (a) recall the sentences in which they are used in the text, (b) use them in sentences of your own.

 

think/look over sth; talk sth over with sb; work on a plantation (a farm); a good (long, short) way off; by mail; come into one's head; at once; find out about sth; by the way; at least; a letter from sb; a bit of an argument (news); (months, weeks, days, etc)go by; at last; make up one's mind; pay for sth; against one's principles (plans, etc).

 

Ex 14    Fill in the blanks with prepositions or adverbs.

 

(A) 1. I always find it difficult to make myself agree — something that is — my principles. 2. If he has made — his mind, you can be sure he will have things his own way. 3. They noticed — once — some sur­prise that the move — East London — West London was more than just a change — address. It was like moving — another world. 4. There is nothing the matter — me today, nothing — all, I've a bit — a head­ache, that's all. 5. She had meant to talk things — — him, but as time went — she felt less sure she could do it. 6. The farm is a long way — and he has promised to take me there — his car one — these days. 7. What I found — — him was the biggest surprise I'd ever had — my whole life. 8.1 am not quite sure whether you are — or — our plan. 9. Here you are — last! We've lost all hope of seeing you. 10. I wonder what has suddenly come — your head to make you change your mind like that. 11. It was difficult to say what was — his mind and what he would do next. 12. You must choose — a trip — the South and a sea cruise, you can't have both. 13. Why are you so upset — his refusal to come — the party? 14. — my mind that's not the main idea — the book. 15. I never meant to join them — their argument until I felt it was becoming too heated. 16. You will be surprised — the great progress he has made lately! 17. You, as head — the expedition, must always keep your head even if the rest — the men are losing theirs. 18. I never heard him say a single word — the arrangement. He likes it, I suppose.

 

(B) "— the way, Arthur", Mrs Shelby asked her husband, "who was that fellow we had — dinner today and what is his business — our house?"

"It's Haley. I am selling some — my people — him. He wanted to have Uncle Tom and Harry, Eliza's little boy. I had a bit — an ar­gument — him but I must let him have anyone he likes."

Eliza heard what Mr Shelby told his wife. She took her son, a few clothes, and left the house — her little son.

When Mr Shelby asked to fetch Eliza the next morning, they couldn't find her anywhere. — that time she was already — her way — Ohio. Her son was sleeping — her arms waking — from time to time and ask­ing his mother where they were going.

— the afternoon Eliza walked — a small boat house — the river.

"Isn't there a boat that takes people over — Ohio?" she asked. "I'll give you a dollar if you let me have a boat."

"You can't cross the river — this weather. The ice is breaking. Why are you so eager to get — ?"

Eliza refused to say anything. She looked — — the window and saw Haley coming — the steps. She caught up her child, left the boat house — the back door and ran — the river. — a moment she was — the ice. She saw nothing, felt nothing but continued running until she saw the Ohio side and a man helping her up the bank.

(After "Uncle Tom's Cabin" by H. В Stowe)

 

Ex 15    Fill in the blanks with a suitable word. Use the correct form. Translate the sentences into Ukrainian.

 

mean (3), meaning, keep v (2), refuse (2), refusal, fetch, agree (2), against, argument, hand v, return v (2), break v (2), join, mind u, choose, follow, upset, surprised, eager

 

1. If you want your money to be safe, — it in the bank. 2. He wasn't at all sure that he really — what he said. 3. His — to talk the matter over was a bit of a surprise to us all. 4. She was awfully — to hear that there were no letters in the mail for her. 5. Her son would be — any minute now. She must start getting the dinner ready. 6. He just — to discuss the matter with me and that was the end of it. 7. The mother was rather — to hear her son — so readily to do the job. She wondered what it could — . 8. We were all most — to finish the job by the end of the week. True enough, it would — longer hours, but we didn't — . 9. Can anybody tell me why she — to — us on the trip? 10. The man took one look at the picture and — it back to the woman. 11. Is the boy big enough to ful­ly understand the true — of what he has done? 12. Could you — me a glass of water? 13. Why does he always have to start an — ? Can't we arrange matters in a quiet way? 14. I had nothing definite — the man. Perhaps, it was just a feeling that I had somewhere deep inside me. 15. "I don't believe they know enough to be able to — the right kind of book for a report. What they need is advice." "I fully — with you. But will they — it?" 16. Running down the steps she fell and — her leg. 17. She promised to — my mail for me until I — from my holiday. 18. Weekly trips to the neighbouring town to a dance or film helped to — the monotony of their life in camp.

 

Ex 16  Replace the Russian words and phrases by suitable English equivalents in the correct form. Retell the passage.

 

Mabel (погодилася) to marry George when he was at home on a holiday. He (повернувся) to Burma and she was to (приєднатися до нього) in six months. George (не мав нічого проти того, щоб почекати). But one difficulty (йшла слідом за) another; (так що) in the end it was seven years before she was able to start. (Йому дуже хотілося) to see Mabel. He (зробив усі необхідні приготування) for the marriage as they were to marry (у день її приїзду) and went down to Rangoon to (привезти) her.

         Then, (раптом) he (передумав). He hаdn't seen Mabel for seven years. He had forgotten (як вона виглядає). She was a (чужа людина). He (відчув) he соuldn't do it. He must tell Mabel that he was sorry, but he (дійсно) соuldn't (стримати свою обіцянку) to marry her. But how could a man (відмовити) a girl after she had travelled six thousand miles to marry him? An idea (прийшла йому в голову). He would write her a letter and she would understand (решту). (Без) any luggage, (лише) in the clothes he was in, he took the first boat to Singapore.

         The letter Mabel got was (наступного змісту): DEAREST MABEL, I AM AWAY ON BUSINESS AND DОN'T KNOW WHEN I SHALL BE BACK. (Раджу повернутися) TO ENGLAND. YOUR LOVING GEORGE.

         But when he (прибув в) Singapore they (негайно) (вручили) him a telegram: QUITE UNDERSTAND. LOVE, MABEL. George (був чимало здивований і розсерджений). He understood that she (їде слідом за) him. (Виходить, справи обстояли таким чином): she had promised to marry him and (мала намір здійснити це). He had to think (швидко). There was not a moment (втрачати). No, no, he was not so easy (піймати). He (вирішив) (вибрати) a place (далеко від) where he was now. (Принаймні) he would be safe there.

         He went to Cheng-tu. After a long and difficult journey he could rest (нарешті). He (насолоджувався) his stay. He believed that he (був поза небезпекою). The weeks (проходили) one after the other.

One day the heavy doors of the Consulate opened and Mabel came in. George went pale. He looked this way and that. She went up to him.

  “You (нітрохи не змінився),” she said. Then she (повернулася к) the Consul."Are you the Consul?"

"Yes."

"That's all right. I'm ready to marry him as soon as I've had a bath." And she did.

(After "Mabel" by W. Somerset Maugham)

 

Ex 17   Speak on the following topics. Use the words and phrases given below.

 

1. Life on the Tea Plantation

two young fellows; work on a tea plantation; grow tea; be situated; high up in the hills; have a dull (unexciting) life; be eager to get letters; enjoy getting letters; break the monotony of one's life; get the mail at rather long intervals; have to fetch the mail from a good way off.

 

2. The Two Young Fellows

 

Adams: get a lot of letters by every mail; be pleased; have a lot of friends (relatives, business contacts); look for a new job; enjoy writing letters; feel sorry for sb.

Brown: be eager to get just one letter; watch sb enviously; wait (hope) for a letter; need sth badly; feel unhappy; almost lose all hope.

 

3. Brown Gets an Idea

 

make up one's mind to do sth; suddenly; come into one's head (of an idea); think of a way to get a letter; be ready to pay for sth; take a decision; talk the matter over with sb; come to an agreement (arrange­ment) with sb.

 

4. Adams Agrees to Sell a Letter

 

like sb's idea; be pleased with the arrangement; have no principles; look for easy ways to make money; be ready to sell anything for money; not think of what may happen; come in (of the mail); keep one's promise; at once; hand the packet of letters to sb; let sb choose a letter from the pack­et; get back the rest of the letters; feel happy about sth.

 

5. Brown Chooses His Letter

 

pay the money; look over the letters; in silence; choose a letter; be all the same to sb; return all the letters except one; pass into sb's hands (of the letter); look through sth; without saying a single word; learn a surprising bit of news; keep quiet about sth.

 

6. Adams Wants His Letter Back

 

think sth over; change one's mind about sth; be eager to find out about sth; an important letter; an important piece of news; want sth back very badly; make an awful mistake; join sb; break the silence with a question; be sure that ...; not expect sth to happen; be rather surprised and upset; get excited; do one's best to make sb understand sth; have a bit of an argument; be unable to do sth; get angry with sb; be unable to stand sth any longer; be ready to return the money; follow sb into his office; hope to buy the letter back; lose hope; be a good lesson to sb.

 

 

 

 

7. Brown Refuses to Return the Letter

 

a hard man; have one's own ideas about business; one's business principles; as follows; be against one's principles; a business agreement-believer have full rights to sth; stand on one's rights; argue with sb about sth; mean that ...; expect sb to keep his promise; be unable to un­derstand sth; refuse to discuss the matter any further; keep the letter.

 

Ex 18   Test translation.

 

1. Ви не зможете перекласти цю статтю без словника. Принесіть, будь ласка, з читального залу кілька словників для всієї групи. 2. Ви повинні негайно піти за лікарем. Їй стало гірше. 3. – Ви можете викласти (дати) основну ідею книги в декількох словах? – Це досить важко, але я спробую. 4. – Ви не заперечуєте, якщо я поверну вам решту грошей через тиждень? – Добре. 5. Їм дуже сподобалася наша ідея відправитися по Волзі. Вони відразу ж вирішили приєднатися до нас. 6. Я не можу погодитися з ним. На мою думку, він не правий. 7. Він завжди сповнений ідей, і я повинен сказати, що деякі з них дійсно цікаві. 8. Послухай, ти не знаєш, у якому магазині продаються географічні карти? 9. Дозволите мені здати роботу наступного тижня. Мені треба переглянути її ще раз. 10. Допоможіть мені, будь ласка, вибрати краватку. Для мене це завжди проблема. 11. У московському «Будинку Книги» завжди великий вибір книг з різних питань. 12. Не будемо сперечатися про це зараз. Ми повернемося до цього питання, як тільки закінчимо книгу. 13. Я дуже шкодую, що не дотримався своєї обіцянки. 14. Чому ви мовчали? Адже ви хотіли виступити. 15. Я не розумію, що означає його мовчання. 16. Ми були дуже здивовані його несподіваним від'їздом. 17. Я відразу ж помітив, що жінка чимось засмучена. 18. Вони сперечалися, принаймні, дві години, але так і не дійшли згоди. 19. До речі, чому ви відмовилися від нашої допомоги? Вам буде важко закінчити роботу до кінця місяця. 20. Проходили тижні один за одним, а листів від нього усе не було. 21. Нічого не змінюйте у своїй доповіді. Залишіть усе як є. 22. Нарешті усе було готове, і можна було вирушати. 23. Чому ви не наслідували приклад своїх товаришів і не зарахувалися в спортклуб? Вам це потрібно більше, ніж будь-кому іншому. 24. Наш план дуже простий. Він полягає в наступному. 25. Наступними після його виступу йшли запитання. 26. За телеграмою йшов лист. 27. Я не очікував, що моя звістка так засмутить її. 28. Не сердитеся на нього. У нього були найкращі наміри. 29. Вона не могла дочекатися, щоб розповісти їм останні новини. 30. – Ви не будете заперечувати, якщо я залишу у вас свої речі до повернення? – Анітрошки. 31. – Що означає слово get? – Воно має кілька значень. 32. Я не можу повірити, що наше рішення для нього нічого не означає. 33. – Як трапилося, що він зламав собі ногу? – Гадки не маю. 34. Ти помітив, як він пройшов і не привітався? Цікаво, що це може означати? 35. Я утомився і був не в змозі сперечатися з ним. 36. Не ходить за таксі, у нас досить часу, і ми можемо поїхати на метро. Потяг відправляється лише через годину.

 

GRAMMAR

Model Verbs and Their Equivalents

Must, Can and May

 

Ex 19   Study the following chart.

 

Modal verb	Meaning	Examples
must must not (= mustn't)	duty, obligation necessity order prohibition	We must study hard. I must buy some bread. You must go there at once. You mustn't smoke here.
can cannot (= can't) could could not (= couldn't)	ability capability   permission prohibition	I can run very fast. He could walk miles and miles when he was young. We can speak English. Can I have a cup of coffee? You can come at any time. You can't cross the street here.
may may not (= mayn't) might might not (= mightn't)	permission request prohibition (very sharp)	You may speak to him now. May I smoke here? You may not take books away from the reading-hall. He said (that) I might come to see you any time before lunch.

 

Ex 20  Practise answers to the following questions according to the model.

 

Model 1:     Must I go there by an early train? (take the 10:30}

1. (a) Yes, you must. (b) I am afraid, you must.

2. No, you needn't. You may take the 10:30.

 

1. Must I make up my mind today? (give the answer tomorrow). 2. Must he explain to them how to use this machine? (read the instructions). 3. Must I take your advice? (do as you please). 4. Must they stay after classes? (go home). 5. Must I take all my things now? (leave behind what you don't need). 6. Must she pay all the money now? (pay only part of the sum). 7. Must I let them know at once? (tomorrow). 8. Must I go to him to discuss the arrangements? (phone).

 

Model 2*:    May I wait for him here?

1. (a) Yes, you may. (b) All right, of course, you may (can).

2. (a) No, you can't. (b) I am afraid you can't.

 

1. May I smoke here? 2. May he take his examination in English before the 1st of June? 3. May we try another method? 4. May we take the delegation about the town now? 5. May I cross the street here? 6. May I take this seat? 7. May we call on you a bit later? 8. May I join you?

 

Model 3:     Peter can speak English and what about you?

(a) I can speak English too.

(b) I can't. I can't speak English (at all).

 

1. He can run very fast, and what about you? 2. They can translate political articles without a dictionary, and what about you? 3. I can shoot very well, and what about you? 4. She can read very fast, and what about them? 5.1 can work anywhere, and what about you? 6. I can come very early, and what about them?

 

Ex 21  Fill in the blanks with 'can' ('could'), 'must', 'may' ('might'). Make use of the suggestions in brackets.

 

1. — I get a job at your office? (possibility). 2. — I think the question over? (request). 3. You — not argue with her. (prohibition). 4.1 — not make him agree to our plan. (inability). 5. He — tell you about the new director. He knows him well enough, (ability). 6. We — help each other, (obligation). 7. I asked the hotel service if I — have a cup of coffee in my room. (possibility). 8. You — use my scooter when­ever you like. I don't need it now. (permission). 9. I — sell my bicy­cle, I need money badly, (necessity). 10. Passengers — not walk across the railway line. (prohibition). 11. All the students — study hard. (du­ty). 12. She asked if she — call on you a bit later, (request).

 

Ex 22   Translate the following sentences.

 

1. Усі студенти повинні здати курсові роботи до 1-го квітня. 2. Я не можу їй вірити. Вона занадто часто говорить неправду. 3. Ви не повинні тут курити. Тут діти. 4. Він може читати будь-яку літературу англійською мовою. 5. – Можна нам приєднатися до вас у цій поїздці? – (1)Звичайно. (2)Боюся, що це неможливо. 6. Ви можете користуватися моєю бібліотекою. 7. – Він повинні відправити їй телеграму сьогодні? – (1)Так. (2) Ні. Він може відправити її завтра. 8. Ми усе обговорили і тепер можемо йти. 9. Я не можу обійтися без їхньої поради. 10. Ви повинні здавати письмові роботи вчасно.

 

Have to*

 

Ex 23   Study the following chart.

 

necessity duty obligation absence of neces­sity

He has Do you often have You don't have I shall have He had Did she have

to get up early. to go to town? to come on Sundays to go to the doctor to wait for you nearly an hour. to help her younger, broth­er?

 

Ex 24  Ask questions indicated in the brackets.

 

1. He has to watch his diet. (why) 2. After the operation he had to stay in hospital for a long time. (how long) 3. You will have to show him the way to the station. (whom) 4. We had to change trains in Kiev. (where) 5. They do not have to pay for the books at school. (why) 6. All traf­fic has to make way for a fire brigade. (for whom) 7. She has to drink this medicine without sugar. (how) 8. We didn't have to take food with us, there was a good restaurant there. (why)

 

Ex 25  Use 'not have to' for 'needn’t'. Translate the sentences into Russian.

 

1. You needn't follow me in everything. 2. He needn't argue about it. The question is clear. 3. She needn't agree with everything he says. 4. I needn't hand in my report this week. 5. They needn't return home so early. 6. We needn't hand in our compositions today.

 

Ex 26  Practise the following according to the models.

 

Model 1:     She used to help him a lot with his English.

Now she doesn't have to. He knows the language quite well.

 

1. I used to lose a lot of time to get to the office. — 2. When he was a student he used to work mostly in the library. — 3. She used to argue a lot on the subject. — 4. He used to copy a lot of documents by hand. — 5. When she came to live in this country she used to ask a lot of ques­tions. —

 

Model 2:   Now I must think of such things but last year I didn't have to.

 

1. With this new job I must keep a lot of things in my mind, but a few months ago — . 2. Now we must get up very early but during our vacation — . 3. Now she must take a bus to get to the Institute but when she lived in the centre — . 4. Now he must help his parents but a few years ago — . 5. Now I must go to my dentist rather often but when I was your age — .

 

Model 3:   "Do you want to speak at the meeting?"

"I'll have to".

 

1. Is she going to explain why she has been absent a whole week? 2. Will he agree to the operation? 3. Are they going to return by the 1st of September? 4. Will she answer the telegram? 5. Are you going to fol­low his advice? 6. Are you going to wait for the next train?

 

Ex 27  Translate the following sentences on the pattern: 'All you have to do is (to) phone her':

 

1. Єдине, що вам потрібно зробити, це прийняти рішення. 2. Єдине, що йому треба було зробити, це дотриматись нашої поради. 3. Усе, що йому доводилося робити, це доставляти пошту з міста. 4. Єдине, що вам доведеться зробити, це вручити лист секретарю. 5. Єдине, що вам доведеться зробити, це написати адресу.

 

Ех 28  Complete the following sentences with 'have to' or 'must' according to the sense.          

 

1. You (be) kind to the child. 2. "Have you got The Moon and Six­pence by S.Maugham?" "Yes, but it's not mine. I (give) it back next week." 3. He (not forget) that his younger brother follows him in everything. 4. She has just returned from hospital, she (stay) in bed another week. 5. He (not go) far to fetch her. She was always in the garden working. 6. He felt that he (speak) to her. 7. He said that if you wanted to see him, you (come) to him yourself. 8. I (come) myself to talk matters over? 9. You (come) at once, I need your advice. 10. We could work no longer. We (have) a rest.

 

Ex 29  Translate the following sentences using 'have to' or 'must' according to the sense.

 

1. Нам потрібно було повертатися в той же день. 2. Їй доведеться дотриматися поради лікаря і змінити клімат. 3. Йому не довелося вибирати. Він прийшов занадто пізно. 4. Ми не повинні забувати цього. 5. Вам доведеться погодитися з нашим рішенням, подобається воно вам чи ні. 6. Йому довелося припинити сперечатися з ним. 7. Єдине, що тобі треба зробити, це повідомити про день твого приїзду. 8. Ви завжди повинні пам'ятати про це. 9. Єдине, що вам потрібно зробити, це відмовитися від їхньої допомоги. 10. Вам необхідно все добре продумати, перш ніж погодитися на поїздку. 11. Ви можете не поспішати. Потяг запізнюється.

 

Be Able*

 

Ex 30  Complete the following sentences according to the model.

 

Model:        If she helps us, we (finish the work much earlier).

If she helps us, we shall be able to finish the work much ear­lier.

 

1. If you refuse to follow my instructions (not do this in the right way). 2. If he chooses the right book, (make a good report). 3. If they con­tinue to argue, (not discuss all the questions). 4. If she gets well by the end of the week, (join us for the excursion to Pskov). 5. If you phone for a taxi, I (leave later). 6. If she follows the doctor's advice now, (skate again very soon). 7. If he finishes his term paper on Friday, he (hand it in on Monday).

 

Ex 31   Practise the following according to the model.

 

Model:        "Can you speak English?" (by the end of the year).

"Not yet, but I'll be able to by the end of the year."

 

1. Can you hand in your term paper? (by the 15th of March). 2. Can they translate articles from the newspaper? (In the third course). 3. Can you look through my composition now? (in the evening). 4. Can she skate (ski, play tennis, chess) well? (with time). 5. Can we join your sports club now? (in January). 6. Can you follow the speaker? (when I have a little more practice in spoken English).

 

Ex 32  Translate the following sentences, using 'can' ('could'), 'be able'.

 

1. Я зможу повернути вам вашу доповідь після того, як я перегляну її. 2. Інша частина групи зможе піти в музей у суботу. 3. Він саме та людина, що може пояснити вам, що вам потрібно робити. 4. Він не міг зрозуміти, чому всі були так здивовані і засмучені, коли він відмовився від цієї роботи. 5. Ми зуміли закінчити роботу, хоча в нас було дуже мало часу. 6. Де можна дістати цей словник? 7. Він сказав, що не зможе дати відповідь, поки не обміркує все як слід. 8. Вони не відразу зрозуміли, чому ми не зуміли виїхати вчасно. 9. Ми зробимо все можливе, щоб виконати обіцянку. 10. Ви можете повірити мені, я вас не обманюю.

 

 

Be to

 

Ex 33   Study the following chart.

 

plan agreement	The delegates to the conference are to arrive tomorrow. We were to meet at the metro station. He was to join us later on.
prohibition (very sharp)	You are not to go there.

 

Ex 34  Complete the following situations, using 'be to'.

 

Model:    I can't go to the cinema with you. (be at the hospital at five).

I am to be at the hospital at five.

 

1. He won't be present at the meeting tomorrow. (take his examina­tion in English). 2. I had to leave for Leningrad quite unexpectedly, my mother was very ill. (my assistant, continue my work). 3. You needn't start writing the article at once. (but, hand it in next Friday). 4. We'll have to get up early. (leave at 6:30). 5. We were expecting him in Kiev. (join us, on our trip). 6. We didn't want to start the discussion of the book without him. (say a few words about the author). 7. They went there by different roads. (but, meet at the lake, on the same day). 8. Don't let the child watch this film on TV (children, not see such films).

 

Ex 35  Translate the following sentences.

 

1. Ми поїхали туди потягом і повинні були повернутися літаком. 2. Вона їде. Вона буде писати мені два рази на місяць. 3. Він мав бути у лікаря в понеділок. Я не знаю, що він сказав йому. 4. Ви залишитеся тут ще на три дні, а потім я приєднаюся до вас, і ми повернемося разом на машині. 5. Вам не можна розмовляти після операції. 6. Ми домовилися зустрітися на розі вулиці під годинником. 7. Ми повинні були чекати на неї біля входу в метро. 8. Ми домовилися допомогти їй, але вона відмовилася від нашої допомоги. 9. Вона повинна зайти після чотирьох.

 

Mixed Bag

 

Ex 36 Fill in the blanks with modal verbs or their equivalents according to the sense.

 

I. I — not hear very well. Speak louder, please. 2. You — not speak so loudly. I can hear you very well as it is. 3. "— I leave a bit earlier today?" "No, you — ." 4. He told her that she — come and go as she liked. 5. She said she — explain everything later on. 6. I don't know what plan she has in mind but I — know it. 7. You — let the woman pass first when entering the room. 8. He — not agree, nobody was making him. 9. They — argue for a long time before they came to an agreement. 10. You — speak louder if you want them to hear you.

 

Ex 37  Use Reported Speech.

 

1. He asked her: "May I have your telephone number?" 2. She said: "I can't choose. I must take it as it is." 3. She said to him: "As you grow older you'll be able to understand me." 4. The instructor said: "She may continue the work she has begun." 5. They asked him: "Where can we find you if we need you?" 6. Mother said: "I have to repeat the same thing to you several times before you understand what I want from you." 7. The father said to the child: "What are you doing here so late? You must be in bed." 8. He said: "I had to make money at a very early age." 9. "I can't hand the letter just to anybody. I must hand it personally to her," he said. 10. "I can't let you have my bicycle at once, but I'll be able to in a week," she said to him. 11. She said: "Can I use your telephone?"

 

Ex 38  Translate the following sentences, using modal verbs or their equivalents.

 

1. Сучасна людина повинна багато читати і бути освіченою, щоб розуміти поступальний розвиток нашого суспільства. 2. У наш час ми не можемо обходитися без електрики. 3. Якщо ви не вивчите інструкцію, ви можете зламати машину. 4. Ми повинні мати лекції по історії два рази на тиждень, по понеділках і п'ятницях. 5. Він був не прав. Йому довелося погодитися з нами, хоча він був дуже незадоволений. 6. Немає необхідності повторювати мені те саме. Я просто не можу зробити те, що ви хочете. 7. Мені доводиться виїжджати самим раннім потягом, інакше я спізнююся на перший урок. 8. Давайте не будемо сперечатися про це зараз. Ми повинні спочатку вирішити перше питання. 9. Вона зрозуміла, що їй доведеться обговорити з ним цю справу. 10. Оскільки ви тут, можна мені поставити вам кілька питань? 11. Він мав передати гроші секретарю, але я не певен, що він зумів це зробити. 12. У таку сонячну погоду вона не може обходитися без темних окулярів. 13. Ви можете не їсти суп, але другу страву ви повинні покуштувати. 14. Ви не зможете обговорювати цю книгу, поки не прочитаєте її до кінця. 15. Ви можете допомогти мені з моїми речами? 16. Тут курити не можна. Це небезпечно. 17. Невже ти не бачиш, що їй треба працювати?! 18. Як ви можете змушувати його робити те, що проти його принципів?

 

Ех 39  Open the brackets, using the correct tense form. Retell the passage.

 

Mr Kelada was everywhere and always. He (be) certainly the best-hated man on the ship. We (call) him Mr Know-All to his face and he (take) it as a compliment. He (know) everything better than anybody else and it never (come) into his head that he (can) be mistaken.

There (be) four of us at table. A man (call) Ramsay, who (be) as dog­matic as Mr Kelada, his wife, and myself. Ramsay (be) in the American Consular Service and now he (be) on his way back to Japan after he (fetch) his wife from New York where she (spend) a year at home. Mrs Ramsay (be) a very pretty little thing with pleasant manners who (know) how to wear her clothes. She (be dressed) very simply because the Consular Service (be) ill-paid.

On that evening, while we (sit) all at dinner, we (start) speaking about pearls. There (be) in the papers lately a good deal of talk about the cul­ture pearls which the Japanese (make). Mr Kelada (fell) us all that was to be known about pearls. Mr Ramsay (know) nothing about them at all, I (believe), but he (start) a heated argument with Mr Kelada. At last something that Mr Ramsay (say) made Mr Kelada so angry that he (cry out):

"I (know) what I (talk) about. I (go) to Japan just to look into this Japanese pearl business. I (be) in the trade."

That (be) news for us, because Mr Kelada never (tell) anyone what his business (be). He (look) round the table triumphantly.

"You take my word for it," he (continue), "that chain Mrs Ramsay (wear) never (be worth) a cent less than it is now. I (notice) it at once. If you (buy) it on Fifth Avenue I (be) sure it (be) worth anything up to thirty thousand."

Mr Ramsay (smile): "You (be surprised) to hear that my wife (buy) this chain at a department store the day before we (leave) New York, for eighteen dollars."

"Let me (look) at the chain," Mr Kelada (ask), "and if it (be) imita­tion, I (tell) you quickly enough."

"Take it off, dear," (say) Mr Ramsay. "Let Mr Kelada (look) at it as much as he (want)."

I (have) a sudden feeling that something unpleasant (be going) to happen. Mrs Ramsay (take) the chain off and Mr Ramsay (hand) it to Mr Kelada. Mr Kelada (take) a magnifying glass* from his pocket and (examine) the chain. There (be) a smile of triumph on his face. He (hand) back the chain. He (be going) to speak when he suddenly (catch) the look of terror in Mrs Ramsay's eyes; her face (turn) quite white. I (wonder) why her husband (not notice) anything.

Mr Kelada (stop) with his mouth open. "I (make) a mistake," he (say). "It (be) a very good imitation."

(After "Mr Know-All" by W. S. Maugham)

 

Ex 40   Rewrite (or retell) in narrative form.

BLACKMAIL

The great liner stopped some way from the port. The captain said to the passengers: "You can visit the port if you want to, but you must be back on board at 5:30 as the ship is to sail off at 6 o'clock."

The ship was far too big to dock in the port and all day the local boatmen had to take the passengers to and from the liner.

At about 5 o'clock Miss Merryweather made up her mind to return to the liner.

"Will you take me over to the liner?" she asked a boatman.

"I shall, for 5 dollars."

"Isn't it a bit too expensive? I can pay you 3 dollars. If you don't agree, I can always take another boat."

After a good deal of arguing the boatman agreed to take her over for 3 dollars.

When they were about two hundred yards from the liner, the boat stopped.

"Is anything the matter?" asked Miss Merryweather.

"Nothing at all," the boatman answered. "Either you pay me 5 dol­lars, or you can sit here and watch the ship sail away without you."

(After "Graded Oral Comprehension Exercises" by L. G. Alexander)

 

The Article

 

with parts of the body

 

Ex 41  Study the chart.

 

She has a weak heart. The heart of the patient needs an operation. When the heart stops, the man dies. Don't take the news close to heart.

 

Ex 42 Fill in the blanks with the words given in brackets with an appropriate      article (where necessary).

 

1. (і) You can hear — of this announcer every day on the radio. (ii) She speaks in — pleasant — with a slight accent. (voice). 2. (і) The student must always keep a dictionary close at — . (ii) We shook —. — she gave me was dry and cold. It was — small — for an athletic-looking person, (hand). 3. (і) — of the woman looks familiar to me. (ii) A boy with — sunburnt — , a rucksack on his back, stood in front of  me. (face). 4. (і) The child had big blue eyes and — turned up — . (ii) — of the elephant is called the trunk, (nose). 5. (і) He had — of a think­er. (ii) The boy has — good — on his shoulders, (iii) Who is at — of the expedition? (head). 6. (і) You don't have to learn the text by — , just retell it in your own words, (ii) She has — good — for a woman her age. (heart).

 

Ex 43  Make up sentences of your own on the chart with the nouns 'mouth', 'eye', 'ear', 'foot'.

 

Ex 44  Fill in the blanks with the definite article or a possessive pronoun.

 

1. The old man put — hand on — shoulder of his grandson and they slowly walked away. 2. The doctor took the sick man by — hand and felt — pulse. 3. Take the child by — hand when crossing the street. 4. I was watching — face of the man, — face was red with anger. 5. The boatman pulled the man out of the water by — hair. 6. — hair is gold­en, like her mother's. 7. I looked at the man sitting in front of me. — neck was strong, it was — neck of a boxer. 8. She liked — face; it was — face of a man who knew his mind. 9. He gave the door a hard push with — shoulder. 10. The singer was famous not only for — voice, he was a fine actor as well. 11. — voice behind the closed door asked us what we wanted. 12. He put — foot in the door and it wouldn't close.

 

Ex 45  Translate the following.

 

1. Give me a hand and we shall finish the work in no time. 2. The young man has a good head for figures. 3. The child made a face when she saw the bottle of medicine. 4. A hunter needs a dog with a good nose. 5. Will you keep an eye on the child? 6. The pupil is at the foot of the class. 7. She is known as a woman with a kind heart. 8.I don't have the heart to tell him the whole truth. 9. I have no voice in the matter. 10. You have described him to a hair. 11. He is a good man at heart.

 

READING

 

Ex 46  Read the text, and do the assignments coming after it.

 

ELEMENTS OF THE NOVEL

 

In analyzing a novel, we note a number of basic elements which the author has developed in his narrative. These elements are theme, plot, characterization, setting, and conflict.

The theme is the main idea behind the story presented in the novel. This is sometimes described as the author's "message" or "thesis" or the "moral" of the book. In most novels, the theme is not stated in so many words, but if the author has handled his materials well, the read­er is in no doubt as to what the novel must tell him. Thus, the theme of Uncle Tom's Cabin is the evils of slavery; the theme of The Catcher in the Rye is the feelings of a teenager in conflict with the society in which he lives.

A novel is basically a story. The plot of a novel is the sequence of imaginary events which make up the story. The novelist must plan this sequence of events carefully, not only to hold the interest of his reader but also to show the psychology of his characters and to express the idea or theme which lies behind the story. As the plot devel­ops, it reaches a high point or climax, which is followed by a dénoue­ment. To be effective, the plot must be believable. The reader must believe that the events described are really taking place, and that each event develops naturally from those that come before it.

Some novelists give more importance than others to the plot or story line. W.Somerset Maugham, for example, said that the heart of every novel lies in its story.

The characters, of course, are the people in the novel, presented to the reader by the author. It is through the people that the theme is ex­pressed and the action of the novel is carried forward. The reader can be interested in a novel and can be moved only if the novelist can make the characters "come alive".

To make us "see" and understand his characters, a novelist uses de­scription, dialogue, and the reactions expressed by the other characters. Perhaps the most important method of portrayal is the way in which the character reacts to the situations and problems presented in the novel.

(From "Comprehensive English in Review" by Joseph R. Orgel)

 

Assignments

 

(a) Define each of the following. (Look for the definitions in the text.)    

 

1. narrative. 2. theme. 3. plot. 4. characterization. 5. climax. 6. char­acter.

 

(b) Match the following words with their definitions.

 

setting conflict sequence          dénouement   portrayal

the order in which things or events are arranged representation through the use of words final stage, where everything is made clear, in the development of the plot of a story, play, etc the physical and social background against which the characters live and the action (or plot) takes place the clash of opposing ideas, interests, etc

    

(c) Quickly look through the list and mark the lettered phrase nearest in meaning to the word or phrase tested.

 

1. Handle: (i) hand; (ii) use; (iii) misuse.

2. Imaginary: (i) real; (ii) unreal; (iii) carefully arranged.

3. Make up: (i) use cosmetics; (ii) take up; (iii) comprise.

4. Believable: (i) that can be believed; (ii) believing; (iii) impossible to believe.

5. Take place: (i) take part; (ii) happen; (iii) plan carefully.

6. Move: (i) excite strong feelings; (ii) change one's place of residence; (iii) progress.

 

(d) Choose the answer that expresses most accurately What is stated in the passage. Only one answer is correct.

 

"In most novels, the theme is not stated in so many words, but if the author has handled his materials well, the reader is in no doubt as to what the novel must tell him" means: (i) the theme is usually stated in so many words that, even if the author has handled his materials well, the reader is not at all sure what the novel is about; (ii) the theme is mostly expressed in so few words that though the author has used his materials expertly, the reader is not sure whether he got the message of the novel, or not; (iii) the theme is often only suggested (indicated in­directly), but if the author has made proper use of his materials, the read­er is sure to get the message of the novel.

 

(e) Briefly state the essential elements of the novel. Discuss the importance of each of the elements. Say which element Maugham believed all-important, and why.

 

(f) The message may be presented in two ways: by description and by suggestion. Say which method the author believes to be the more effective, and why. Ex­press your own opinion.

 

(g) Sum up (orally, or in writing) what the text has to say on each of the follow­ing points.

 

1. The structure of a novel. 2. The importance of the plot in a novel. 3. The role of the characters in a novel, and the methods of character portrayal used by novelists. 4. Making the novel believable.

 

(h) Briefly state the theme of each of the following novels.* Say to which type of novel you believe each of the books belongs. Give your reasons.

 

1. Uncle Tom's Cabin by Harriet Beecher Stowe. 2. The Catcher in the Rye by J.D. Salinger. 3. An American Tragedy by Theodore Drei­ser. 4. The Iron Heel by Jack London. 5. Treasure Island by Robert Louis Stevenson. 6. The Three Musketeers by Alexander Dumas. 7. Jane Eyre by Charlotte Bronte. 8. Oliver Twist by Charles Dickens. 9. Ivanhoe by Sir Walter Scott. 10. The Nest of the Gentry by Ivan Turgenev. 11. War and Peace by Leo Tolstoy. 12. Quiet Flows the Don by Mikhail Sholokhov.

 

Types of Novels**

 

1. The romance or romantic novel. 2. The historical novel. 3. The realistic novel. 4. The psychological novel. 5. The adventure novel (sometimes called the novel of incident). 6. The sociological novel (also called the problem novel).

 

(i) Discuss what makes a good novel.

 

(j) Write a close summary of the text.

 

For this: 1. Read through the passage carefully, making sure that you know all the words and exactly what they mean. 2. Read it through again to discover what is the main line of thought. 3. Underline the words and phrases which are essential and must go into the close summary. 4. Draw a line through the words and phrases which are not essential. 5. Of the words left some may be put in, perhaps in a different form, others will have to be left out.

 

Ex 47  Read the following carefully, consulting the dictionary, if necessary. Lo­cate the main idea in each paragraph as you go along. Write a summary of the article.

 

LANGUAGE OF COMMUNICATION

 

The Soviet Union has no official language. All the languages are equal, irrespective of how many people use them. Historically, the situation is the following: Russian — as the language spoken by the country's largest nation, the language of a people with long years of statehood, with rich revolutionary traditions, and with a high degree of economic, scientific and cultural development, and highly developed social rela­tions—has become the language of communication in the USSR.

The great popularity of the Russian language has made classical and Soviet Russian literature accessible to everyone living in the USSR. It has also made works by people of other nationalities in the country and abroad accessible through Russian translations. All the great lit­erature of the world has been translated into Russian. A quarter of the world's scientific literature appears in Russian. The Chukchi writer Yuri Rytheu says this about the Russian language: "Russian has allowed those of us writing in different languages to know one another well. The reciprocal enrichment of our literary experience flows through the Russian language and through books in Russian. The publication of any book in our country in Russian means access to the general reader­ship."

The importance of the Russian language in the USSR is not limited •to culture. It plays a tremendously important role in the political and economic spheres of international cooperation. Comprehensive econom­ic and cultural cooperation between nations and the exchange of political and technical knowledge leads to the enrichment of languages, and brings them up to the current level of social progress.

The Constitution of the USSR grants the people the right to use their own mother tongue and languages spoken by other Soviet peoples. Of­ficial correspondence and legal proceedings are conducted in the lan­guages of the respective Union or Autonomous Republic, Autonomous Region, Autonomous Area or in the language spoken by the majority of the local population.

 

SPEECH AND COMPOSITION

 

Ex 48  Answer the following questions, using the vocabulary of the lesson. Sum up the answers (orally, or in writing).

 

ON WRITING LETTERS

 

1. Do you often write letters? What do you like more: to write let­ters or to get them? 2. Do you enjoy writing letters? Why do some people say they can't stand writing letters? Is it true about you? 3. Do you write letters home (to your friends) regularly or only when something exciting happens? 4. What are the days of the year when you have to write more letters than usual? 5. Why do people expect to get letters on their birthdays, New Year's day, etc? 6. Do you like to keep old letters? What letters do you usually keep? Why do you keep them?

 

STAMP COLLECTING AS A HOBBY

 

1. When did people start collecting stamps? Why weren't stamps collected in the 18th century? 2. When did you (your friend) start col­lecting stamps? 3. What stamps are worth collecting? 4. How much is an old stamp worth? 5. Do you collect just any stamps or stamps of a definite country, stamps about sports, space flights, famous people, etc? 6. Where do you get stamps: do you buy them at a special shop or exchange them with other collectors? 7. Where do you keep the stamps? How does a stamp album differ from a photo album? 8. Is stamp col­lecting educational?

 

ON LIBRARIES AND BOOKS

 

1. How big. is your family library? Who started it? 2. Who taught you to read and love books? 3. Do you follow any system in your read­ing? 4. What books do you borrow from the Institute library? 5. How long are you allowed to keep a library book? 6. How many public li­braries are there in Kyiv (in your town)? 7. What do you know about the oldest public libraries in the world? Are they as famous nowadays as they used to be?

 

Ex 49 Read and retell the following. Make up questions covering the contents. Speak on the biography of some author.

 

A FRAGMENT OF BIOGRAPHY

 

Maugham was one of the most popular storytellers of our time; he was also one of the world's highest-paid authors.

Among his bestsellers were "Of Human Bondage"* (1915), "The Moon and Sixpence" (1919), "Cakes and Ale"* (1930) and many stories of the life of white settlers in Malaya, India and the South Seas.

William Somerset Maugham was born in Paris in 1874. His father worked at the British Embassy. His parents died when he was still a boy and he went to live with relatives at Canterbury.

After finishing King's, the Cathedral school, he went to Germany to study at Heidelberg University. He returned to England the same year and entered St. Thomas's Hospital in London as a medical student. While a student there he got to know the life of the poor people of Lon­don. He had to work in the Lambeth slums which he described so well in his first novel "Liza of Lambeth"* (1897).

In 1897, after five years at St. Thomas's Hospital he went to Spain to learn Spanish and write another book. He had decided to become a writer.

The next ten years were very hard. But then a great change came into his life. The manager of the Court Theatre in London agreed to take Maugham's play just to keep his theatre open for a few weeks. The play made Maugham famous. Soon four of his plays were on at different London theatres. Maugham made up his mind to continue writing plays for the rest of his life. But five years later he started on the longest of all his novels "Of Human Bondage". "Of Human Bondage" is more than a si­tuation; it is a life, and it is in many respects the author's life.

The book tells the story of the first thirty years of Maugham's life. His hero, Philip Carey, goes to school in England and Germany, tries to paint for some time in Paris, returns to London to study medicine, and leaves the reader at the end to continue happily as a doctor in the country. Maugham himself said that the novel "Of Human Bondage" was his best.

He died in 1965 at his villa at Cap Ferrat in the South of France where he had lived since 1930.

 

Ex 50  Read the following. Answer the questions. Retell the passage in English.

 

ЗВІДКИ З’ЯВИВСЯ КОНВЕРТ?

 

         У 1820 році власник паперового магазина в м.Брайтоні (Англія) Бревер задумався над тим, як змусити покупців частіше заходити в його магазин. Він вирішив побудувати у вітрині піраміду з паперових аркушів усіляких розмірів. мешканцям міста ця ідея дуже сподобалася. Вдень і вночі біля вітрини зупинялися люди. Справи у власника магазина пішли відмінно, усі тепер купували в нього для листів маленькі листочки – один з таких листочків вінчав його красуню піраміду.

         Однак листочки були дуже малі, і на них було важко розміщати адресу. Це навело Бревера на думку виготовити з папера щось подібне до мішечків, у які можна було б вкладати листи.

         Він виготовив такі мішечки і став безкоштовно вручати їх покупцям. Мішечки мали величезний успіх і з того часу, посилаючи листи, усі стали користуватися конвертами. До речі, слово «конверт» у російській мові відбулося від англійського дієслова “to cover”.

 

Questions

 

1. When did it all start? 2. Mr. Brever had a stationary shop in Bright­on, didn't he? 3. What could people buy at his shop? 4. What idea came into his head one day? 5. Why did he build a pyramid in his shop window? 6. What was it made of? 7. How big was the sheet (piece) of paper at the top of the pyramid? 8. How did the people of Brighton like his idea? 9. Why did they stop at the shop window during the day and even at night? 10. Why did people start buying more at the shop? 11. What gave Brever the idea to make paper bags? 12. What were the bags for? 13. Did Brever sell the bags or could people get them at his shop for nothing? 14. Where did people write the address now? 15. What made the envelope popular? 16. Can you do without an envelope now if you want to send a letter? 17. By the way, how did the word «конверт» come into the Russian language?

 

Ex 51    Act as interpreter. Sum up the dialogue.

 

A: I believe that postal arrangements in the Ukraine are much the same as anywhere else?

В: Так, насправді. З будь-якого міста України можна послати лист, чи листівку або телеграму в будь-яку частину світа.

A: Is there a post office at a hotel, where one can buy envelopes, postcards, stamps, and writing paper?

В: У кожному готелі, як правило, є пошта, де все це можна купити. Ви також можете відправити простий чи рекомендований лист і телеграму.

A: Is there a poste restante* office?

В: Так, на кожній пошті є спеціальне вікно, де ви можете одержати листа до запитання.

A: How many times a day are letter-boxes in Moscow emptied?

В: Як правило, 5 разів на день.

A: How can I make a telephone call to my country?

В: З Києва й інших міст України ви можете подзвонити в будь-яке місто Європи й Америки, а також Австралії, Азії й Африки.

A: Can I book a call from my hotel room or should I go to the trunk-call office?

В: Вам не треба йти на переговорний пункт, ви можете подзвонити з номера готелю.

*poste restante: a post-office department to which letters can be addressed, to remain there until called for

 

Ех 52   Read the text, and explain how letters are addressed if the addressee lives in Britain. Explain to a foreign visitor how letters should be addressed to someone living in the Soviet Union.

 

CRACK THE POSTCODE

 

When you send a letter to someone in Britain, there is an accepted way of writing the address on the envelope. On the top line you write the name of the person you are writing to. On the second line you write the number of the house and the name of the street. The third line is used for the town. The Post Office likes the name of the town to be written in block capitals, LIKE THIS, as it is in the post office of this town that the letter will be handled. The fourth line will have the name of the country. This is sometimes left out when the town is a large or a well-known one such as Manchester, or when the town has given its name to the country, as Leicester and Leicestershire, York and Yorkshire,

On the last line goes the Postcode. The Postcode is a special combi­nation of letters and figures used by the Post Office for sorting and de­livering mail.

So a typical address might look as follows.

 

 

Ex 53   Use the following words and phrases in situations of your own.

 

1. Keeping a Diary

 

by the way; used (to); start a diary; at rather long intervals; forget to continue one's diary; think sth over; make up one's mind; follow the example of famous people; begin to enjoy doing sth; happen; a strange (humorous, exciting) incident; as follows; hope to write a story on some incident; describe one's meetings with people (one's feelings, a jour­ney, places of interest, etc); keep the diary in one's desk.

 

2. Is Honesty Always the Best Policy?

 

be honest with people; to one's mind; always tell the whole truth; be against one's principles to lie; expect others to do the same; make sb change his mind about sth; sometimes it is kinder (better, safer) ...; keep the truth from sb; not say a single word about sth; be dangerous to a person's health; make sb ill; find out about sth; agree with sb; fol­low sb's advice; refuse to do sth; not upset sb.

 

3. Over a Cup of Coffee

 

join sb for a cup of coffee; hand sb a cup; pass the bread and butter; sit in silence; break the silence; one of the fellows; be fond of arguing; start an argument; not agree with sb; laugh at a person's ideas; make sb angry; be upset; refuse to do sth; have one's own ideas about sth; be against one's principles; at last; be unable to stand sth; give sb a piece of one's mind; mean well.

 

Ex 54  Discuss the following, giving your arguments for or against.

 

1. Your friend says that a person must always be true to his princi­ples. You think that a person's principles may sometimes be wrong.

2.Your friend fully agrees with Maugham that a story must have form. You believe that a story only describing some incident is just as good as any other story, or sometimes even better, because it gives food to thought.

 

Ex 55  Subjects for oral and written composition.

 

1. Give character-sketches of (a) Adams; (b) Brown.

2. Retell the story in the person of (a) Adams; (b) Brown; (c) some­body working in the same office with Adams and Brown.

3. Life on the tea plantation.

4. Try to give your own ending to the story.

5. Write a letter to a friend, telling him in short about the incident described in the passage, and giving your own explanation of why it had all happened.

6. Tell a story to illustrate the proverb: "Life is stranger than fic­tion."

7. You go to the post office to post a parcel, send a telegram and to buy a few stamps. Describe how you do it.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

LESSON EIGHT

 

Text: How Einstein Discovered the Law of Relativity (from Ch. Chaplin's Auto­biography).¹                                                   

Grammar: Passive Voice (contd). Perfect Tense Forms. Continuous Tense Forms.

 

HOW EINSTEIN DISCOVERED THE LAW OF RELATIVITY

 

I first met Einstein² in 1926. The great scientist had been invited to California³ to lecture.

I received a telephone call from Universal studios,⁴ saying that Pro­fessor Einstein would like to meet me; I was so thrilled I gladly accepted the invitation. So we met at the Universal studios for lunch, the Pro­fessor, his wife, his secretary and his Assistant Professor.⁵ Mrs Einstein spoke English very well, in fact better than the Professor. She was ex­tremely proud of him and frankly enjoyed being the wife of the great phys­icist. She did not even try to hide the fact.

After lunch, while Einstein was being shown around the studio, Mrs Einstein took me aside and whispered: "Why don't you invite the Pro­fessor to your house? I know he will be delighted to have a nice quiet chat with just ourselves." It was to be a small affair, and I invited only two other friends. At dinner she told me the story of the morning when the theory of relativity first came to his mind.

"The Doctor⁶ came down in his dressing-gown as usual for breakfast but he hardly touched a thing. I thought something was wrong so I asked what was troubling him. 'Darling!' he said, 'I have a wonderful idea.' And after drinking his coffee, he went to the piano and started playing. Now and again he stopped, reached for his pencil, made a few notes, then repeated: 'I've got a wonderful idea, a marvelous⁷ ideal' "I said: 'What's the matter with you? Why don't you tell me what it is?'

"He said, 'I can't tell you yet. I still have to work it out.'"

She told me he continued playing the piano and making notes for half an hour, then he went upstairs to his study, telling her that he did not want anyone to disturb him, and remained there for two weeks.

"Each day I sent him up his meals," she said, "and in the evening he walked a little for exercise,⁸ then returned to his work again."

"At last," she said, "he appeared looking very pale and tired. In his hand he held two sheets of paper. 'That's it!' he told me, putting the sheets of paper on the table. And that was his theory of relativity."

(Adapted)

 

 

 

 

 

NOTES

 

1. Charles Spencer Chaplin, an American actor and film director, was born in 1889 in a poor family in the London East End and at an early age became famous all over the world as a comedian. His most famous films are "A Dog's Life", "The Kid", "The Gold Rush", "City Lights", "Modern Times", and "Limelight". He died in 1977.

2. Albert Einstein, 1879-1955, a great man of science, made famous by his theories of relativity. He was born in Ulm, Germany; received a Nobel prize in physics in 1921, for his work in quantum theory. In 1933 he had to leave his country because of the nazis; he went to the USA where he became a professor at Princeton University.

3. California: the most important of the Pacific States, USA, its capital is Sacramento. The state has several univer­sities.

4. Universal studios: the Universal Film studios in Hollywood.

5. Assistant Professor (AmE): (BrE) Senior Lecturer доцент

6. Doctor: the highest degree given by a university; eg Doctor of (Medicine, Law, etc

1. marvelous (AmE): (BrE) marvellous. It should be noted that there are certain differences in spelling usage between American and British English. Compare:

 

AmE:	traveler;	dialog;	color;	BrE:	traveller;	dialogue;	colour;
	neighbor;	theater;	defense;		neighbour;	theatre;	defence;
	organize,	etc.			organise,	etc.

 

8. exercise: моціон In this meaning the noun is uncountable.

                      

VOCABULARY

 

discover vt 1. відкривати, знаходити discover an island (a new con­tinent; a new deposit of oil, coal, gold, etc); 2. обнаруживать; раскры­вать discover a mistake (the truth, facts, etc) We discovered that it was too late to catch the train; discovery n открытие Phr make a discovery сделать открытие

law n 1. закон; правило Laws tell people what they must do and what they must not do. Phr observe (break) the law соблюдать (нару­шать) закон; 2. право, юриспруденция international law, law of na­tions международное право; law merchant торговое право; 3. право (как предмет науки) study law; a law department; a law student

first adv 1. впервые, первый раз When did you first meet him (= When did you meet him for the first time)? Phr at first первое время, сначала I didn't like the place at first; 2. первым делом, сначала First we shall have lunch and then talk. Phr first of all прежде всего, в первую оче­редь

scientist n ученый; science n наука; scientific а научный

invite vt приглашать invite sb to dinner (one's house, a conference, the cinema, etc); He invited me to take part in the experiment.

receive vt 1. получать receive a letter (an invitation, an answer; money, news, etc); 2. принимать (кого-н) receive a visitor (delegation, guest, etc); reception n 1. получение; 2. прием, принятие Phr hold a reception устроить прием

accept vt принимать, одобрять (соглашаться) accept help (money, a plan, an offer, a suggestion, an invitation; prices, etc); acceptance п. принятие; одобрение; (un)acceptable а (неприемлемый The price for the goods is acceptable to us.

proud а гордый a proud man (look, etc) Phr be proud of sb (sth) He is proud of his son; pride n Phr take pride in sb (sth) гордиться кем-н (чем-н)

frank а искренний, откровенный, открытый a frank face (look, smile, etc) Phr be frank with sb быть искренним (откровенным) с кем-н; frankly adv откровенно Phr frankly speaking откровенно говоря

hide vt/vi (hid, hidden) прятать(ся), скрывать(ся) hide a letter (a book; one's feelings; the truth; a person, etc); What is he hiding from us? Where is she hiding?

whisper vi/vt шептать, говорить шепотом You don't have to whis­per, say it out loud; whisper sth in sb's ear; whisper n шепот Phr in a whisper шепотом

affair n дело; занятие Don't discuss your personal affairs with stran­gers. Phr international affairs международные дела; home (domestic) affairs внутренние дела; public affairs общественные дела; Ministry of Foreign Affairs Министерство иностранных дел; Ministry of Home Affairs Министерство внутренних дел

hardly adv 1. едва, с трудом Не was so tired that he could hardly move; 2. едва ли, вряд ли; мало, редко This is hardly the truth. She hardly ever goes visiting now.

touch vt 1. трогать, дотрагиваться, прикасаться Не didn't let any­body touch his books. He touched me on the shoulder (arm). She hasn't even touched the food; 2. (рас)трогать, (раз)волновать Her sad story touched us deeply; touchy а обидчивый She is very touchy; touching a трогательный a touching story (incident, episode, etc)

trouble vt/vi беспокоить(ся), тревожить(ся) What is troubling you? Don't trouble about it; trouble n беспокойство; неприятности Не is having a lot of trouble with his car. Phr be in trouble быть в беде; get into trouble попасть в беду; get sb out of trouble вызволить кого-н из беды; give trouble причинять беспокойство

reach vt/vi 1. достигать; добираться (до) reach home (school, the Institute, a town, the station, etc); The news reached them on the next day. He has reached good results. Phr reach an agreement достичь со­глашения; His words reached my ears; 2. доставать, дотягиваться (до) Can you reach the ceiling? Phr reach for sth протягивать руку за чем-н

disturb vt мешать, беспокоить Don't disturb him when he is at work.

remain vi оставаться After the fire very little remained of the house. He remained unchanged (unhurt, etc). Phr It remains to be seen. Мы еще посмотрим.

appear vi 1. появляться Не appeared quite unexpectedly; 2. появ­ляться, возникать Many new towns have appeared in the North of our country; 3. выходить, издаваться; появляться (в печати) When did this newspaper first appear?

disappear vi исчезать; appearance n1. появ­ление; возникновение; 2. внешность, внешний вид His appearance was very unusual.

hold vt (held) 1. держать (в руке) hold a bag (a book, newspaper, cigarette, etc); 2. занимать, держать, удерживать (место, позицию) Phr hold first (second, etc) place(in sth) занимать, держать первое (второе и т. п.) место (в чем-н); 3. проводить (собрание, конференцию и т. п.) hold a meeting (conference, competition, exhibition, etc)

 

WORD COMBINATIONS

 

I'd (he'd, etc) = I would (he would, etc) like (to do sth) мне (ему и т. п.) хотелось бы (что-н сделать)

show sb around (about) (a factory, a place, a town, etc) показать кому-н завод (город и т. п.)

take sb aside отвести, отозвать кого-н в сторону

be delighted (with sb/sth) восторгаться, восхищаться (кем-н/чем-н)

now and again = now and then то и дело, время от времени

make notes делать заметки

work sth out 1. решить, разрешить что-н; 2. разработать что-н

that's it (вот и) всё; вот именно

 

EXERCISES

COMPREHENSION

 

Ex 1   Answer the following questions.

 

1. When did Chaplin first meet Professor Einstein? 2. What was Professor Einstein doing in California? 3. How did Chaplin learn that Professor Einstein would like to meet him? 4. Why was he so thrilled by the invitation? 5. What made Chaplin believe that Mrs Einstein enjoyed being the wife of the great man? 6. What happened while the Professor was being shown around the studio? 7. Why were so few people invited to dinner at Chaplin's house? 8. What story did Mrs Einstein tell Chap­lin at dinner? 9. How did Mrs Einstein immediately know that something was troubling her husband when he came down to breakfast on the morn­ing the theory of relativity first came to his mind? 10. Why did the Doc­tor only mention the fact that he had a marvelous idea? 11. Why couldn't he tell his wife more about it? 12. Why didn't Einstein want anyone to disturb him while he was working out the problem? 13. How long did it take the scientist to work it out? 14. How much truth was there about the discovery in the story told by Mrs Einstein to Chaplin?

 

Ex 2    Look through the text once again, and:

 

1. See if you can prove that Ch. Chaplin is telling the story (i) se­riously; (ii) humorously. 2. Explain why Ch. Chaplin chose to tell the story of the world's greatest discovery in physics as related by Mrs Einstein. 3. Say what picture you get of (i) Mrs Einstein; (ii) Professor Einstein; (iii) the narrator.

 

Ex 3  Find in the text the English for the following phrases, and use them in retelling and discussing the text.

 

Вперше познайомитися з кимось; великий вчений; читати лекції; з радістю прийняти запрошення; зустрітися на обіді; великий фізик; навіть не намагатися щось приховувати; показувати комусь студію; відвести когось у сторону; бути у захваті; теорія відносності; спадати на думку; зазвичай; майже не доторкнутися до їжі; відчути якісь негаразди; чудова думка; піднятися нагору до кабінету; здійснювати моціон; на кінець; виглядати блідим і стомленим; тримати у руці два аркуші паперу; покласти на стіл.

 

KEY STRUCTURES AND WORD STUDY

 

Ex 4   Give the four forms of the following verbs.

 

meet, say, speak, hide, show, take, think, drink, make, send, hold.

 

Ex 5   Make up five groups of three words associated in meaning or area of usage.

 

assistant professor	letter	scientist	piano	professor
telephone call	violin	studio	telegram	camera
physicist	teacher	flute	film	astronomer

 

Ex 6   In the following groups of words, pick out the word which, in your opin­ion, is the most general in meaning.

 

(a) party, entertainment, dinner party, affair^ gathering, ball, recep­tion, luncheon, social.

(b) chat, talk, conversation, discussion, debate, conference, dialogue, interview.

 

Ex 7   Complete the following, choosing a suitable word from the list.

 

Model: a sheet of paper

 

slice, box, cake (tablet), bar, bottle (carton), suit, length, lump, pack, pair

 

1. cards. 2. material. 3. matches. 4. gloves. 5. sugar. 6. cake. 7. choc­olate. 8. soap. 9. clothes. 10. milk.

 

Ex 8  Change the meaning of the sentences to the opposite adding the prefix 'dis-' to the words in bold type and making other necessary changes. Translate the sentences into Ukrainian.

 

1. She was pleased with the arrangement. 2. He appeared in our town two years ago and at that time his appearance made a great noise. 3. I don't see how you could believe her story. 4. We agree on some questions. 5. I can't say I like the idea. 6. This is what I call an honest answer.

 

Ex 9   Recast the sentences, using verbs instead of nouns and phrases in bold type. Make other necessary changes.

 

(A) 1. At the gate the car came to a stop. 2. Nobody will hear you if you speak in a whisper. 3. What's the trouble? 4.I felt a light touch on my shoulder and turned round. 5. I hear he has published two stories in big magazines this month. That's a nice start for a young writer. 6. For what day do they plan their return to town? 7. His pictures have been on show at the National Gallery.

 

(B) 1. Who made the discovery that lightning is electricity? 2. Who will help you with the preparations for the conference? 3. Nobody want­ed you to make a quick decision. 4. Have you heard of his refusal to take part in the match yet? 5. The new bridge is the pride of the young engi­neer. 6. These books are on sale in the book shop at the corner. 7. We had little choice in the matter. 8. She always makes her appearance when she is least of all expected.

 

Ex 10  In the following groups of sentences, explain the meaning of the words in bold type; say which phrase is used literally and which has a figurative meaning. Translate them into Russian.

 

1. (i) I called at his office yesterday, but found him out. (ii) He was unable to find out the answer. 2. (i) The secretary took out several sheets of paper and prepared to make notes, (ii) He called every Saturday night to take out the girl to dinner or, perhaps, to a dance. 3. (i) He brought out his stamp album and proudly showed his latest buy. (ii) The dis­cussion brought out all the different ideas that we had on the matter. (iii) I'm sure that a study of the problem will bring out many surprising things. 4. (i) Are you coming out with me? (ii) When did the book come out? (iii) It came out that she knew the truth all the time. 5. (i) She smiled and held out her hand to me. (ii) My opponent was an expert chess-player and I didn't believe I could hold out against him much longer.

 

Ex 11  Translate the following sentences into English, using a different phrasal verb in each.

 

work out (2), sell out, think out, hand out, help out, hear out

 

1.План був добре обміркований. 2. Зошити були роздані, переглянуті та знову повернені викладачеві. 3. Вона попросила мене, щоб я її вислухав. 4. Як завжди, він сподівався, що хто-н його виручить. 5. Прошло несколько дней, прежде чем было выработано решение. 6. Пока еще трудно сказать, сколько времени у него уйдет на то, чтобы разработать тему. 7. Словарь был распродан менее чем за не­делю.

 

Ех 12  Compare the meaning of the words in bold type with words of the same root in Ukrainian.

 

1. There are unlimited reserves of energy in the atoms of different chemical elements. 2. Scientists think that only the planet Earth has oceans. 3. Without sea there is no life, no weather, no atmosphere. The sea makes our climate neither very hot nor very cold. 4. Great progress has been made in mechanising heavy work in industry, building and transport. 5. In building work new types of excavators are being used to mechanise excavation work. 6. In oil industry turbine methods are being practised. 7. New types of mechanical, optical and electrical control-regulating apparatus for automatising production and for scien­tific work have been constructed. 8. The radio was born in Russia. On May 7, 1895 at a meeting of the Russian Physical and Chemical Society in St Petersburg the first radio-receiving set in the world was demon­strated by the great Russian scientist A. S. Popov. 9. The world's first cracking of oil at high temperature was experimented in Russia. The theory of the cracking process was worked out by A. A. Letny, a Russian engineer, in 1875. 10. The world's first airplane built by A. F. Mozhaisky, rose into the air in Russia in 1882. 11. The monumental building of the Mineralogical Museum of the Academy of Science, which was founded in the time of Peter I, has one of the world's richest collections of minerals.

 

Ex 13    Fill in the blanks with 'hard' or 'hardly'.

 

1. It — ever snows in this part of the country. 2. It's a — question. She'll — know the answer. 3. The man spoke a very strange kind of Russian. I could — understand him. 4. The work was too — for Carrie. When she left the shop in the evening she was so tired that she could — move. 5. What do you mean by saying that you have — any money left? 6. The girl was so excited that she — knew what she was saying. 7. The boy had had a — life. His parents had been killed in the war when he was — eight.

 

Ex 14  Translate the following sentences, using 'keep' or 'hold' according to the sense.

 

1. Где он держит марки? 2. Ребенок упадет, если вы не будете держать его за руку. 3. Он всегда держит комнату в чистоте. 4. Дер­житесь правой стороны! 5. Он все еще держит первое место по стрель­бе? 6. Вы всегда держите свое слово? 7. Как вы можете держать все эти факты в голове? 8. Он держал сигарету в руке, но не курил. 9. Не выпускайте детей на улицу, держите их дома. Сегодня сильный мо­роз. 10. Не держите продукты долго в холодильнике.

 

Ех 15   Translate the following sentences, using 'receive', 'accept' or 'take' accord­ing to the sense.

 

1. Его приняли очень тепло. 2. Новый проект молодого архитек­тора был принят на конкурс. 3. Они еще не приняли никакого решения до первому вопросу. 4. Не думаю, что он принял ваши слова серьезно. 5. Недавно наш институт принимал делегацию студентов из Латинской Америки. 6. — Почему вы не хотите принять участие в экскурсии? — Я себя что-то плохо чувствую. 7. Их не приняли, так как было уже поздно и рабочий день закончился. 8. —Почему не приняли вашу Статью? — В ней есть ряд ошибок. Мне надо их исправить. 9. Его приняли как старого друга. 10. Они с готовностью приняли наш совет. 11. Благодарим за ваше приглашение, но мы не можем принять его. Мы уезжаем.

 

Ех 16   Paraphrase the following sentences according to the model.

 

Model:    After he drank coffee, he went to the piano and started to play.

After drinking coffee, he went to the piano and started to play.

 

1. After he spent a month in the mountains, he was in good form again. 2. After they thought the matter over, they took a decision. 3. After he had travelled all over the country, he sat down to write a book. 4. They came to an agreement after they had argued for some time. 5. After he had arranged his affairs, he went on a holiday. 6. After the family moved in, they started to make preparations for a house-warming party.

 

Ex 17  Study the following phrases and (a) recall the sentences in which they are used in the text, (b) use them in sentences of your own.

 

invite sb to a place (party); meet at a place (for lunch); show sb around/about a place; take sb aside; have a chat (talk, walk, etc) with sb; at dinner, come to one's mind; work sth out; go (walk) upstairs/down­stairs; return to one's work; hold (have) sth in one's hand.

 

Ex 18    Fill in the blanks with prepositions or adverbs.

 

(A) 1. "I don't see what's wrong — my whispering a few words — your ear?" "You mustn't do a thing like that with other people pres­ent." 2. I don't know yet what to do, but we shall work something —, I am sure. 3. I wonder if you could meet me — the self-service cafete­ria — lunch — half an hour? I'd like to have a chat — you. 4. There hardly passes a day without the boy getting — some kind — trouble. 5. She invited us — her place promising that there would be only her family — dinner. 6. I am not surprised — all that he has so much trou­ble — his car; he hardly knows a thing — cars and motors. 7. If you are afraid that you may forget something, make a note — it. 8. He told us how everything had happened, but still we felt that he was hiding something — us. 9. The telephone started ringing and she reached — it  without getting — — the sofa. 10. She was very proud — her son and  could hardly wait to see him returning home after an absence — three years. 11. The party is to be held — the biggest hall — the town; it is to be the kind — affair one remembers the rest — his life. 12. I wonder why he hasn't mentioned — you that — first there was a lot of trouble — the new machine. 13. I really don't see how I can get you — — trouble. 14. Your love of excitement is going to get you — trouble some day. 15. His picture was accepted — the exhibition.

 

(B) You may remember that I was invited — N. to lecture — the young gentlemen of the University there. — the afternoon of that day I was having a chat — one of the young men who some time before the lecture had shown me — the place. Before the lecture he took me — and said he had an uncle who had never laughed or smiled — the past few years. And with tears — his eyes this young man said, "Oh, if I could only see him laugh once more!"

I was touched. I said I would do my best and work something —. I would try to make him laugh or cry. "I have some jokes — the lecture that will make him laugh and I've got some others that will make him cry or kill him."

He brought his uncle and placed him — the hall full — people right — front — me. I started — simple jokes, then I shot — him old jokes. I threw — him all kinds — jokes that came — my mind, but I never moved him once.

I was surprised. I closed the lecture — last and sat — tired.

"What's the matter — that old man?" I asked the president. "He never laughed or cried once."

"Why, he never heard a thing! The old man has been deaf — years."

(After "How I was Sold in Newark" by Mark Twain)

 

Ex 19  Fill in the blanks with a suitable word. Use the correct form. Translate the sentences into Russian.

 

disturb (2), accept, trouble n (2), hide, hold v, touch v (2), reach v (2), appear,  discover (2), law, proud (2), hardly

 

1. The — of gravitation which was — by the English physicist Isaac Newton made a revolution in science. 2. When the news that Tutan­khamen's body had been found — the world, newspaper reporters — in large numbers in Luxor. 3. Not a sound was heard. Nothing — the quiet of the place. 4. When the mistake was — it was already too late for anything. 5. The children were not to — the dog, not before it was washed at least. 6. When she finished her story she repeated once again she had nothing to — from us and if we chose to disbelieve her, it was our own business. 7. The Professor said he would be busy in his laboratory and did not want anyone to — him there. 8. I could see the boy was having a bad time but he was too — to ask for help. 9. The question was rather unexpected and she — knew what to say. 10. The girl sitting op­posite me in the compartment was — an open book but I clearly saw that her thoughts were somewhere else. 11. "Home at last!" we sang out happily when we felt the plane — ground at the airport. 12. He readily agreed to buy a few things for me. It would be no — at all, he said. He would be shopping anyway. 13. The hour was getting late but no decision had been — yet. 14. You cannot do anything about facts, you can only— them. 15. As far as I can see, the only —with you is that it always takes you years to make up your mind. 16. He was extremely — that he had been chosen to open the conference.

 

Ex 20  Replace the Ukrainian words and phrases by suitable English equivalents in the correct form. Retell the passage.

 

Michael Faraday was born in London in 1791 of a poor family, and as a boy he did not learn much.

In 1804, when he was thirteen, he got some work in a book-seller's shop. He lived among books, and he (начал) to read some of them. The boy could not read every book in the shop because he was busy and had not much time. So he began (выбирать) the books which he liked best. He soon (обнаружил) that his main interest was in (науке), and espec­ially in electricity. (Как всякий истинный ученый) Faraday wanted to make experiments, but he had too little money.

Faraday heard of talks on science which were being given by one of the greatest (ученых) of the time. Sir Humphry Davy. As he sat and listened to the great man he (делал записи). Faraday wanted to give his life to (науке), so he wrote a letter to Sir Humphry Davy and asked for his help.

Sir Humphry (пригласил) Faraday to come to see him, and gave him some (научную работу) to do. Faraday (был в восторге). His work at first was only to wash and (готовить) all the things which Davy and his fellow-scientists were to use in their experiments, but he (проводил много времени с учеными) and could listen to what they said, and he (мог наблюдать их за работой).

Sir Humphry sometimes (путешествовал) in Europe, where he went to meet the great (ученые) of other countries, and one day he (решил) to make another of these trips. He asked Faraday if he (хотел бы), to come with him.

Faraday, of course, was thrilled and (с радостью принял приглаше­ние). He had never been more than a few miles from London in his life.

Faraday (получил большое удовольствие от) his time in Europe, but he was not really sorry at the end of the journey because he was now able to (продолжить свою собственную работу) and experiments in England.

He was wondering whether a magnet could (кaким-то образом) be made to give an electric current. Faraday (был совершенно уверен) that a current could be made, but he had very little time for experi­ments. His outside work (занимала все его время). Не could stop his outside work, of course, but if he did so, he would lose most of the £ 1,200 a year which he (получал). Не had to (выбирать) between (наукой) and money, and he (выбрал науку).

At first he was quite unable to make an electric current with his magnets. But one day (ему в голову пришла великолепная мысль). Не (провел) the magnet near the wire. And then he got what he wanted: an electric current in the wire. Of course, he still had to (разработать идею).

After (нескольких) experiments (этого рода) he made a machine. It was the beginning of all the great machines that make electricity today. All (современные) turbines are made on the principles that (были разработаны) by Faraday. His (открытие) was the beginning of the electrical age, which (изменил) the face of the earth.

(After "Who Did It First" by G. C. Thornley)

 

Ex 21    Speak on the following topics, using the words and phrases given below.

 

1. Professor Einstein Conies on a Visit to California

 

a famous scientist; a great physicist; be famous for; theories of rela­tivity; make many important discoveries; make a revolution in physics; be invited to some place.

 

2. Chaplin Meets the Einsteins

 

a telephone call; a surprise; receive an invitation to lunch; be thrilled; be eager to meet sb; accept the invitation gladly; meet the Profes­sor, his wife; meet for lunch; be proud (of); enjoy being the wife of the great man; be unable to hide one's feelings.

 

3. Chaplin Invites the Professor to his House

 

take sb aside; whisper sth into sb's ear; give sb an excellent idea; be delighted with the idea; admire sb greatly; invite to dinner; make the necessary arrangements (for); a small affair; have a nice, quiet chat (talk).

 

4. The Story of the Discovery as Told by Mrs Einstein

 

come down for breakfast; as usual; wear a dressing-gown; notice sth unusual about sb; hardly touch a thing; be lost in thought; im­mediately see that sth is wrong; be upset; wonder what is troubling a person; ask what the matter is; be eager to learn sth; refuse to say anything; except; have a wonderful (marvelous) idea; go up to one's study; not disturb sb in his work; spend all one's time in the study work­ing hard; work sth out; rise early; walk a little for exercise; make notes; remain in one's room for days; at last; appear; hold in one's hand; have the whole theory on two sheets of paper.

 

Ex 22    Test translation.

 

1. Открытия, которые были сделаны столетия назад, продолжают играть большую роль в современной науке. 2. В Сибири недавно были открыты месторождения природного газа. 3. Когда мы обнаружили, что сбились с пути, было уже поздно. Нам пришлось развести костер и заночевать в лесу. 4. Он давно интересуется книгами о научных открытиях. Не удивительно, что он знает не только имена многих ученых, но и открытия, которые они сделали. 5. Я так спешил, что оставил все деньги дома..6. Почему бы не пригласить их поехать вместе с нами в отпуск? Ч уверен, что они с удовольствием согласятся. 7. Те­перь уже трудно вспомнить, кому эта идея пришла в голову. 8. Боюсь, что директор не сможет вас завтра принять. Он весь день будет занят на конференции. 9. Никто не удивился, когда картину молодого ху­дожника приняли на выставку. 10. Я получил приглашение на вечер, но не смогу пойти. Я завтра уезжаю. 11. Институт может гордиться своей баскетбольной командой. Она заняла первое место. 12. Они разговаривали шепотом, так как было поздно и в доме все спали. 13. Он едва проронил слово за весь вечер. Он был чем-то расстроен. 14. Все были глубоко тронуты его рассказом. Он говорил с чувством, и его слушали с большим интересом. 15. Я очень расстроился, когда услышал, что у него неприятности. Ты случайно не знаешь, в чем там дело? 16. Этот ребенок ужасно избалован и всегда доставляет много хлопот. 17. Когда они наконец добрались до лагеря, они чув­ствовали себя очень усталыми. 18. Мне бы хотелось поговорить с ним по этому вопросу сегодня. 19. Когда вы переходите улицу, посмотрите сначала налево, а дойдя до середины дороги, посмотрите направо. 20. Надеюсь, что я вам не помешаю, если я останусь здесь на несколько минут. 21. Мне не хотелось беспокоить его в такой поздний час, но у меня не было иного выхода. Мне очень нужен был его совет. 22. Его появление было для нас неожиданным. 23. План научной работы уже разработан и будет обсуждаться на следующем заседании.

 

GRAMMAR

Passive Voice (contd)

 

1. Perfect Tense Forms

Ex 23   Study the following chart.           

 

1. The telegram has just been sent. 2. This house has been built for a year (since autumn). 3. The work had been done by five o'clock yesterday. 4. Everything will have been arranged by the end of the day (by the time he comes back, etc).

 

Ex 24  Supply the missing part of the analytical form of the verb in the Passive Voice (see the chart above).

 

1. A lot of houses — been built in our town this year. 2. Don't close the window. It has just — opened. 3. The next morning when I came out, I saw that the streets — been washed out by rain. 4. I didn't know that he hadn't — invited. 5. The construction of the bridge — — been finished before winter comes. 6. His parents — been married five years when he was born. 7. How long has this stadium — built? 8. He went away last year and he — not — heard of ever since. 9. I wondered why he hadn't — taught any foreign language.

 

Ex 25    Use the Passive Voice according to the model.

 

Model 1:     A: Please, bring some chairs into Room 43.

N: But they have just (or already) been brought.

 

1. Please, choose the pictures for the show. 2. Please, send him a telegram. 3, Will you buy some bread? 4. Please, give them the instruc­tions. 5. Will you be sending an invitation to them? 6. Can you show your method to the young specialist? 7. Please, return all the books to the library. 8. When will you start cutting the sandwiches for the cocktail party? 9. Will you be waking him up? 10. Please, open the window in the bedroom.

 

Model2:     A: Are you going to send for the doctor?

N: Why, he has just been sent for.

 

1. Are they going to tell him about the incident? 2. Are you going to invite them to the party? 3. Is he going to pay for the tickets? 4. Is anybody going to speak to the Dean about the matter? 5. Is she going to send this dressing gown to the cleaner's? 6. Are you going to call up for a taxi?

 

Ex 26   Open the brackets, using the Passive Voice (perfect forms).

 

1. He was sure that his mistake never (discover). 2. She didn't fol­low the advice she (give). 3. When she returned, the subject of the con­versation already (change). 4. Everybody (send) an invitation? 5. I didn't know that the letter (lose). 6. He said he had never been there but he often (tell) about this place. 7. All the books from the library (return) by the end of term. 8. The invitation (refuse; accept)? 9. It always (know) as a most wonderful place for a holiday. 10. There are books that (not read) for years. 11. When we came to the cinema, all the seats (sell). 12. I never (speak) to like that before. 13. The house was dark and damp inside like any other building which (not live in). 14. When my parents were born, television (not invent) yet.

 

Ex 27   Use the verbs in the Passive Voice.

 

1. My chief has promised me a four-day holiday. 2. She had written the answers to all the questions long before the end of the lesson. 3. They have always listened to these lectures with interest. 4. She has thrown away at this year's newspapers. 5. They have always laughed at his jokes.6. They have known this fact for years. 7. She said that they hadn't invited him. 8. He knew that some historian had described this period buthe didn't remember his name. 9. I wondered where they had hidden the key. 10. He wondered why they had posted the letter unstamped. 11. No one has lived in this house for the last hundred years. 12. He left two years ago and we haven't heard from him ever since. 13. Have they told him about the changes in the timetable?

 

Ex 28    Translate the following sentences, using the Passive Voice (perfect forms).

 

1. Колумб помер, не дізнавшись, що ним був відкритий новий континент. 2. Запрошення не було прийнято, тому що воно було отримано занадто пізно. 3. Було обговорено тільки три питання, коли ми почули дзвоник. 4. Ця кімната завжди використовувалась для гостей. 5. Вони заблукали тому, що їм не показали дороги. 6. Йому завжди давали молоко перед сном. 7. Її тільки що відвезли до лікарні. 8. Ці фільми відрізняються від тих, що нам показували до сих пір.

 

II. Continuous Tense Forms

 

Ex 29   Study the following chart.

 

A new road	is being	made	there now.
	was being		there when I stayed.
			in this town.

 

Ex 30  Supply the missing part of the analytical form of the verb in the Passive Voice (see the chart above).

 

1. He could not do a thing when he knew he — being watched. 2. He didn't show much interest when earlier theories on the subject — being discussed. 3. Close the door please, little Jane — being washed. 4. The boys watched how the car was — cleaned. 5. His speech is — translated for the foreign guests. 6. What do you feel when your favour­ite record is being —?

 

Ex 31    Complete the following sentences using the Past Continuous Tense.

 

Model:   When I came to this town three years ago, this bridge across the Volga was still being built.

 

1. I haven't been to the show but I was present when the best photos (choose). 2. When I left the Institute I didn't know yet the marks the students had got because their papers (look through). 3. When I was a worker at this factory this work still (do) by hand. 4. Just this very question (discuss) when I joined in the conversation. 5. He entered the hall in the dark and didn't understand at first what film (show). 6. She had the feeling that she (watch). 7. I wasn't surprised that he (listen to with such interest). He is a very good lecturer. 8. He was disturbed by the noise coming from the room next to his. He was sure that some experiments (make) there. 9. When she entered the class-room, the last student (examine).

 

Ex 32  Use the verbs in bold type in the Passive Voice. Make all necessary changes.

 

1. They are making a lot of new experiments in their laboratory now. 2. He was sure that somebody was following him. 3. Everybody is still laughing at his jokes. 4. We couldn't give him the daily prog­ram, we were still working it out. 5. Are they still painting tea cups by hand? 6. What are they selling in this little shop? 7. What happened? Why was a crowd of people pushing the car? 8. She felt they were looking at her.

 

Ex 33 Translate the following sentences, using the Passive Voice (continuous form).

 

1. Його слухали з такою цікавістю, що ніхто не помітив, як я зайшов. 2.  Що будується на тій стороні ріки? 3. Я довго не міг зрозуміти, чому над ним сміялися. 4. У нього було таке відчуття, що за ним хтось іде. 5. Діти знали, що за ними спостерігають. 6. Що пояснювали групі, коли ви до них приєднались? 7. Не заходьте без запрошення, у залі обговорюється дуже важливе питання. 8. – Що там так обговорюють? – На мою думку, вчорашній фільм. 9. Йому сказали, що музей закрили тиждень тому і що він буде відкритий до ювілею письменника.

Mixed Bag

 

Ex 34    Open the brackets, using the correct form of the verb in the Passive Voice.

 

1. Robert Burns' poems (translate) into lots of languages and always (enjoy and sing) by the people all over the world. 2. In 1896, when gold (discover) in Alaska, Jack London moved there together with thousands of other men. His life in Alaska (describe) in many of his stories. 3. Crick­et is England's oldest game and (play) before the Normans came in 1066. 4. They say golf (be born) in Denmark. 5. Golf (play) in the United States as early as 1779. 6. Do you know that tennis (play) more than a hundred years?

 

Ex 35  Open the brackets, using the correct tense form (active or passive). Retell the passage.

 

Until a few years ago, you (cannot enter) Nepal except on foot There (be) no roads into Nepal, and no airfields. Anyone who (want) to visit the country (walk) across the mountains, or (carry) by porters. All goods, too, (take) into the country in the same way, along narrow and difficult mountain paths. Sometimes they (lose) on the way.

After people and goods (carry) into and out of Nepal in this way for hundreds of years, the airplane (arrive). An airfield (build) near Katmandu, the capital of Nepal, where small planes (can land) when the weather (allow) it. Passengers and important goods (begin) (take) into and out of Nepal by air. Today, there (be) a regular air-service be­tween Nepal and India, but, of course, heavy or very big goods (cannot put) in the small airplanes which alone (can use) the airfield near Kat­mandu; and the weather often (make) flying impossible.

Now a road (build) from India to Nepal. It (finish) a few years ago. It (cannot use) by trucks or big cars, but jeeps (can drive) along it if they (go) carefully. In the next few years, the road probably (make) wider and better.

Of course, this road (run) through very beautiful country a lot of which (cover) with thick forest. Great mountains and rushing rivers (cross) as the road (turn) its way up on to the "Roof of the World", as it (call).

(After "An Intermediate Refresher Course" by L A. Hill)

 

Ex 36    Rewrite (or retell) in narrative form.

 

A: Hello, John. What's the news? Has the new manager had a talk with the staff of the laboratory yet?

J:   He had. If I am not mistaken, it was on Tuesday, but I'm not quite sure. Never mind.

A: What did he say?

J:   He started by saying he knew how busy we all were, and he didn't want to take up much of our time.

A: Did he? I mean did he take up much of your time?

J:   As a matter of fact, he did not.

A: What is he like as a manager?

J:   Hard to say so far. He was frank enough to say that he needed our help and could get nowhere without the staff who had been working in the lab for so long.

A: That was really a frank and brave thing to say, I like that. Did you agree with all his plans?

J:   We agreed with some and disagreed with others. What we like about the man is that he feels that great changes are needed and the whole organization of work in the lab wants bringing up to date.

(After "Real Politic" by A. Wilson)

 

The Article

 

(a) the use and omission of the article in close and loose apposition

 

Ex 37   Study the chart.

 

close apposition	Meet Professor Jones (Captain Smith, etc).  The writer (worker, student, composer, etc) Smirnov lives next door.
loose apposition	Speak to Ivanov, head of the expedition. Yesterday I met Pavlov, a student of group 3.

 

Ex 38    Insert the article where necessary.

 

1. — worker Ivanov is — deputy to — Supreme Soviet. 2. Fomin, — scientist, is known for his Arctic expeditions. 3. I'd like to speak to Matveyev, — engineer at your plant. 4. — Professor Mikhailov hopes he will get your paper before — conference starts. 5. I can recommend' — very good doctor, — Doctor Vetrova. — doctor called on me every day when I was down with pneumonia. 6. — composer Petrov is well-known to — cinema-goers for his music to many films. 7. Meet —Captain Trent, he is our new colleague. 8. — writer Gardner will always re­member — day he walked into — publishing house with his first manu­script under his arm.

 

(b) the use and omission of the article before nouns used predісatіve1у

 

 

Ex 39    Study the chart.

 

She was chairman at the meeting. Ivanov was a president of this Association. He was president since 1980 to 1982.

 

Ex 40    Insert the article where necessary.

 

1. George Washington was — president of the USA; he was — pres­ident from 1789 to 1797. 2. He studied nights to become — algebra teacher and finally rose to be — headmaster of a high school. 3. She is — head librarian at our local public library. 4. — Doctor Smith is — president of — Medical Association. 5. "Who will be — chairman of Monday's conference?" "— student Stepanov agreed to be — chair­man."

 

Ex 41    Translate the following.

 

1. О.Ю. Шмідт був керівником експедиції на легендарному “Челюскінці”. 2. Ї.Д. Папанін був начальником першої радянської експедиції на Північний полюс. 3. Батько Д.Ї.Менделєєва був директором гімназії у Тобольську. 4. Авраам Лінкольн був президентом США з 1861 по 1865 рік. 5. Ви коли-н чули про новий метод професора Ніколаєва? 6. Смірнов, староста нашого факультету, просив передати вам, що конференція відбудеться у середу. 7. Вам може допомогти мій друг Кузьмін, студент інституту іноземних мов. 8. Де я можу знайти інженера Петрова? 9. Форд, капітан корабля, був на містку, коли пароплав заходив у порт. 10. За лікарем Крюковим вже пішли, він буде за півгодини.

 

READING

 

Ex 42    Read the text, and do the assignments coming after it.

 

THE DISCOVERY OF THE X-RAY

 

Scientists working on a problem do not know and sometimes can't even guess what the final result will be. Professor Röntgen* was a phys­icist at the University of Würzburg in Germany. Late on Friday, 8 November, 1895, he was doing an experiment in his laboratory when he noticed something extraordinary. He had covered an electric bulb with black cardboard, and when he switched on the current he saw little dancing lights on his table. Now the bulb was completely covered; how then could any ray penetrate? On the table there were some pieces of paper which had been covered with metal salts. It was on this paper that the lights were shining. Professor Röntgen took a piece of this paper and held it at a distance from the lamp. Between it and the lamp he placed a number of objects, a book, a pack of cards, a piece of wood and a doorkey. The ray penetrated every one of them except the key. This mysterious ray could shine through everything except the metal. He called his wife into the laboratory and asked her to hold her hand be­tween the lamp and the photographic plate. She was very surprised by this request, but she obediently held up her hand for a quarter of an hour, and when the plate was developed there was a picture of the bones of her hand and of the ring on one finger. The ray could pass through the flesh and not through the bone or the ring.

At a scientific meeting where he described what happened. Professor Röntgen called this new ray "the Unknown", the X-ray. Doctors quickly saw how this could be used, and soon there were X-ray machines in all the big hospitals. At first the doctors did not understand how powerful the rays were and many of them were injured, losing a finger or an arm through exposure to X-rays when they were using the machines. The most obvious use for this discovery was to make it possible for doctors and surgeons to see exactly how a bone was fractured. Other uses came later. It was found that these rays could be used to destroy cancer cells, just as they destroyed the healthy cells of the doctors who first used the ma­chine. Methods were found later by which "ulcers in the stomach could be located, and the lungs could be X-rayed to show if there was any tuberculosis present. "Mass X-ray" units are sent round to factories and detect early signs of trouble in the lungs.

Unfortunately for Professor Röntgen, whose discovery did so much for medical science, envious colleagues spread the story that he had stolen his discovery from a laboratory assistant who worked for him. He died, poor and forgotten, in 1923.

(After "Britain in the Modern World, The Twentieth Century" by E. N. Nash and A. M. Newth)

 

Assignments

 

(a) Explain the meaning of the following words. (Look for clues in the text.)

 

1. current, 2. penetrate, 3. plate, 4. request, 5. injured, 6. cell, 7. detect.

 

(b) Quickly look through the list and mark the lettered phrase nearest in meaning to the word or phrase tested.

 

1. Guess: (i) know for sure; (ii) be in two minds; (iii) suppose.

2. At a distance: (i) not very near; (ii) very close; (iii) a long way off.

3. Mysterious: (i) hard to explain; (ii) unexplainable; (iii) easy to explain.

4. Obediently: (і) unthinkingly; (ii) unwillingly; (iii) willingly.

5. Through in "through exposure to X-rays": (i) with the help of; (ii) in spite of; (iii) as a result of.

6. Destroy: (i) kill; (ii) make useless; (iii) break to pieces.

 

(c) Briefly describe the experiment made by Professor Röntgen.

 

(d) Say whether, in your opinion. Professor Röntgen knew he was going to discover the X-ray, or he discovered it by chance. Quote facts from the text.

 

(e) Look through the text once again, and select the statement which best expresses its main idea. Explain your choice.

 

(f) Sum up what the text has to say on each of the following points.

 

1. How the X-ray got its name. 2. How it happened that many doc­tors were injured through exposure to X-rays. 3. The most important uses of the X-ray at the present time.

 

(g) Write a précis of the text.

 

Ex 43  Read the text carefully, consulting the dictionary, if necessary. During the second reading note the key sentence in each paragraph. Write five questions covering the main points, answer each question in one complete sentence in your own words as far as possible; then, using your answers as guides, write a summary of the text.

 

In the intricate complex of historical processes in the second half of the 20th century, one of the most crucial is the scientific-technological revolution. It is going on in socialist and capitalist countries and is beginning to take hold in the countries of the Third World; it is thus acquiring a global character. The scientific-technological revolution itself is a profound, qualitative revolution in the forces of production — in this lies its importance. It offers possibilities for a radical transfor­mation of the methods of production, creating advanced instruments of production, incorporating new principles, advanced materials, it brings new industries to life and makes possible a previously unheard of increase in efficiency in all aspects of production.

The current revolution in technology signifies a profound transfor­mation both in the instruments and other technical means of labour and in the methods of managing and organising the process of production and even in the objects of labour. Consequently, it is necessary to think of the technological revolution in the broadest sense of the term — as a revolution in the very elements of the productive forces.

The revolution in science is a dialectical negation of all the previous and essentially mechanistic views of the world. The process of revolu­tionary transformation encompasses almost all the natural sciences. Their paradigms, i.e., the established, basic premises, canons and con­ceptions that yesterday seemed certain today reveal their shortcomings and limitations and are being rapidly replaced with new paradigms.

One of the most important results of Marxist research on the prob­lem of the technological revolution is the conclusion that it is impossible to restrict the modern technological revolution to scientific or techno­logical progress. To the extent that science becomes a productive force, the universal education of people, the development of the creative forces of every man, becomes a crucial parameter in the development of the material base of civilisation and all the more becomes an inseparable component and an independent factor in the growth of the forces of production.

 

SPEECH AND COMPOSITION

Ex 44   Answer the following questions, using the vocabulary of the lesson. Sum up your answers (orally, or in writing).

 

ON GEOGRAPHICAL DISCOVERIES

 

1. What is a discovery? 2. What great discoveries do you know? 3. When were most of the great discoveries made? 4. What is the 15th century famous for? 5. Who discovered America? 6. Did Columbus know that he had discovered a new continent? 7. Whom is the new con­tinent named after? 8. What great discoveries have been made by Rus­sian scientists?

 

ON SCIENTIFIC DISCOVERIES

 

1. What great scientific discoveries were made by Lomonosov (Pavlov Curie, etc)? 2. In what year did Mendeleyev discover the Periodic Law? 3. Why did the discovery of the Periodic Law make a revolution in science? 4. How did the scientific world take it? 5. Was there much discussion and argument before it was generally accepted? 6. Are there any new theories on the question now? 7. What else is Mendeleyev fa­mous for?

 

ELECTRICITY AND ITS USES

 

1. Who discovered electricity? 2. How was it discovered? 3. What did the discovery of electricity mean to mankind? 4. How is electricity used? 5. When was the first Soviet power station built? 6. What electric power stations have been built since then? 7. Do you remember what V. I. Lenin said about the role of electricity in the life of our country?

 

ON INVENTIONS

 

1. What is an inventor? 2. By whom and when was radio invented? 3. Why is this an important invention? 4. How is it used? 5. What inventions were made by Kulibin, Yablochkov, Edison, Alexander Bell, James Watt, etc?

 

WHAT'S YOUR WAY OF WORKING?

 

1. What's the best place where you can work undisturbed? 2. Why don't you work at home? Why do you go to the library (reading-room)? 3. What is your favourite library? Why do you like it better than any other library in Moscow? 4. Do you make notes when reading something? 5. Do you make (take) notes during lectures? Are they a great help when you prepare for a seminar or an exam?

 

 

AN INVITATION

 

1. What were you doing last Sunday? 2. Was it an invitation to a birthday party, a house-warming party or just a get-together of old friends? 3. Was it an invitation you had been expecting or did it come quite unexpectedly? 4. Are they old friends of yours? How long have you known them? 5. Do they still live at the old place or have they moved to one of the new districts since you visited them last? 6. Was it any trouble finding the house? 7. Was the party fun? Did you enjoy your­self?

 

Ex 45    Read and discuss the following story. Speak on some other scientist.

 

Dmitri Ivanovich Mendeleyev was born on February 7, 1834 in To­bolsk. He came of a family of heroic pioneers. His grandfather was known as the publisher of the first newspaper in Siberia, the Irtish. His father was director of the local high school.

When Dmitri was still a boy his father died and his mother, who had made up her mind that Dmitri must get a good scientific educa­tion, moved first to Moscow, then to St. Petersburg where Mendeleyev entered the Pedagogical Institute. He worked hard and graduated at the head of the class. He was made professor of the University of St. Petersburg before he was 32. He wrote: "We need a double number of Newtons to discover the secrets of nature and to bring life into harmony with its laws."

Mendeleyev had spent twenty years studying the chemical elements. Before the end of the 19th century he surprised the world with his Pe­riodic Law. He placed all the elements in order, starting with the lightest, hydrogen, and finishing his Table with uranium, the heaviest. In his Table he made places for more than 63 elements. But there were places in his Table which were still empty. Were they always to remain empty? Mendeleyev predicted several undiscovered elements.

The whole scientific world was thrilled.

At the time Mendeleyev died (1907) there were already 86 elements in the Periodic Table.

Mendeleyev was not only a scientist, he was also a social reformer. He hated the tyranny and oppression of Czarist Russia; he thought women to be equal to men in their struggle for work and education.

(After "The Greatest Discovery of the Century" by Bernard Jaffe)

 

Ex 46    Read the passage. Answer the questions. Retell the passage in English.

 

Як була відкрита Антарктида

 

     16 липня 1819 року шлюпи “Мирний” та “Восток” вийшли з Кронштадту. Вони відходили до Антарктиді у пошуках невідомої Південной Землі, про яку відомий англійський мореплавець Джеймс Кук писав у своєму щоденнику, що такої землі не існує.

     Командиром шлюпу “Восток”, а також начальником експедиції був Ф.Ф.Беллінсгаузен. Шлюпом “Мирний” командував М.П.Лазарєв.

     Шлюпи йшли по Атлантиці униз. Далеко позаду залишились Лондон, Тенериф, Рио-де_Жанейро, Південні острови.

     27 січня 1820 року експедиція перетнула Південне полярне коло. Наступного дня рух експедиції був зупинений стіною із льоду. Таким чином експедиція Беллінсгаузена була відкрита Антарктида. Було зроблено одн з найвидатніших географічних відкриттів.

     Сімсот п’ятдесят один день тривала експедиція. Було пройдено біля ста тисяч кілометрів. Всього було відкрито, описано і нанесено на карту двадцять дев”ять великих та малих островів.

     Рік потому “Восток” і “Мирний” вийшли саме там, де є війшли, - в районі острова Південна Георгія.

 

 

Questions

 

1. When did the sloops the Mirni and the Vostok leave Kronstadt? 2. Where were they going? 3. What were the seafarers hoping to find in the Antarctic? 4. What did the famous English seafarer James Cook write in his diary about the Unknown Southern Land? 5. What sloop was under the command of F. F. Bellingshausen? 6. Who headed the Russian scientific expedition to the Antarctic? 7. What sloop was under the command of М. P. Lazaryev? 8. What course did the sloops follow? 9. What places did they pass on their way to the Antarctic? 10. When did the expedition cross the Antarctic Circle? 11. What ap­peared before them the next day? 12. What stopped the movement of the boats? 13. What was in their way? 14. Why didn't the seafarers know that they had made one of the greatest geographical discoveries of the century? 15. How long did the expedition last? 16. How many kilometres were covered? 17. How many islands were discovered, described and mapped? 18. In what place did the sloops leave the Antarctic waters?

 

Ex 47    Act as interpreter. Sum up the dialogue.

 

A: How is freedom of scientific, technical, and artistic work guaran­teed in the USSR?

В:      Держава створює необхідні матеріальні умови для розвитку наукової, технічної та художньої творчості. Академія Наук СРСР стоїть на чолі наукової думки в нашій країні.

A: What questions does the Academy of Sciences deal with at its sessions?

В:   За встановленою традицією щорічно навесні радянські вчені скликаються на сесію, щоб підвести підсумки виконаної за рік роботи (review their last year's work) і спланувати задачі на майбутнє.

A: What scientific discoveries can you mention?

В:  Це винаходи в галузі фізики, хімії та біології. Вони мають велике практичне значення для різних галузей економіки країни.

A: How do Soviet scientists look upon science?

В:      Наука сьогодні не є більше річчю в собі. Ц активній інструмент планування, прогнозування та розвитку наукового, технічного та соціального прогресу.

A: What can you say about the educational importance of scientific discoveries?

В: Вони дають людині нові відомості про оточуючий нас матеріальний світ.

 

Ех 48    Use the following words and expressions in situations of your own.

 

1. Modern Science

 

the age of great (wonderful, etc) discoveries in physics, chemistry and other sciences; a scientific and technological revolution; Soviet science; make great (important) progress; hold first place in the world in many spheres of research; change the face of the earth; be meant for the good of man; bring changes into our way of life; Soviet scientist; be fa­mous for; do important scientific work; work out new methods; be widely used in industry and agriculture.

 

2. An Experiment in Physics

 

be interested in physics; take part in the work of a Students' Scien­tific Society; a marvellous idea; come to one's mind; talk things over with one's Professor; follow the Professor's advice; spend a lot of time in the laboratory; make experiments; have a lot of trouble at first; re­main in the laboratory for days; not disturb sb in his work; get interest­ing results; work sth out at last; be invited to speak at a scientific con­ference; be thrilled; accept the invitation; be proud of sth; write an article; appear (be published) in a scientific magazine.

 

3. The Telephone is a Wonderful Invention

 

Mr Brown: frankly enjoy having a telephone at home; be extremely proud of sth; a marvellous idea; invite Mr Smith to dinner; hope to have a nice quiet chat; take up the receiver; make a call; wait for the wife to answer the telephone; hand the receiver to Mr Smith; watch Mr Smith's face; immediately see that sth is wrong; not expect sth to happen; hardly know what to say.

Mrs Brown: hear the telephone ringing; believe that it is her husband at the other end of the line; say sth quite frankly; be against sth; not choose one's words; (the words) be meant for her husband's ears only; repeat several times; not keep a hotel; be displeased; even not try to hide one's anger.

 

 

 

 

Ex 49   Discuss the following, giving your arguments for or against.

 

1. You believe that a person can become a genius by very hard work Your friend disagrees, saying that even if a person works hard, he has very little chance of becoming a genius if he wasn't born one.

2. The same facts or happenings are often interpreted differently by different people. You say that it is so because people never really get a full understanding of a fact or a full picture of a happening, or to put it differently, their interpretation is a' result of their limited knowledge of a fact, subject, etc. Your friend believes that it happens so because people are less interested in the fact or happening as such, and are more interested in their own reactions to it, in their feelings and thoughts.

3. Your friend believes that it's wonderful to be famous. What do you think?

 

Ex 50    Subjects for oral and written composition.

 

1. Retell the story in the person of: (a) Charles Chaplin; (b) Mrs Einstein; (c) Professor Einstein's assistant.

2. Say how true was the story told by Mrs Einstein to Charles Chap­lin.

3. Tell the story of some great scientific discovery.

4. Tell the life story of a great scientist.

5. The Radio (or Television) and its uses.

6. Science in the home.

7. Tell a story to illustrate the proverb: "Necessity is the Mother of Invention."

8. Describe an episode or incident that had happened to you ending the story with the words: "I had had all my trouble for nothing."